US20110269244A1 - Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein - Google Patents

Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20110269244A1
US20110269244A1 US12/982,352 US98235210A US2011269244A1 US 20110269244 A1 US20110269244 A1 US 20110269244A1 US 98235210 A US98235210 A US 98235210A US 2011269244 A1 US2011269244 A1 US 2011269244A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
independently
alkyl
formula
integer
compound
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/982,352
Inventor
Russell C. Petter
Charles F. Jewell
Kwangho Lee
Aravind Prasad Medikonda
Deqiang Niu
Lixin Qiao
Juswinder Singh
Zhendong Zhu
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Celgene CAR LLC
Original Assignee
Avila Therapeutics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Avila Therapeutics Inc filed Critical Avila Therapeutics Inc
Priority to US12/982,352 priority Critical patent/US20110269244A1/en
Assigned to AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC. reassignment AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: JEWELL, CHARLES F., LEE, KWANGHO, MEDIKONDA, ARAVIND PRASAD, NU, DEQIANG, PETTER, RUSSELL C., QIAO, LIXIN, SINGH, JUSWINDER, ZHU, ZHENDONG
Assigned to AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC. reassignment AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: JEWELL, CHARLES F., LEE, KWANGHO, MEDIKONDA, ARAVIND PRASAD, NIU, DEQIANG, PETTER, RUSSELL C., QIAO, LIXIN, SINGH, JUSWINDER, ZHU, ZHENDONG
Publication of US20110269244A1 publication Critical patent/US20110269244A1/en
Assigned to CELGENE AVILOMICS RESEARCH, INC. reassignment CELGENE AVILOMICS RESEARCH, INC. CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC.
Priority to US15/423,115 priority patent/US11542492B2/en
Assigned to CELGENE CAR LLC reassignment CELGENE CAR LLC MERGER (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CELGENE AVILOMICS RESEARCH, INC.
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/96—Stabilising an enzyme by forming an adduct or a composition; Forming enzyme conjugates
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12—Antivirals
    • A61P31/14—Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D207/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having no double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/16—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/46—Two or more oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen atoms
    • C07D239/48—Two nitrogen atoms
    • C07D239/49—Two nitrogen atoms with an aralkyl radical, or substituted aralkyl radical, attached in position 5, e.g. trimethoprim
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/08—Bridged systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D493/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system
    • C07D493/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D493/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D495/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D495/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D495/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D513/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00
    • C07D513/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D513/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D519/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing more than one system of two or more relevant hetero rings condensed among themselves or condensed with a common carbocyclic ring system not provided for in groups C07D453/00 or C07D455/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/10—Transferases (2.)
    • C12N9/12—Transferases (2.) transferring phosphorus containing groups, e.g. kinases (2.7)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/14—Hydrolases (3)
    • C12N9/48—Hydrolases (3) acting on peptide bonds (3.4)
    • C12N9/50—Proteinases, e.g. Endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.25)
    • C12N9/503—Proteinases, e.g. Endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.25) derived from viruses
    • C12N9/506—Proteinases, e.g. Endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.25) derived from viruses derived from RNA viruses
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00—Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/93—Ligases (6)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/25—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving enzymes not classifiable in groups C12Q1/26 - C12Q1/66
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/34—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving hydrolase
    • C12Q1/37—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving hydrolase involving peptidase or proteinase
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/48—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving transferase
    • C12Q1/485—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving transferase involving kinase
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Y—ENZYMES
    • C12Y207/00—Transferases transferring phosphorus-containing groups (2.7)
    • C12Y207/11—Protein-serine/threonine kinases (2.7.11)
    • C12Y207/11001—Non-specific serine/threonine protein kinase (2.7.11.1), i.e. casein kinase or checkpoint kinase
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Y—ENZYMES
    • C12Y304/00—Hydrolases acting on peptide bonds, i.e. peptidases (3.4)
    • C12Y304/21—Serine endopeptidases (3.4.21)
    • C12Y304/21098—Hepacivirin (3.4.21.98)
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12Y—ENZYMES
    • C12Y603/00—Ligases forming carbon-nitrogen bonds (6.3)
    • C12Y603/02—Acid—amino-acid ligases (peptide synthases)(6.3.2)
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G01—MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16B—BIOINFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR GENETIC OR PROTEIN-RELATED DATA PROCESSING IN COMPUTATIONAL MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
    • G16B15/00—ICT specially adapted for analysing two-dimensional or three-dimensional molecular structures, e.g. structural or functional relations or structure alignment
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16B—BIOINFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR GENETIC OR PROTEIN-RELATED DATA PROCESSING IN COMPUTATIONAL MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
    • G16B15/00—ICT specially adapted for analysing two-dimensional or three-dimensional molecular structures, e.g. structural or functional relations or structure alignment
    • G16B15/30—Drug targeting using structural data; Docking or binding prediction
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
    • G16C—COMPUTATIONAL CHEMISTRY; CHEMOINFORMATICS; COMPUTATIONAL MATERIALS SCIENCE
    • G16C20/00—Chemoinformatics, i.e. ICT specially adapted for the handling of physicochemical or structural data of chemical particles, elements, compounds or mixtures
    • G16C20/50—Molecular design, e.g. of drugs

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to enzyme inhibitors. More specifically, the present invention relates to ligand-directed covalent modification of lysine-containing proteins.
  • reversible inhibitors have been developed that are efficacious therapeutic agents, reversible inhibitors have certain disadvantages. For example, many reversible inhibitors of kinases interact with the ATP-binding site. Because the structure of the ATP-binding site is highly conserved among kinases, it has been very challenging to develop reversible inhibitors that selectively inhibit one or more desired kinases. In addition, because reversible inhibitors dissociate from their target protein, the duration of inhibition may be shorter than desired. Thus, when reversible inhibitors are used as therapeutic agents higher quantities and/or more frequent dosing than is desired may be required in order to achieve the intended biological effect. This dosing requirement may produce toxicity or result in other undesirable effects.
  • Covalent irreversible inhibitors of drug targets have a number of important advantages over their reversible counterparts as therapeutics. Prolonged suppression of the drug targets may be necessary for maximum pharmacodynamic effect and an irreversible inhibitor can provide this advantage by permanently eliminating existing drug target activity, which will return only when new target protein is synthesized.
  • an irreversible inhibitor is administered, the therapeutic plasma concentration of the irreversible inhibitor would need to be attained only long enough to briefly expose the target protein to the inhibitor, which would irreversibly suppress activity of the target and plasma levels could then rapidly decline while the target protein would remain inactivated.
  • This irreversible binding has the potential advantage of lowering the minimal blood plasma concentration at which therapeutic activity occurs, minimizing multiple dosing requirements and eliminating the requirement for long plasma half-lives without compromising efficacy. All of these considerations could reduce toxicity due to any nonspecific off-target interactions that may occur at high or prolonged blood plasma levels. Irreversible inhibitors also likely have advantages in overcoming drug resistance requirements in two ways. First, irreversible inhibitors eliminate the requirement for long blood plasma half-lives without compromising efficacy. Second, because resistance mutations may compromise non-covalent binding, but even in the face of reduced non-covalent affinity, the inactivation mechanism will often, nonetheless, lead to protein target modification and irreversible inhibition.
  • reversible inhibitors of proteins are presently known, as are many of their binding sites in the proteins to which the reversible inhibitors bind.
  • the binding sites of these reversible inhibitors are sometimes populated with amino acids that are capable of covalent modification with suitably reactive ligands.
  • amino acids are located near the binding sites of reversible inhibitors that are capable of covalent modification with suitably reactive ligands.
  • Amino acids capable of covalent modification are typically those which have a heteroatom such as O, S, or N in the side chain, such as threonine, cysteine, histidine, serine, tyrosine, and lysine.
  • Sulfur is amenable to covalent modification due to the nucleophilicty of sulfur, and as such there are examples of ligands that modify cysteine in proteins of interest.
  • amino acids such as lysine are usually sufficiently unreactive that ligands do not react in vivo with lysine.
  • highly reactive indiscriminate reagents are usually employed for lysine modification.
  • ligand-directed modification of lysine has heretofore remained unrealized. For this reason and others, there is a need for irreversible inhibitors of proteins of medicinal interest, which inhibitors exert their biological influence through a ligand-directed modification of lysine.
  • the invention provides a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a target protein.
  • the method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked within, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, (b) identifying a lysine residue of the target protein in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site that is less than about 15 ⁇ from the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, (c) producing at least a structural model of at least one ligand-warhead compound docked within, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein the ligand-warhead compound comprises the reversible ligand in step (b) or a portion thereof, a warhead comprising a reactive chemical moiety, and optionally a Tether, and (d) identifying a ligand-war
  • the invention provides a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a lysine residue of a target protein.
  • the method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site; (b) identifying a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the target protein that is adjacent to the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site; (c) producing structural models of a plurality of ligand-warhead compounds docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein each ligand-warhead compound comprises a warhead covalently attached to a substitutable position of the reversible ligand
  • the invention provides a method for identifying at least one lysine residue within at least one protein that can be modified covalently.
  • the method comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) docking a reversible ligand in, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site in the structural model, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site, thereby creating a structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site; and (d) identifying in the structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site one or more lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the identified protein which is less than about 15 ⁇ from
  • the invention provides a method of covalently modifying a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site of a protein, comprising contacting a compound of Formula I:
  • the protein containing a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the protein and forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue and the Warhead of the compound.
  • the invention provides compounds of Formula I:
  • Scaffold, Warhead, Tether, x and y are as defined herein.
  • the invention provides protein-modifier-ligand conjugates of Formula XIII:
  • Scaffold, Polypeptide, Tether, M, Y 1 , x and y are as defined herein.
  • a method for selecting a warhead that binds to a target lysine within a ligand binding site of a protein comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) identifying the locations of at least one lysine in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of step (a); (d) providing at least one warhead in proximity to the at least one identified lysine; (e) aligning the electrophilic atom of the warhead within bonding distance of the primary amine of the at least one identified lysine; (f) forming a covalent bond between the electrophilic atom of the warhead and the primary amine of the at least one lysine; (g) docking a reversible ligand in the identified protein's ligand-binding site within 15 ⁇ of the covalently attached warhead of step (f),
  • FIG. 1 shows the X-ray co-crystal structure (2JK7) with key lysines in XIAP proximal to bound Smac-mimetic ligand.
  • FIG. 2 depicts non-limiting examples of weaponizing the Smac-mimetic ligand.
  • FIG. 3 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XVI-26 contacted with HCV NS3 Protease.
  • FIG. 4 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XVI-26 treated with HCV NS3 Protease (WT); HCV NS3 Protease (C159S); and HCV NS3 protease (C159S/K136A).
  • FIG. 5 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of compound XVI-1 treated with HCV NS3 Protease (WT1b).
  • FIG. 6 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of compound VII-1 contacted with XIAP.
  • FIG. 7 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of chymotrypsin digestion of XIAP (top) and XIAP contacted with compound VII-1 (bottom).
  • FIG. 8 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of compound VII-21 contacted with XIAP.
  • FIG. 9 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of chymotrypsin digestion of XIAP (top) and XIAP contacted with compound VII-21 (bottom).
  • FIG. 10 depicts that the probe compound XVI-27 modifies NS3/4A C159S.
  • FIG. 11 depicts the prolonged duration of action of XVI-26.
  • FIG. 12 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XI-27 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 13 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of the trypsin digestion of PDPK-1 (whole protein) contacted with Compound XI-27 identifying the peptide 164 NGELLKYIR 172 (SEQ ID NO.:1).
  • FIG. 14 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 164 NGELLKYIR 172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) modified by XI-27 from the digest depicted in FIG. 13 and identifying K169 as the lysine modified by XI-27.
  • FIG. 15 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XI-21 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 16 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of the trypsin digestion of PDPK-1 (whole protein) contacted with Compound XI-21 identifying three peptides 164 NGELLKYIR 172 (SEQ ID NO.:1), 173 KIGSFDETCTR 183 (SEQ ID NO.:2), and 84 FGKILGEGSFSTVVLAR 100 (SEQ ID NO.:3).
  • FIG. 17 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 164 NGELLKYIR 172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) from the digest depicted in FIG. 16 and identifying K169 as the lysine modified by XI-21.
  • FIG. 18 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 173 KIGSFDETCTR 183 (SEQ ID NO.:2) from the digest depicted in FIG. 16 and identifying K173 as the lysine modified by XI-21.
  • FIG. 19 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 84 FGKILGEGSFSTVVLAR 100 (SEQ ID NO.:3) from the digest depicted in FIG. 16 and identifying K86 as the lysine modified by XI-21.
  • FIG. 20 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XXXVI-2 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 21 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XXXVI-1 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 22 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XXII-33 contacted with PI3K ⁇ (whole protein).
  • protein means linear polymers made up of the 20 different naturally occurring L- ⁇ -amino acids, as well as other less common amino acids. The amino acids in a polymer are joined together by peptide bonds between the carboxyl and amino groups of adjacent amino acid residues.
  • polypeptide can be used interchangeably herein with the term protein. Polypeptides can be full length proteins, as well as any portion of a protein.
  • protein and polypeptide are used to describe proteins containing ligand binding sites. Any protein or polypeptide contemplated herein will be large enough to fold and constitute a ligand binding site.
  • aliphatic or “aliphatic group,” as used herein, means a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched, substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, or a monocyclic hydrocarbon or bicyclic hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic (also referred to herein as “carbocycle,” “carbocyclic,” “cycloaliphatic” or “cycloalkyl”), that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-8 aliphatic carbon atoms.
  • aliphatic groups contain 1-5 aliphatic carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-3 aliphatic carbon atoms, and in yet other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-2 aliphatic carbon atoms.
  • “carbocyclic” refers to a monocyclic C 3 -C 8 hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic, that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule.
  • Suitable aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl groups and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.
  • bridged bicyclic refers to any bicyclic ring system, i.e., carbocyclic or heterocyclic, saturated or partially unsaturated, having at least one bridge.
  • a “bridge” is an optionally substituted chain of atoms or an atom or a valence bond connecting two bridgeheads, where a “bridgehead” is any skeletal atom of the ring system which is bonded to three or more skeletal atoms (excluding hydrogen).
  • a bridged bicyclic group has 7- to 12-ring members and 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • bridged bicyclic groups are well known in the art and include those groups set forth below where each group is attached to the rest of the molecule at any substitutable carbon or nitrogen atom. Unless otherwise specified, a bridged bicyclic group or the bridge is optionally substituted with one or more substituents as set forth for aliphatic groups. Additionally or alternatively, any substitutable nitrogen of a bridged bicyclic group is optionally substituted.
  • Exemplary bridged bicyclics include:
  • lower alkyl refers to a C 1-4 straight or branched alkyl group.
  • exemplary lower alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, and tert-butyl.
  • lower haloalkyl refers to a C 1-4 straight or branched alkyl group that is substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
  • heteroatom means one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon (including, any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or silicon; the quaternized form of any basic nitrogen or; a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR + (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl)).
  • unsaturated means that a moiety has one or more units of unsaturation.
  • bivalent C 1-8 (or C 1-6 ) saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched, hydrocarbon chain refers to bivalent alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene chains that are straight or branched as defined herein.
  • alkylene refers to a bivalent alkyl group.
  • An “alkylene chain” is a polymethylene group, i.e., —(CH 2 ) n —, wherein n is a positive integer, preferably from 1 to 6, from 1 to 4, from 1 to 3, from 1 to 2, or from 2 to 3.
  • a substituted alkylene chain is a polymethylene group in which one or more methylene hydrogen atoms are replaced with a substituent. Suitable substituents include those described below for a substituted aliphatic group.
  • alkenylene refers to a bivalent alkenyl group.
  • a substituted alkenylene chain is a polymethylene group containing at least one double bond in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a substituent. Suitable substituents include those described below for a substituted aliphatic group.
  • cyclopropylenyl refers to a bivalent cyclopropyl group of the following structure:
  • halogen means F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • aryl used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl,” “aralkoxy,” or “aryloxyalkyl,” refers to monocyclic or bicyclic ring systems having a total of five to fourteen ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic and wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members.
  • aryl may be used interchangeably with the term “aryl ring.”
  • aryl refers to an aromatic ring system which includes, but not limited to, phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, anthracyl and the like, which may bear one or more substituents.
  • aryl is a group in which an aromatic ring is fused to one or more non-aromatic rings, such as indanyl, phthalimidyl, naphthimidyl, phenanthridinyl, or tetrahydronaphthyl, and the like.
  • heteroaryl and “heteroar-,” used alone or as part of a larger moiety, e.g., “heteroaralkyl,” or “heteroaralkoxy,” refer to groups having 5 to 10 ring atoms, preferably 5, 6, or 9 ring atoms; having 6, 10, or 14 ⁇ electrons shared in a cyclic array; and having, in addition to carbon atoms, from one to five heteroatoms.
  • heteroatom refers to nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, and includes any oxidized form of nitrogen or sulfur, and any quaternized form of a basic nitrogen.
  • Heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, indolizinyl, purinyl, naphthyridinyl, and pteridinyl.
  • heteroaryl and “heteroar-,” as used herein, also include groups in which a heteroaromatic ring is fused to one or more aryl, cycloaliphatic, or heterocyclyl rings, where the radical or point of attachment is on the heteroaromatic ring.
  • Nonlimiting examples include indolyl, isoindolyl, benzothienyl, benzofuranyl, dibenzofuranyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and pyrido[2,3-b]-1,4-oxazin-3(4H)-one.
  • heteroaryl group may be mono- or bicyclic.
  • heteroaryl may be used interchangeably with the terms “heteroaryl ring,” “heteroaryl group,” or “heteroaromatic,” any of which terms include rings that are optionally substituted.
  • heteroarylkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted by a heteroaryl, wherein the alkyl and heteroaryl portions independently are optionally substituted.
  • heterocycle As used herein, the terms “heterocycle,” “heterocyclyl,” “heterocyclic radical,” and “heterocyclic ring” are used interchangeably and refer to a stable 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic heterocyclic moiety that is either saturated or partially unsaturated, and having, in addition to carbon atoms, one or more, preferably one to four, heteroatoms, as defined above.
  • nitrogen includes a substituted nitrogen.
  • the nitrogen may be N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl), or + NR (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl).
  • a heterocyclic ring can be attached to its pendant group at any heteroatom or carbon atom that results in a stable structure and any of the ring atoms can be optionally substituted.
  • saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic radicals include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperazinyl, dioxanyl, dioxolanyl, diazepinyl, oxazepinyl, thiazepinyl, morpholinyl, and quinuclidinyl.
  • heterocycle refers to an alkyl group substituted by a heterocyclyl, wherein the alkyl and heterocyclyl portions independently are optionally substituted.
  • partially unsaturated refers to a ring moiety that includes at least one double or triple bond.
  • partially unsaturated is intended to encompass rings having multiple sites of unsaturation, but is not intended to include aryl or heteroaryl moieties, as herein defined.
  • compounds of the invention may contain “optionally substituted” moieties.
  • substituted whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogens of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent.
  • an “optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position.
  • Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds.
  • stable refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain embodiments, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • Suitable monovalent substituents on a substitutable carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group are independently halogen; —(CH 2 ) 0-4 R o ; —(CH 2 ) 0-4 OR o ; —O(CH 2 ) 0-4 R o , —O—(CH 2 ) 0-4 C(O)OR o ; —(CH 2 ) 0-4 CH(OR o ) 2 ; —(CH 2 ) 0-4 SR o ; —(CH 2 ) 0-4 Ph, which may be substituted with R o ; —(CH 2 ) 0-4 O(CH 2 ) 0-1 Ph which may be substituted with R o ; —CH ⁇ CHPh, which may be substituted with R o ; —(CH 2 ) 0-4 O(CH 2 ) 0-1 -pyridyl which may be substituted with R o ; —NO 2 ; —CN;
  • Suitable monovalent substituents on R o are independently halogen, —(CH 2 ) 0-2 R • , -(haloR • ), —(CH 2 ) 0-2 OR • , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 OR • , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 CH(OR • ) 2 ; —O(haloR • ), —CN, —N 3 , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 C(O)R • , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 C(O)OH, —(CH 2 ) 0-2 C(O)OR • , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 SR • , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 SH, —(CH 2 ) 0-2 NH 2 , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 NHR • , —(CH 2 ) 0-2 NR •
  • Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group include the following: ⁇ O (“oxo”), ⁇ S, ⁇ NNR* 2 , ⁇ NNHC(O)R*, ⁇ NNHC(O)OR*, ⁇ NNHS(O) 2 R*, ⁇ NR*, ⁇ NOR*, —O(C(R* 2 )) 2-3 O—, or —S(C(R* 2 )) 2-3 S—, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C 1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an “optionally substituted” group include: —O(CR* 2 ) 2-3 O—, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C 1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R • include halogen, —R • , -(haloR • ), —OH, —OR • , —O(haloR • ), —CN, —C(O)OH, —C(O)OR • , —NH 2 , —NHR • , —NR • 2 , or —NO 2 , wherein each R • is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C 1-4 aliphatic, —CH 2 Ph, —O(CH 2 ) 0-1 Ph, or a 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an “optionally substituted” group include —R ⁇ , —C(O)R ⁇ 2 , —C(O)R ⁇ , —C(O)C(O)R ⁇ , —C(O)CH 2 C(O)R ⁇ , —S(O) 2 R ⁇ , —S(O) 2 NR ⁇ 2 , —C(S)NR ⁇ 2 , —C(NH)NR ⁇ 2 , or —N(R ⁇ )S(O) 2 R ⁇ ; wherein each R ⁇ is independently hydrogen, C 1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted —OPh, or an unsubstituted 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R ⁇ ,
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R • are independently halogen, —R • , -(haloR • ), —OH, —OR • , —O(haloR • ), —CN, —C(O)OH, —C(O)OR • , —NH 2 , —NHR • , —NR • 2 , or —NO 2 , wherein each R • is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C 1-4 aliphatic, —CH 2 Ph, —O(CH 2 ) 0-1 Ph, or a 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge et al., describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66, 1-19 (1977), incorporated herein by reference.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases.
  • Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid
  • organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange.
  • salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate,
  • Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium and N + (C 1-4 alkyl) 4 salts.
  • Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like.
  • Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, loweralkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational)) forms of the structure; for example, the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, Z and E double bond isomers, and Z and E conformational isomers. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are within the scope of the invention.
  • structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms.
  • compounds having the present structures including the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13 C- or 14 C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention.
  • Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools, as probes in biological assays, or as therapeutic agents in accordance with the present invention.
  • the term “irreversible” or “irreversible inhibitor” refers to an inhibitor (i.e., a compound) that is able to covalently binds to an enzyme, or portion thereof in a substantially non-reversible manner. That is, whereas a reversible inhibitor is able to bind to (but is generally unable to form a covalent bond with) an enzyme, and therefore can become dissociated from the enzyme an irreversible inhibitor will remain substantially bound to an enzyme once covalent bond formation has occurred.
  • Irreversible inhibitors usually display time dependency, whereby the degree of inhibition increases with the length of time with which the inhibitor is in contact with the enzyme. In certain embodiments, an irreversible inhibitor will remain substantially bound to an enzyme once covalent bond formation has occurred and will remain bound for a time period that is longer than the life of the enzyme.
  • Such methods include, but are not limited to, enzyme kinetic analysis of the inhibition profile of the compound with the enzyme, the use of mass spectrometry of the protein drug target modified in the presence of the inhibitor compound, discontinuous exposure, also known as “washout,” experiments, and the use of labeling, such as radiolabelled inhibitor, to show covalent modification of the enzyme, as well as other methods known to one of skill in the art.
  • warheads refers to a functional group present on a compound of the present invention wherein that functional group is capable of covalently binding to lysine, present in or near the binding pocket of a target protein, thereby irreversibly inhibiting the protein.
  • Tether-Warhead group as defined and described herein, provides such warhead groups for covalently, and irreversibly, inhibiting the protein.
  • an inhibitor is defined as a compound that binds to and/or inhibits an enzyme with measurable affinity.
  • an inhibitor has an IC 50 and/or binding constant of less about 10 ⁇ M, less than about 1 ⁇ M, less than about 100 nM, or less than about 10 nM.
  • measurable affinity and “measurably inhibit,” as used herein, means a measurable change in any lysing-containing protein, such as, e.g., XIAP, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , PDPK1 and HCV-NS3 protease activity between a sample comprising a compound of the present invention, or composition thereof, and at least one of XIAP, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , PDPK1 and HCV-NS3 protease, and an equivalent sample comprising at least one of XIAP, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , PDPK1 and HCV-NS3 protease, in the absence of said compound, or composition thereof.
  • XIAP e.g., XIAP, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , PDPK1 and HCV-NS3 protease activity between a sample comprising a compound of the present invention, or composition thereof, and at least one of XIAP, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , PDPK1 and HCV-NS
  • lysine residues located in, or in proximity to, a ligand binding site in any targeted family of proteins can be targeted for ligand-directed lysine modification.
  • lysine residues of protein family members targeted for ligand-directed modification by irreversible inhibitors include, without limitation, those summarized in Table 1, below, where “Family” column refers to a family of proteins of interest; the “UniProtAC” column refers to the accession number identifier of a particular protein in accordance with UniProt Knowledgebase (UniProtKB) accession numbers (www.uniprot.org); the “Sequence” column refers to an identifying fragment of the Family member protein's amino acid sequence which includes the lysine of interest; and the “Residue Number” column refers to the lysine residue number as set forth in the sequence.
  • antibodies as a family of proteins, are not contemplated within the present invention and therefore are excluded.
  • the family of proteins having targetable lysine residues according to the present invention is BCL-2.
  • the family of proteins is Calpains.
  • the family of proteins is Caspases.
  • the family of proteins is Cathepsins.
  • the family of proteins is HCV.
  • the family of proteins is HDAC.
  • the family of proteins is HSP70.
  • the family of proteins is HSP90.
  • the family of proteins is IAP.
  • the family of proteins is Kinase.
  • the family of proteins is MDM2.
  • the family of proteins is MMP.
  • the family of proteins is NHR. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is PI3K. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Phosphatase. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Transthyretin. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is PARP. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is HIV Protease.
  • the members of the BCL-2 family of proteins comprise Bcl-2-like protein 13, Bcl-2-related protein A1, and Bcl-2-related ovarian killer protein.
  • the target lysines are K110, K121, and K152 in Bcl-2-like protein 13; K046, K050, K077, and K147 in Bcl-2-related protein A1; and K122 in Bcl-2-related ovarian killer protein.
  • the members of the Calpains family of proteins comprise Calpain-3, Calpain-5, Calpain-6, and Calpain-9.
  • the target lysines are K220, and K410 in Calpain 3; K233 in Calpain-5; K081 and K336 in Calpain-6; and K188 and K330 in Calpain-9.
  • the members of the Caspases family of proteins comprises Caspase-2, Caspase-3, Caspase-6, Caspase-8, Caspase-9, Caspase-10, Caspase-14, and Mucosa-associated lymphoid tissue lymphoma translocation protein 1.
  • the target lysines are K381 in Caspase-2; K210 in Caspase-3; K265 in Caspase-6; K253, K453, K456, and K457 in Caspase-8; K358 and K394 in Caspase-9; K298 in Caspase-10; K096 in Caspase-14, and K358, K360, K466, and K513 in Mucosa-associated lymphoid tissue lymphoma translocation protein 1.
  • the members of the Cathepsin family of proteins comprise Cathepsin F, Cathepsin H, and Cathepsin W.
  • the target lysines are K238, K331, and K374 in Cathepsin F; K278 in Cathepsin H; and K267 in Cathepsin W.
  • the members of the HCV family of proteins comprises Genome polyprotein (NS3), Genome polyprotein (NS5A), and Genome polyprotein (NS5B).
  • the target lysines are K1236 in Genome polyprotein (NS3); K2016 in Genome polyprotein (NS5A); and K2560 in Genome polyprotein (NS5B).
  • the members of the HCV family of proteins comprises HCV-NS3, HCV-NS5A, and HCV-NS5B.
  • the members of the HDAC family of proteins comprise Histone deacetylase 1, Histone deacetylase 11, Histone deacetylase 2, Histone deacetylase 3, Histone deacetylase 6, and Histone deacetylase 8.
  • the target lysines are K031 in Histone deacetylase 1; K306 in Histone deacetylase 11; K032 in Histone deacetylase 2; K025 in Histone deacetylase 3; K353 in Histone deacetylase 6; and K033 in Histone deacetylase 8.
  • the members of the HSP70 family of proteins comprise Heat shock 70 kDa protein 6, and Heat shock cognate 71 kDa protein.
  • the target lysines are K058, K073, and K273 in Heat shock 70 kDa protein 6; and K061, K071, and K271 in Heat shock cognate 71 kDa protein.
  • the members of the HSP90 family of proteins comprise Heat shock protein HSP 90-alpha, and Heat shock protein HSP 90-beta.
  • the target lysines are K058 in Heat shock protein HSP 90-alpha; and K053 in Heat shock protein HSP 90-beta.
  • the members of the IAP family of proteins comprise Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1 (NAIP aka BIRC1), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 2 (BIRC2 aka C-IAP1 aka API1 aka IAP2 aka MIHB), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 3 (BIRC3 aka C-IAP2 aka API2 aka IAP1 aka MIHC), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4 (XIAP aka ILP1 aka HILP aka API3 aka BIRC4 aka IAP3), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 5 (BIRC5 aka Survivin aka API4 aka IAP4), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 7 (BIRC7 aka ML-IAP aka livin aka K-IAP), and Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 8 (BIRC8 aka ILP2 aka TsIAP).
  • NAIP aka BIRC1
  • BIOS Baculoviral
  • the target lysines are K191 and K199 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1; K305 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 2; K291 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 3; K297, K299, and K311 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4; K062 and K079 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 5; K121, K135, and K146 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 7; and K036, K050, and K061 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 8.
  • the members of the IAP family of proteins comprises XIAP, cIAP1, cIAP2, and ML-IAP.
  • the members of the Kinases family of proteins comprise B-Raf proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase, Serine/threonine-protein kinase Chk2, Epidermal growth factor receptor, Hepatocyte growth factor receptor, 3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1 (PDPK1), Proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase Pim-1.
  • FGFR1 Basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 1
  • FGFR2 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2
  • FGFR3 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 3
  • FGFR4 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 4
  • PDPK1 3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1
  • b-RAF Serine/threonine-protein kinase B-raf
  • RAF1 RAF proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase
  • Tyrosine-protein kinase SYK 3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1
  • b-RAF Serine/threonine-protein kinase B-raf
  • RAF1 RAF proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase
  • Tyrosine-protein kinase SYK Tyrosine-protein kinase SYK
  • the target lysines are K483 in B-Raf proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase; K224, K245, K252, and K349 in Serine/threonine-protein kinase Chk2; K716, K728, and K745 in Epidermal growth factor receptor; K1110 and K1161 in Hepatocyte growth factor receptor; K086, K163, K169, and K207 in PDPK1; K260 in Proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase Pim-1; K514, K566 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 (FGFR1), K517, K569 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 (FGFR2); K560, K508 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 3 (FGFR3); K503, K555 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 4 (FGFR4); K173 in 3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1 (PD
  • the members of the PDK family of proteins comprises PDPK1.
  • the members of the MDM2 family of proteins comprise E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase Mdm2, Protein Mdm4, SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 1, SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 2, and SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 3.
  • the target lysines are K051 and K094 in E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase Mdm2; K050 and K093 in Protein Mdm4; K327 in SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 1; K301 in SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 2; and K302 in SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 3.
  • the members of the MMP family of proteins comprise Macrophage metalloelastase, Collagenase 3, Matrix metalloproteinase-14, Matrix metalloproteinase-15, and Matrix metalloproteinase-20.
  • the target lysines are K233 and K241 in Macrophage metalloelastase; K150 and K249 in Collagenase 3; K146 in Matrix metalloproteinase-14; K284 in Matrix metalloproteinase-15; and K251 in Matrix metalloproteinase-20.
  • the members of the NHR family of proteins comprise Estrogen receptor, Estrogen receptor beta, Peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor alpha, and Progesterone receptor.
  • the target lysines are K529 in Estrogen receptor; K314 in Estrogen receptor beta; K252 and K358 in Peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor alpha; and K919 in Progesterone receptor.
  • the members of the PI3K protein family comprise Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit alpha isoform (PI3K-alpha aka PIK3CA), Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit beta isoform (PI3K-beta aka PIK3CB aka PIK3C1), and Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform (PI3K gamma aka PIK3CG).
  • PI3K-alpha aka PIK3CA Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit alpha isoform
  • PI3K-beta aka PIK3CB aka PIK3C1
  • the target lysines are K776 and K802 in Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit alpha isoform; K777 and K805 in Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit beta isoform; and K802, K807, K833, K883, and K890 in Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform.
  • the members of the PI3K family of proteins comprises PI3K ⁇ , PI3K ⁇ and PI3K ⁇ .
  • PI3K refers to PI3K ⁇ and PI3K ⁇ interchangeably as the ligand-directed warhead of the present invention, directed to PI3K will modify both PI3K ⁇ as well as PI3K ⁇ .
  • the members of the Phosphatase family of proteins comprise Leukocyte common antigen, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 1, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 11, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 13, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 14, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 18, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 2, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 22, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 3, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 4, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 5, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 6, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 7, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 9, and Receptor-type
  • the target lysines are K623 and K759 in Leukocyte common antigen; K120 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 1; K260, K280, K364, K366 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 11; K2224, K2244, K2316, and K2318 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 13; K918, K919, and K1018 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 14; K041 and K063 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 18; K038 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 2; K032, K039, K136, and K138 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 22, K656, K666, K677, and K753 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 3;
  • the member of the Transthyretin family of proteins comprises Transthyretin (Prealbumin aka TBPA aka TTR aka ATTR aka PALB).
  • the target lysine is K035 in Transthyretin.
  • the members of the PARP family of proteins comprise Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 1 (PARP1 aka ADPRT aka PPOL aka ADPRT), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 3 (PARP3 aka ADPRT3 aka ADPRTL3 aka IRT1), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 10 (PARP10), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 12 (PARP12 aka ZC3HDC1), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 15 (PARP15 aka BAL3), and Tankyrase-1 (TNKS aka PARPSA, PARPL aka TIN1 aka TINF1 aka TNKS1).
  • PARP1 ADPRT aka PPOL aka ADPRT
  • PARP3 Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 3
  • PARP10 Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 10
  • PARP12 Poly [ADP-ribose]
  • the target lysines are K903 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 1; K421 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 3; K941 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 10; K609 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 12; K566, K579 and K636 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 15; and K1220 and K1269 in Tankyrase-1.
  • the member of the HIV Protease family of proteins comprises Gag-Pol polyprotein (HIV protease aka Retropepsin aka PR).
  • the target lysine is K535 in Gag-Pol polyprotein.
  • One aspect of the present disclosure is a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a target protein.
  • the method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked within, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, (b) identifying a lysine residue of the target protein in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site that is less than about 15A from the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, (c) producing at least a structural model of at least one ligand-warhead compound docked within, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein the ligand-warhead compound comprises the reversible ligand in step (b) or a portion thereof, a warhead comprising a reactive chemical moiety, and optionally a Tether, and (d) identifying a ligand
  • FIG. 1 shows X-ray co-crystal structure (2JK7) showing key lysines in XIAP proximal to bound Smac-mimetic ligand.
  • 2JK7 X-ray co-crystal structure
  • step (b) depicts non-limiting lysine-targeted warheads installed on scaffolds such that they are directed toward the targeted lysines positioned strategically at portions of compounds based on the pharmacophore of the Smac-mimetic ligand which are in proximity to the identified lysines, above.
  • the reactive warheads (along with a Tether when required) are positioned in silico such that docking of a modified pharmacophore of the ligand in the structural model of the protein binding site (provided in step (a) above), as described in step (c) above, allows for determination of the spatial arrangement of the reactive warhead vis a vis the identified lysine of step (b).
  • the method further comprises step (e): forming, for the ligand-warhead compound identified in step (d), a ligand-protein, covalent adduct by forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue identified in step (b) and the warhead electrophile in ligand-warhead compound identified in step (d) while maintaining the binding elements of the pharmacophore required for non-covalent binding to the ligand's target protein.
  • the method further comprises step (f): evaluating the conformation of the resulting ligand-protein covalent adduct formed in step (e) by analyzing the global energy of the resulting conformation, or by analyzing the energy of the conformation of the Tether.
  • the method comprises alternate step (f): determining whether the ligand-binding site is occluded when the covalent bond is formed between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site and the warhead electrophile.
  • the method comprising steps (a)-(f) is iterated with changes to the Tether and the global energy of the resulting conformation is less than the previous iteration.
  • the covalent bond formed in step (e) is formed using a computational method in which the warhead and the side chain of the lysine residue are flexible and the remainder of the structures of the ligand-warhead compound and the ligand-binding site are fixed.
  • each of the lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the target protein which is less than about 15 ⁇ from the reversible ligand, when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, is identified.
  • step (c) of the method further comprises providing a plurality of models of the ligand-warhead compound, wherein the warhead is bonded to a different substitutable position of the ligand or a portion of the ligand in each model of the ligand-warhead compound, optionally with the Tether in between the warhead and the substitutable position.
  • the target protein is an identified member of an identified protein family and the lysine residue is not conserved across the identified members of the protein family.
  • the target protein is an identified member of an identified protein family and the lysine residue is conserved among more than one identified member of the identified protein family.
  • the lysine residue is conserved across identified members of the protein family.
  • the target protein has catalytic activity.
  • the target protein family is selected from the group consisting of BCL-2, Calpains, Caspases, Cathepsins, HCV, HDAC, HSP70, HSP90, IAP, Kinase, MDM2, MMP, NHR, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , Phosphatase, Transthyretin, PARP, and HIV Protease.
  • the target family of proteins is selected from the group consisting of IAP, PI3K, PDPK1, and HCV.
  • the target protein is selected from the group consisting of XIAP, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , PDPK1, and HCV.
  • the ligand-binding site is a ligand-binding site for a substrate or cofactor.
  • the lysine residue for covalent modification is not a catalytic residue.
  • the disclosure provides a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a lysine residue of a target protein.
  • the method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site, (b) identifying a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the target protein that is adjacent to the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, (c) producing one or more structural models of a plurality of ligand-warhead compounds docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein each ligand-warhead compound comprises a warhead covalently attached to a substitutable position of the reversible
  • the hydrogen-bond donor amino acid can participate in the chemical reaction between the warhead of the ligand-warhead and the targeted lysine of the protein.
  • the hydrogen bond donating amino acid is either lysine or arginine
  • the interaction between lysine and lysine or lysine and arginine are repulsive interactions that lower the pKa of the targeted lysine, thus enhancing its nucleophilicity.
  • hydrogen bond donation either by a sidechain, or even a mainchain amide can, in many cases, enhance the electrophilicity of a warhead.
  • the warhead of the ligand-warhead comprises an acrylamide
  • the warhead requires a hydrogen bond donor amino acid residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, wherein the hydrogen-bond donor group is within hydrogen-bonding distance of the warhead comprising acrylamide.
  • the method further comprises step (f) forming, for the ligand-warhead compound identified in step (e), a ligand-protein covalent adduct by forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue identified in step (b) and the warhead electrophile; and also forming a hydrogen bond between the hydrogen-bond donor moiety and the warhead electrophile; or a hydrogen bond between the hydrogen-bond donor moiety and the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue identified in step (d) while substantially maintaining the non-covalent interactions between the pharmacophore of the ligand and the ligand-binding site.
  • the method further comprises step (g) evaluating a resulting conformation of the ligand-protein covalent adduct by analyzing the global energy of the resulting conformation.
  • steps (a) through (g) are iterated with changes to the linker and the global energy of the resulting conformation is less than the previous iteration.
  • the hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue is any amino acid residue that is capable of acting as a hydrogen bond donor.
  • the hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue is selected from the group consisting of arginine, lysine, threonine, serine, histidine, and tyrosine.
  • the target protein is selected from the group consisting of XIAP, PDPK1, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , and HCV.
  • the warhead when the warhead comprises an acrylamide moiety, the warhead requires a hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, wherein the hydrogen-bond donor group is within hydrogen-bonding distance of the warhead comprising acrylamide to facilitate the warhead covalently binding to the target lysine.
  • the hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue is lysine.
  • a method for identifying at least one lysine residue within at least one protein that can be modified covalently comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) docking a reversible ligand in, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site in the structural model, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site, thereby creating a structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site; and (d) identifying in the structural model of the reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site one or more lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the identified protein which is less than about 15 ⁇ from the
  • the method further comprises identifying a plurality of proteins having ligand-binding sites that are structurally homologous.
  • the method further comprises (a) providing a three-dimensional structural model for at least one of the identified proteins, (b) docking a reversible ligand in, or in proximity to, the structural model of the ligand-binding site of at least one of the identified proteins, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent interaction with the ligand-binding site, thereby creating a structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site; and (c) identifying in the structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site one or more lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the identified protein which is less than about 15 ⁇ from the reversible ligand.
  • the method comprises comparing the three-dimensionally equivalent amino acid positions of the homologous ligand-binding sites of more than one of the plurality of identified proteins and determining the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins.
  • the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in only one of the identified proteins.
  • the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins are in more than one of the identified proteins.
  • the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in less than 10% of the identified proteins of a family at the ligand binding site position. In other embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in less than or greater than 50% of the identified proteins. More than 50%, in some embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in more than 75% of the identified proteins, while in other embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in all of the identified proteins.
  • the protein is selected from the group consisting of BCL-2, Calpains, Caspases, Cathepsins, HCV, HDAC, HSP70, HSP90, IAP, Kinase, MDM2, MMP, NHR, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , Phosphatase, Transthyretin, PARP, and HIV Protease.
  • the protein is selected from the group consisting of XIAP, PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ , PDPK1, and HCV.
  • a method for selecting a warhead that binds to a target lysine within a ligand binding site of a protein comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) identifying the location of at least one lysine in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of step (a); (d) providing at least one warhead in proximity to the at least one identified lysine; (e) aligning the electrophilic atom of the warhead within bonding distance of the primary amine of the at least one identified lysine; (f) forming a covalent bond between the electrophilic atom of the warhead and the primary amine of the at least one lysine; (g) docking a reversible ligand in the identified protein's ligand-binding site within 15 ⁇ of the covalently attached warhead of step (f),
  • the method comprises contacting a compound of Formula I with a protein containing a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site of a protein and forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue and Warhead of the compound.
  • the method encompasses compounds of Formula I:
  • Warhead is an organic moiety optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from O, N, and S, and has a molecular weight of about 14 daltons to about 200 daltons, the Warhead is capable of reacting with a side chain primary amine group of a lysine residue and attaches to the Scaffold through the Tether;
  • Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C 1 -C 15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —C( ⁇ S)—, or C( ⁇ NR 1 )—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • x 0, 1, or 2;
  • y is 1, 2, or 3;
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl.
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula I′,
  • suicide inhibitors such as, for example Vigabatrin, or carbaglucose-6-phosphate (pseudo-DL-glucose, C-6-P) are not contemplated in the present invention.
  • Vigabatrin or carbaglucose-6-phosphate (pseudo-DL-glucose, C-6-P) are not contemplated in the present invention.
  • C-6-P carbaglucose-6-phosphate
  • wortmannin is known to covalently modify lysine in the protein phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase (PI3K).
  • PI3K protein phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase
  • wortmannin is a naturally occurring compound known to covalently modify lysine and exert its biological effects through its inherent ability to covalently bind to lysine.
  • Known analogues of wortmannin that covalently modify lysine through substantially the same mechanism as wortmannin are also excluded from the present invention. Examples of such wortmannin analogues include, without limitation:
  • Liphagal Another example of a naturally occurring compound that is believed to covalently modify lysine and is not encompassed within the present invention is Liphagal:
  • Nucleoside/nucleotide derived drugs such as, for example, those disclosed in Statsuk, A. V., et al., JACS, 130, 17568, (2008) and Guillerm, G., et al., J. Med. Chem., 49, 1223, (2006), and the like, are also not contemplated in the present invention.
  • manolide and its analogues which are believed to covalently modify lysine, such as manoalogue (Reynolds, L. J., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1988, 110, 5172-5177):
  • neratinib aka HKI-272
  • HKI-272 which covalently modify lysine in intact proteins
  • azaphilone and its analogues which are believed to covalently modify lysine.
  • Non limiting illustrative examples of azaphilone cores are described below:
  • the Warhead of Formula I is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
  • each X 1 and X 8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR 6 —;
  • each X 2 is independently —R 6 , —OR 6 , or —NR 6 R 7 ;
  • each X 9 is independently
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • a and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl;
  • n is an integer from 2-4; each n 1 and n 2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n 3 is an integer from 1-2; n 4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n 9 , n 10 , n 11 , and n 12 is an integer from 0-1; and n 13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
  • At least one of R 2 and R 3 of the compounds of Formula I-b and I-c is hydrogen.
  • the compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-e, I-j, I-k, or I-l is a compound of Formula II-a, II-b, II-c, II-d, II-e, II-f, II-g, II-h, II-j, II-k, II-l, II-m, II-n, II-o, II-p, II-q, II-r, II-s, II-t, II-u, II-v, II-w, II-x, II-y, II-z, II-aa, II-bb, II-cc, II-dd, II-ee, II-ff, II-gg, II-hh, II-jj, II-kk, II-ll, II-mm, II-nn, II-oo, or II-pp:
  • each m is independently an integer from 0-4;
  • each m 5 is independently an integer from 0-3;
  • each m 4 is independently an integer from 0-5;
  • each n 2 is independently an integer from 0-2;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , and R 15 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl and R 1 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, CF 3 , or nitro, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—, one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , and R 15 when taken together, form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • the compound of Formula I-d, or I-h is a compound of Formula III-a, III-b, III-h, or III-i:
  • n 3 is an integer from 0-2;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • each B 1 , B 2 , B 4 , and B 5 is independently CR 7 or N;
  • each B 3 is NR 7 , O, or S;
  • each R z1 , R z2 , R z3 , R z4 , and R z5 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, CF 3 , or nitro, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—, one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • the compound of Formula I-h is a compound of Formula IV-a, IV-b, IV-c, IV-d, IV-e, IV-f, IV-g, IV-h, or IV-i:
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are as defined above for Formula I-h;
  • any of the substitutable hydrogens on the nitrogen heterocycle of the compound can be substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, amido, acyl, acyloxy, oxoacyl, or halogen.
  • the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula V-a, V-b, V-c, V-d, V-e, V-f, V-g, V-h, V-i, or V-j:
  • n 1 and m 2 are each independently an integer from 0 to 2;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 when taken together, form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • the compounds of Formulae I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t are described below:
  • any substitutable hydrogen may be substituted with the substituents as those defined by R 2 -R 8 .
  • the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula VI-a, VI-b, VI-c, VI-d, VI-e, VI-f, VI-g, VI-h, VI-i, VI-j, VI-k, VI-l, VI-m, VI-n, VI-o, VI-p, VI-q, VI-r, VI-s, or VI-t:
  • R zz is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, —CH 2 OCH 3 , or —CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 .
  • Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C 1 -C 15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —C( ⁇ S)—, or C( ⁇ NR 1 )—; R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl; and optionally one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms; and optionally one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • the Scaffold is selected from the group consisting of Formulas VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
  • the present disclosure provides compounds capable of covalently binding to lysine residues of a protein thereby inhibiting the function of the protein. Described herein are compounds of the Formula I:
  • azaphilone core analogues such as
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula I′,
  • the Warhead is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
  • each X 1 and X 8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR 6 —;
  • each X 2 is independently —R 6 , —OR 6 , or —NR 6 R 7 ;
  • each X 9 is independently
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • a and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl;
  • n is an integer from 2-4; each n 1 and n 2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n 3 is an integer from 1-2; n 4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n 9 , n 10 , n 11 , and n 12 is an integer from 0-1; and n 13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
  • At least one of R 2 and R 3 of the compounds of Formula I-b and I-c is hydrogen.
  • the compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-e, I-j, I-k, or I-l is a compound of Formula II-a, II-b, II-c, II-d, II-e, II-f, II-g, II-h, II-j, II-k, II-l, II-m, II-II-o, II-p, II-q, II-r, II-s, II-t, II-u, II-v, II-w, II-x, II-y, II-z, II-aa, II-bb, II-cc, II-dd, II-ee, II-ff, II-gg, II-hh, II-jj, II-kk, II-ll, II-mm, II-nn, II-oo, or II-pp.
  • each m is independently an integer from 0-4;
  • each m 5 is independently an integer from 0-3;
  • each m 4 is independently an integer from 0-5;
  • each n 2 is independently an integer from 0-2;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , and R 15 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, CF 3 , or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl.
  • the compound of Formula I-d or I-h is a compound of Formula III-a, III-b, III-h, or III-i:
  • n 3 is an integer from 0-2;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • each B 1 , B 2 , B 4 , and B 5 is independently CR 7 or N and each B 3 is NR S , O, or S;
  • each R z1 , R z2 , R z3 , R z4 , and R z5 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, CF 3 , or nitro;
  • one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • the compound of Formula I-h is a compound of Formula IV-a, IV-b, IV-c, IV-d, IV-e, IV-f, IV-h, or IV-i:
  • R 2 , R 3 and R 4 are defined above for Formula I-d or I-h; and the hydrogen on the nitrogen heterocycle of the compound of Formula IV-a, IV-b, and IV-c can be substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, amido, acyl, acyloxy, oxoacyl, and halogen.
  • the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula V-a, V-b, V-c, V-d, V-e, V-f, V-g, V-h, V-i, or V-j:
  • n 1 and m 2 are each independently an integer from 0 to 2;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 when taken together, form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • the compounds of Formulae I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t are described below:
  • any substitutable hydrogen may be substituted with the substituents as those defined by R 2 -R 8 .
  • the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula VI-a, VI-b, VI-c, VI-d, VI-e, VI-f, VI-g, VI-h, VI-i, VI-j, VI-k, VI-l, VI-m, VI-n, VI-o, VI-p, or VI-q:
  • R zz is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, —CH 2 OCH 3 , or —CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 .
  • the Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C 1 -C 15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —C( ⁇ S)—, or C( ⁇ NR 1 )—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl.
  • the Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C 1 -C 15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —C( ⁇ S)—, or C( ⁇ NR 1 )—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl.
  • the Scaffold is selected from the group consisting of Formulas VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
  • the compounds of Formula I are described wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of one or more hydrogens of a compound of Formula VII:
  • V and W are each independently —(CR 14 R 15 ) q X 3 (CR 16 R 17 ) r —;
  • q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • X 3 is —CR 18 R 19 —, or —NR 20 —;
  • R x , R y , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , and R 20 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —C( ⁇ S)—, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl groups; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • Tether and Warhead are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • the compound of Formula VII is a compound of Formula VII-a:
  • V and W are each independently —(CR 14 R 15 ) q X 3 (CR 16 R 17 ) r —;
  • q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • X 3 is —CR 18 R 19 —, or —NR 20 —;
  • p 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R 18 , R 19 , and R 20 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, —C( ⁇ S)—, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl groups; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • R 23 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 21 and R 23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
  • the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula VII-b:
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , V, W, p, are as defined above for Formula VII-a and T and R wh are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • the compound of Formula VII-b is a compound of Formula VII-h:
  • T, R wh , p, R 12 , R 13 , R 23 , and p are as described above for Formula VII-b.
  • the compound of Formula VII-h is a compound of Formula VII-j, VII-k, VII-l, VII-m, VII-n, or VII-o:
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 are as described above for embodiments of Formula I, and R 12 , R 13 , R 23 , and p are as described above for Formulas VII and VII-h.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula VII are as set forth below.
  • X 4 is —CR 33 — or —N—;
  • p and s are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 21 , R 22 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , and R 33 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • R 23 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • R 21 and R 23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;
  • Tether and Warhead are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula VIII-a or VIII-b.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula VIII are as set forth below.
  • X 5 is —O—, —CR 42 R 43 — or —NR 42 —;
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , R 33 , R 34 , R 35 , R 36 , R 37 , R 38 , R 39 , R 40 , R 41 , R 42 , and R 43 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—;
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • D, E, F, G, and H are each independently optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl;
  • Tether and Warhead are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula IX-c or IX-d:
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 31 , F, G, and H are as defined above for Formulas IX-a and IX-b, and T and R wh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • compounds of Formula I′ are described by compounds of the Formula XVII:
  • T is Tether and R wh is Warhead and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XVII are set forth below.
  • compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of the Formula XVIII:
  • T is Tether and R wh is Warhead and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XVIII are set forth below.
  • compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XIX:
  • T is Tether and R wh is Warhead and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XIX are set forth below.
  • compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XX-a and Formula XX-b:
  • R 1000 is C(H) or N, wherein -T-R wh can be attached to any carbon or the NH of the heteroaryl moiety of Formula XX-a and Formula XX-b;
  • T and R wh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XX-a and Formula XX-b are set forth below.
  • compounds of Formula I′ are described by compounds of Formula XXI-a, Formula XXI-b, and Formula XXI-c:
  • T and R wh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXI-a, Formula XXI-b, and Formula XXI-c are set forth below.
  • compounds of Formula I′ are described by compounds of Formula XI:
  • B 6 and B 7 are each independently CR 7 or N;
  • R 69 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro, or —NH(CO)NR 78 R 79 ;
  • R 70 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro;
  • R 7 , R 71 , R 72 , R 73 , R 74 , R 75 , R 76 , R 77 , R 78 , and R 79 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • p is an integer from 0 to 4
  • u is an integer from 1 to 4
  • T and R wh are Tether and Warhead respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • the compound of Formula XI is a compound of Formula XI-a, XI-b, or XI-c.
  • the compound of Formula XI-a, XI-b or XI-c is a compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 80 , R 81 , R 82 , R 83 , R 84 , R 85 , R 86 , and R 87 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—, R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl, and one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • the compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-k, XI-l, XI-m, XI-n, XI-o, XI-p, or XI-q.
  • R 1 -R 8 , R 70 , R 88 , and R 89 are as defined above for Formula XI-a, XI-b or XI-c;
  • X 6 is CH 2 , NH, O, or S
  • n 5 is an integer from 0 to 3.
  • the compound of Formula XI-e or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-r, XI-s, XI-t, XI-u, XI-v, XI-w, or XI-x:
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are as defined above for Formula XI-a, XI-b, and XI-c.
  • the compound of Formula XI-e, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-y, XI-z, XI-aa, or XI-bb.
  • R 2 -R 9 are as defined above for Formula II-a above;
  • X 6 is as defined above for Formula XI-t above.
  • the compound of Formula XI-h or XI-i is a compound of Formula XI-cc, XI-dd, XI-ee, or XI-ff.
  • R 2 -R 7 , R 8 , R 9 are as defined above for Formula II-a.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds of the Formula XI are set forth below.
  • compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XII:
  • T and R wh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XXXVI:
  • Rv is H, optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 branched or straight chain alkyl, or optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 branched or straight chain acyl;
  • T and R wh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds of the Formula XXXVI are set forth below:
  • R 90 , R 91 , R 92 , R 93 , R 94 , R 95 , R 96 , R 97 , R 98 , R 99 , R 100 , R 102 , R 104 , R 105 , R 106 , R 107 , R 108 , R 109 , R 110 , R 111 , R 112 , R 113 , and R 114 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—;
  • R 103 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, or C 2 -C 8 alkenyl
  • one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • each R 101 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, halogen, amino, nitro, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl;
  • n 6 and n 7 are each independently integer from 0 to 4; n 8 is an integer from 0 to 2; and
  • Warhead is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-b, I-c, I-e, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-n, or I-o;
  • each X 1 and X 8 is independently —O—, or —NR 6 —;
  • each X 9 is independently
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—;
  • one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • a and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl;
  • n is an integer from 2-4;
  • each n 1 and n 2 are independently an integer from 0-2;
  • n 3 is an integer from 1-2;
  • n 4 is an integer from 1-3;
  • T is Tether and is null, a bond, or a bivalent C 1 -C 15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —C( ⁇ S)—, or C( ⁇ NR 1 )—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl.
  • the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XVI-d, XVI-e, or XVI-f:
  • R 90 , R 101 , R 114 , n 6 , n 8 , T and R wh are as defined above for Formula XV-a;
  • R 103 is hydrogen or C 2 -C 8 alkenyl.
  • the compound of Formulas XVI-d, XVI-e, or XVI-f is a compound of Formula XVI-g, XVI-h, or XVI-i:
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 101 , R 114 are as defined above for Formulas XVI-a.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula XVI-a, Formula XVI-b, and Formula XVI-c are as set forth below.
  • the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXII-a, Formula XXII-b, or Formula XXII-c:
  • n, m, p, and q for Formula XXII-a and Formula XXII-b are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3; provided that n and q are not 0 at the same time, and m and q are not 0 at the same time;
  • T and R wh are as defined in embodiments of Formula I;
  • a 2 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 4-8 membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5-10 membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic heterocyclic ring having at least one nitrogen, at least one oxygen, and optionally 1-2 additional heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • B′ is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or -T-Rwh; and
  • C 2 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds for Formula XXII-a and Formula XXII-b are set forth below.
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXIII:
  • R wh is a warhead group and is as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • R 201 is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 202 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, or (C 1-6 alkylene)-R 203 ; or
  • R 201 and R 202 are taken together with the intervening carbon to form an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered carbocyclic ring or a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • R 203 is a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • Ring A 6 is absent or an optionally substituted group selected from a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXIII are listed below:
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXIV-a or XXIV-b:
  • R wh is a warhead group
  • R 204 is an hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, —(CH 2 ) m -(3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring), —(CH 2 ) m -(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring), —(CH 2 ) m -(4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH 2 ) m -(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH 2 ) m -phenyl, —(CH 2 ) m -(8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring), —(CH 2 ) m -(5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring
  • each R 205 and R 206 is independently —R′′, halogen, —NO 2 , —CN, —OR′′, —SR′′, —N(R′′) 2 , —C(O)R′′, —CO 2 R′′, —C(O)C(O)R′′, —C(O)CH 2 C(O)R′′, —S(O)R′′, —S(O) 2 R′′, —C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —SO 2 N(R′′) 2 , —OC(O)R′′, —N(R′′)C(O)R′′, —N(R′′)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C ⁇ NOR′′, —N(R′′)C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)SO 2 N(R′′) 2
  • each R′′ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • n is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive
  • each n for Formula XXIV-a or Formula XXIV-b is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • Ring A 5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula XXIV-a and XXIV-b are set forth below:
  • the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXV:
  • R wh is a warhead group
  • each R 205 and R 206 is independently —R′′, halogen, —NO 2 , —CN, —OR′′, —SR′′, —N(R′′) 2 , —C(O)R′′, —CO 2 R′′, —C(O)C(O)R′′, —C(O)CH 2 C(O)R′′, —S(O)R′′, —S(O) 2 R′′, —C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —SO 2 N(R′′) 2 , —OC(O)R′′, —N(R′′)C(O)R′′, —N(R′′)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C ⁇ NOR′′, —N(R′′)C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)SO 2 N(R′′) 2
  • each R′′ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • R′′ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • n is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive
  • each n is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • Ring A 5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXVI:
  • R wh is a warhead group and is as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • Ring A 7 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 4- to 8-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5-10 membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic heterocyclic ring having at least one nitrogen, at least one oxygen, and optionally 1-2 additional heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • R 207 is R′′′, halogen, —OR′′ —CN, —NO 2 , —SO 2 R′′′, —SOR′′′, —C(O)R′′′, —CO 2 R′′′, —C(O)N(R′′′) 2 , —NRC(O)R′′′, —NR′′′C(O)N(R′′′) 2 , —NRSO 2 R′′′, or —N(R′′′) 2 ;
  • each R′′′ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, aryl, a 4- to 7-membered heterocylic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5- to 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or:
  • R′′′ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 4- to 7-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • Ring B 7 is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • T 7 is a covalent bond or a bivalent straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated C 1-6 hydrocarbon chain wherein one or more methylene units of T 7 are optionally replaced by —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)O—, —C(O)N(R′′′)—, —N(R′′′)C(O)—, —N(R′′′)C(O)N(R′′′)—, —SO 2 —, —SO 2 N(R′′′)—, —N(R′′′)SO 2 —, or —N(R′′′)SO 2 N(R′′′)—;
  • Ring C 7 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 12-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen
  • Ring D 7 is absent or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 12-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXVI are set forth below.
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXVII:
  • T and R wh are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • R is H, alkyl, or alkoxy.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of the Formula XXVII are set forth below.
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXVIII:
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXVIII are set forth below:
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXIX:
  • T and R wh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined as above for Formula I;
  • a 8 is an optionally substituted aryl, biaryl, or heteroaryl.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXIX are set forth below:
  • the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXXVII:
  • T and R wh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined as above for Formula I.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXXVII are set forth below:
  • warhead groups are suitable for covalent bonding to lysine.
  • R wh groups include, but are not limited to, those described herein and depicted in Formulas VI-a-VI-t, and aa-ooo, inclusive, supra. That these warheads are suitable for covalent bonding to the primary amine of a lysine residue was determined by performing mass spectrometric experiments using the protocol described in detail in Examples 50-54, 88, 163-164, and 174-175, infra, the results of which are depicted in FIGS. 3-9 , and 12 - 22 . These experiments show that the compounds described herein covalently modify a target lysine residue in HCV-NS3 protease, XIAP, PDPK-1, and PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ .
  • Warhead is an organic moiety optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from O, N, and S; the organic moiety having a molecular weight of about 14 daltons to about 200 daltons; Warhead being capable of reaction with a side chain primary amine group of a lysine residue; and Warhead being attached to Scaffold through Tether; and
  • Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C 1 -C 15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —C( ⁇ S)—, or C( ⁇ NR 1 )—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • x 0, 1, or 2;
  • y is 1, 2, or 3;
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • Y 1 is a bivalent or trivalent moiety resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a radical of Formula XIV-a, XIV-b, XIV-c, XIV-d, XIV-e, XIV-f, XIV-g, XIV-h, or XIV-i,
  • each X 1 and X 2 is independently —CR 2 R 3 R 4 , —OR 2 , or —NR 2 R 3 ;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R 7 , and R 8 can be linked together to form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;
  • one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by and
  • n is an integer from 2-4, m 4 is an integer from 1 to 2;
  • A is an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl
  • a hydrogen of a radical of Formula XIV-a, XIV-b, XIV-c, XIV-d, XIV-e, XIV-f, XIV-g, XIV-h, or XIV-i, is substituted by Tether-Scaffold;
  • M is connected to the position labeled as “*” and is —NH— or ⁇ N—, the nitrogen atom of M being a nitrogen from the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue of the protein.
  • the conjugate of Formula XIII is a conjugate of Formula XIII′,
  • the Scaffold is selected from the group consisting of Formulas VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
  • M(CH 2 ) 4 -Protein is selected from the group consisting of M(CH 2 ) 4 -K1236-HCV-NS3 ⁇ M(CH 2 ) 4 -K2016-HCV-NS3, M(CH 2 ) 4 -K2560-HCV-NS3, M(CH 2 ) 4 -K191-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1), M(CH 2 ) 4 -K199-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1), M(CH 2 ) 4 -K305-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 2), M(CH 2 ) 4 -K291-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 3), M(CH 2 ) 4 -K297-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4), M(CH 2 ) 4 -K299-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4), M(CH 2 ) 4 -K311-(Baculoviral IAP repeat
  • the bivalent or trivalent moiety resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a radical of Formula XIV-a, XIV-d, XIV-h, or XIV-i is a moiety of Formula XV-a, XV-b, XV-c, XV-d, XV-e, XV-f, or XV-g;
  • n 4 is an integer from 1 to 2;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 is independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • the bivalent moiety of Formula XV-a, XV-b, XV-c, XV-d, XV-e, XV-f, or XV-g is a bivalent moiety of Formula XV-h, XV-i, XV-j, XV-k, XV-1, XV-m, XV-n, XV-o, XV-p, XV-q, XV-r, XV-s, or XV-t;
  • M is connected to the position of Y 1 labeled as “*”;
  • Tether is connected to the position of Y 1 labeled as “**”.
  • R wh is a warhead group.
  • R wh groups i.e. warhead groups
  • XIAP XIAP
  • PDPK-1 PDPK-1
  • HCV protease PI3K
  • mutants thereof have at least one lysine residue in the binding domain of each protein.
  • compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds may target the K297 lysine residue of XIAP. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K86 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K169 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K173 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In other embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K136 lysine residue of HCV protease.
  • compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K777 lysine residue of PI3K ⁇ . In other embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K802 lysine residue of PI3K ⁇ . In other embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K890 lysine residue of PI3K ⁇ .
  • R wh is characterized in that the -T-R wh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate comprising XIAP, or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K297.
  • the inhibitor moiety is bonded via a linker moiety.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the Formula K297-linker-inhibitor moiety.
  • the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-R wh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-R wh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-R wh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K297 of XIAP, or a mutant thereof.
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula A:
  • V and W are each independently —(CR 14 R 15 ) q X 3 (CR 16 R 17 ) r ;
  • p, q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • X 3 is —CR 18 R 19 —, or —NR 20 —;
  • R 21 and R 22 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl
  • R 23 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • R 21 and R 23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , V, W, and p are as defined above for formula A.
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of formula B:
  • X 4 is —CR 33 — or —N—;
  • p and s are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • R 12 , R 13 , R 21 , R 22 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , R 29 , R 30 , R 31 , R 32 , and R 33 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • R 23 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • R 21 and R 23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K86 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K169 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K173 lysine residue of PDPK-1.
  • R wh is characterized in that the -T-R wh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme.
  • the lysine residue is K86 lysine residue of PDPK-1, or a mutant thereof.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate comprising PDPK-1, or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K86.
  • the inhibitor is covalently bonded via a linker moiety.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K86-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K169-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K173-linker-inhibitor moiety.
  • the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-R wh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-R wh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein.
  • linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-R wh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K86, K169, or K173 of PDPK-1, or a mutant thereof.
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula C:
  • B 6 and B 7 are each independently CR 7 or N;
  • R 69 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro, or —NH(CO)NR 78 R 79 ;
  • R 70 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro;
  • R 7 , R 71 , R 72 , R 73 , R 74 , R 75 , R 76 , R 77 , R 78 , and R 79 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl;
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—; one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • p is an integer from 0 to 4
  • u is an integer from 1 to 4.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • B 6 , B 7 , R 69 , R 70 , R 7 , R 71 , R 72 , R 73 , R 74 , R 75 , R 76 , R 77 , R 78 , R 79 , R 1 and p are as defined above for Formula C and Kxxx is K86, K169, or K173.
  • Kxxx is K86 of PDPK-1.
  • Kxxx is K169 of PDPK-1.
  • Kxxx is K173 of PDPK-1.
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula D:
  • R v is H, optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 branched or straight chain alkyl, or optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 branched or straight chain acyl.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R v is as defined above for Formula D.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R v is as defined above for Formula D.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R v is as defined above for Formula D.
  • compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K136 lysine residue of HCV protease.
  • R wh is characterized in that the -T-R wh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme.
  • the lysine residue is K136 lysine residue of HCV protease, or a mutant thereof.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate comprising HCV protease, or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K136.
  • the inhibitor is covalently bonded via a linker moiety.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K136-linker-inhibitor moiety.
  • the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-R wh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-R wh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-R wh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K136 of HCV protease, or a mutant thereof.
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of E, F, or G:
  • R 90 , R 94 , R 95 , R 96 , R 97 , R 98 , R 99 , R 100 , R 102 , R 104 , R 105 , R 106 , R 107 , R 108 , R 109 , R 110 , R 111 , R 112 , R 113 , and R 114 are each independently hydrogen or C 1 -C 6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C 1 -C 6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR 1 —, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO 2 —, or —C( ⁇ S)—;
  • R 103 is hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, or C 2 -C 8 alkenyl
  • one or more methine groups of the C 1 -C 6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • R 1 is hydrogen or C 1 -C 8 alkyl
  • each R 101 is independently hydrogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkenyl, halogen, amino, nitro, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; n 6 is an integer from 0 to 4; and n 8 is an integer from 0 to 2.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 1 , R 90 , R 94 , R 95 , R 96 , R 97 , R 98 , R 99 , R 100 , R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 104 , R 105 , R 106 , R 107 , R 108 , R 109 , R 110 , R 111 , R 112 , R 113 , R 114 , n 6 , and n 8 are as defined above for Formula E.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 1 , R 90 , R 94 , R 95 , R 96 , R 97 , R 98 , R 99 , R 100 , R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 104 , R 105 , R 106 , R 107 , R 108 , R 109 , R 110 , R 111 , R 112 , R 113 , R 114 , n 6 , and n 8 are as defined above for Formula F.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 1 , R 90 , R 94 , R 95 , R 96 , R 97 , R 98 , R 99 , R 100 , R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 104 , R 105 , R 106 , R 107 , R 108 , R 109 , R 110 , R 111 , R 112 , R 113 , R 114 , n 6 , and n 8 are as defined above for Formula G.
  • compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K777 lysine residue of PI3K ⁇ . In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K802 lysine residue of PI3K ⁇ . In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K890 lysine residue of PI3K ⁇ .
  • R wh is characterized in that the -T-R wh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme.
  • the lysine residue is K777 lysine residue of PI3K ⁇ , or a mutant thereof.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate comprising PI3K ⁇ , or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K777.
  • the inhibitor is covalently bonded via a linker moiety.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K777-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K802-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K890-linker-inhibitor moiety.
  • the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-R wh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-R wh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein.
  • the linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-R wh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or from the reaction of the warhead with the K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ , or a mutant thereof.
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula H, J or K:
  • n, m, p, and q are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3; provided that n and q are not 0 at the same time, and m and q are not 0 at the same time;
  • a 2 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 4-8 membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5-10 membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic heterocyclic ring having at least one nitrogen, at least one oxygen, and optionally 1-2 additional heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • B′ is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or -T-Rwh; and
  • C 2 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • K xxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • K xxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula L or M:
  • R 204 is an hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, —(CH 2 ) m -(3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring), —(CH 2 ) m -(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring), —(CH 2 ) m -(4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH 2 ) m -(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH 2 ) m -phenyl, —(CH 2 ) m -(8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring), —(CH 2 ) m -(5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring
  • each R 205 and R 206 is independently —R′′, halogen, —NO 2 , —CN, —OR′′, —SR′′, —N(R′′) 2 , —C(O)R′′, —CO 2 R′′, —C(O)C(O)R′′, —C(O)CH 2 C(O)R′′, —S(O)R′′, —S(O) 2 R′′, —C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —SO 2 N(R′′) 2 , —OC(O)R′′, —N(R′′)C(O)R′′, —N(R′′)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C ⁇ NOR′′, —N(R′′)C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)SO 2 N(R′′) 2
  • each R′′ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • n is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive
  • each n is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • Ring A 5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 204 , R 205 , R 206 , n, and A 5 defined as above for Formula L and K xxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • K xxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • K xxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • K xxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 204 , R 205 , R 206 , n, and A 5 defined as above for Formula M and K xxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula N:
  • R 201 is hydrogen or C 1-6 alkyl
  • R 202 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, or (C 1-6 alkylene)-R 203 ; or
  • R 201 and R 202 are taken together with the intervening carbon to form an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered carbocyclic ring or a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • R 203 is a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • Ring A 6 is absent or an optionally substituted group selected from a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 201 , R 202 , R 203 and A 6 are as defined above for Formula N, and Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula O:
  • each R 205 and R 206 is independently —R′′, halogen, —NO 2 , —CN, —OR′′, —SR′′, —N(R′′) 2 , —C(O)R′′, —CO 2 R′′, —C(O)C(O)R′′, —C(O)CH 2 C(O)R′′, —S(O)R′′, —S(O) 2 R′′, —C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —SO 2 N(R′′) 2 , —OC(O)R′′, —N(R′′)C(O)R′′, —N(R′′)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C( ⁇ NR′′)N(R′′) 2 , —C ⁇ NOR′′, —N(R′′)C(O)N(R′′) 2 , —N(R′′)SO 2 N(R′′) 2
  • each R′′ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C 1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • R′′ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • n is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive
  • each n is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • Ring A 5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • R 205 , R 206 , n and A 5 are as defined above for formula O, and Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula P:
  • the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • K xxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ , or K802 or K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K777 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K802 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • Kxxx is K890 of PI3K ⁇ .
  • the term “inhibitor moiety” refers to a Scaffold group that binds in the active site of a protein.
  • Scaffold groups are well known in the art and include those described in, for example, but not limited to, Formulae VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXVI, and XXXVII.
  • certain compounds described herein are reversible inhibitors.
  • such compounds are useful as assay comparator compounds.
  • such reversible compounds are useful as inhibitors of the proteins disclosed herein, or a mutants thereof, and are therefore useful for treating one or more disorders as described herein.
  • provided compounds are reversible counterparts of provided irreversible inhibitors.
  • the key elements of the pharmacophore required for non-covalent binding to the target protein are retained. Whether the key elements of the pharmacophore are retained for binding is demonstrated when the non-covalent affinity conferred by the Scaffold is sufficient to further confer selective binding of the ligand and also covalent bonding.
  • the Pharmacophore is GDC-0941
  • Non-limiting examples of Scaffolds derived from the truncation of a pharmacophore, as described in the present disclosure, are set forth below in Formulas XXX, XXXI, XXXII, XXXIII, XXXIV, and XXXV.
  • R 200 is located at the site of truncation and is -Tether-R wh , where Tether and R wh are as defined for Formula I;
  • Ring B is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • R 200 is located at the site of truncation and is -Tether-R WH , where Tether and R wh are as defined in Formula I;
  • Ring B is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • R 200 is at the site of truncation and is -Tether-R WH , where Tether and R wh are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • T 2 is a covalent bond or a bivalent straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated C 1-6 hydrocarbon chain wherein one or more methylene units of T 2 are optionally replaced by —O—, —S, —N(R 1 )—, —C(O)—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)O—, —C(O)N(R 1 )—, —N(R 1 )C(O)—, —N(R 1 )C(O)N(R 1 )—, —SO 2 —, —SO 2 N(R 1 )—, —N(R 1 )SO 2 —, or —N(R 1 )SO 2 N(R 1 )—;
  • C 2 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • B′ is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Non-limiting examples of Scaffolds of the Formula XXXII above include:
  • the Scaffolds described by Formula XXXIII are based on truncating the pharmacophore dihydroimidazoquinazoline:
  • R 200 is at the site of truncation and is -Tether-R WH , where Tether and R wh are as defined previously;
  • X 10 is hydrogen, alkoxy, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkoxy
  • X 11 is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • the Scaffolds described by Formula XXXIV and Formula XXXV are based on truncating the pharmacophore SM ⁇ 337 and SM ⁇ 122.
  • R** is phenylacetamide
  • R** is phenylacetamide and the arrow denotes the site of attachment for T-R WH , both of which are as described herein.
  • X-linked Inhibitor of Apoptosis Protein is a member of the inhibitor of apoptosis family of proteins (IAP).
  • IAP apoptosis family of proteins
  • Other family members of IAP include cIAP1, cIAP2 and ML-IAP.
  • IAPs were initially identified in baculoviruses, but XIAP is one of the homologous proteins found in mammals. It is so called because it was first discovered by a 273 base pair site on the X chromosome.
  • XIAP Deregulation of XIAP can result in cancer, neurodegenerative disorders, and autoimmunity. High proportions of XIAP may function as a tumor marker. In the development of lung cancer NCI-H460, the overexpression of XIAP not only inhibits caspase, but also stops the apoptotic activity of cytochrome c (Apoptosis). In developing prostate cancer, XIAP is one of four IAPs overexpressed in the prostatic epithelium, indicating that a molecule that inhibits all IAPs may be necessary for effective treatment.
  • AML acute myelogenous leukemia
  • ALD adrenoleukodystrophy
  • ALD adrenoleukodystrophy
  • Alexander's disease alopecia greata
  • Alper's disease Alzheimer's disease
  • amyotrophic lateral sclerosis Lou Gehrig's Disease
  • angiitis ankylosing spondylitis
  • antiphospholipid syndrome ataxia telangiectasia
  • autism autoimmune haemolytic anaemia
  • Batten disease also known as Spielmeyer-Vogt-Sjögren-Batten disease
  • Behcet's syndrome Behcet's syndrome
  • Berger's disease bovine spongiform encephalopathy
  • BSE bovine spongiform encephalopathy
  • Canavan disease cardiomyopathy
  • Chagas disease chronic fatigue syndrome
  • CFS chronic fatigue syndrome
  • CFIDS chronic inflammatory polyneuropathy
  • the invention provides compositions useful for treating or preventing a proliferative disorder or an autoimmune disease.
  • the compositions are suitable for internal use and comprise an effective amount of a IAP inhibitor and a physiologically acceptable carrier or vehicle, useful for treating or preventing cancer, neurodegenerative disorders, and autoimmunity.
  • a XIAP inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject.
  • Proliferative disorders include, but are not limited to, solid tumor cancers such as malignant lymphoma, malignant gliomas, X-linked lymphoproliferative disease (XLP), acute myelogenous leukemia (AML), fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, Leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, brain cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, bone cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer
  • the invention provides compositions of a IAP inhibitor useful for treating or preventing an autoimmune disease.
  • Autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g. hemolytic anemia, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia), systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g.
  • ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease endocrine opthalmopathy
  • Grave's disease sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • a XIAP inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent an autoimmune disease in a subject.
  • Neurodegenerative disease which can be treated according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, and cerebral ischemia, and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury, glutamate neurotoxicity and hypoxia.
  • a cIAP inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject.
  • Proliferative disorders include, but are not limited to, mucosa associated lymphoid tissue lymphoma (MALT lymphoma) which is a subset of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, breast cancer, prostate cancer, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, malignant gliomas, and acute myelogenous leukemia (AML).
  • MALT lymphoma mucosa associated lymphoid tissue lymphoma
  • AML acute myelogenous leukemia
  • PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ The phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase (“PI3K ⁇ / ⁇ ”) pathway is a central signaling pathway that exerts its effect on numerous cellular functions including cell cycle progression, proliferation, motility, metabolism and survival (Marone, et al. Biochim. Biophys. Acta (2008) 1784: 159-185).
  • Activation of receptor tyrosine kinases in the case of Class IA PI3Ks, or G-proteins in the case of Class IB PI3K ⁇ causes phosphorylation of phosphatidylinositol-(4,5)-diphosphate, resulting in membrane-bound phosphatidylinositol-(3,4,5)-triphosphate.
  • the latter promotes the transfer of a variety of protein kinases from the cytoplasm to the plasma membrane by binding of phosphatidylinositol-(3,4,5)-triphosphate to the pleckstrin-homology (PH) domain of the kinase.
  • PH pleckstrin-homology
  • PI3K phosphatidylinositide-dependent kinase 1
  • Akt also known as Protein Kinase B or PKB
  • Phosphorylation of such kinases then allows for the activation or deactivation of numerous other pathways, involving mediators such as GSK3, mTOR, PRAS40, FKHD, NF- ⁇ B, BAD, Caspase-9, and others. These pathways are involved in many cellular processes, such as cell cycle progression, cell survival and apoptosis, cell growth, transcription, translation, metabolism, degranulation, and cell motility.
  • PTEN a phosphatase that catalyzes the dephosphorylation of phosphatidylinositol-(3,4,5)-triphosphate to phosphatidylinositol-(4,5)-diphosphate.
  • PTEN is mutated into an inactive form, permitting a constitutive activation of the PI3K pathway.
  • a targeting of PI3K itself or individual downstream kinases in the PI3K pathway provide a promising approach to mitigate or even abolish the disregulation in many cancers and thus restore normal cell function and behavior.
  • Diseases and disorders treatable by regulating the function of PI3K include, but are not limited to, cancer, neurofibromatosis, ocular angiogenesis, stroke, diabetes, hepatomegaly, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer's disease, cystic fibrosis, viral diseases, autoimmune diseases, atherosclerosis, restenosis, psoriasis, allergic disorders, inflammation, neurological disorders, angiogenic disorders, a hormone-related disease, conditions associated with organ transplantation, immunodeficiency disorders, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, infectious diseases, conditions associated with cell death, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), liver disease, pathologic immune conditions involving T cell activation, and CNS disorders in a patient.
  • cancer cancer
  • neurofibromatosis ocular angiogenesis
  • stroke e.g., stroke, diabetes, hepatomegaly, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer's disease, cystic fibrosis, viral diseases, autoimmune diseases, at
  • proliferative diseases/disorders include, but are not limited to, solid tumor cancers such as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, Leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, brain cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, bone cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, oral cancer, nasal cancer, throat cancer, head and neck cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adeno
  • a PI3K inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject. More specifically, compounds of the current invention are useful in the treatment of a proliferative disease selected from a benign or malignant tumor, carcinoma of the brain, kidney, liver, bile duct, adrenal gland, bladder, breast, esophagus, stomach, gastric tumors, ovaries, colon, rectum, prostate, pancreas, lung (including small cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer and bronchioalveolar cancer), stomach, vagina, endometrial, uterus, cervix and vulva, testes, genitourinary tract, larynx, skin, bone or thyroid, sarcoma, glioblastomas, neuroblastomas, multiple myeloma and lymphomas, gastrointestinal cancer, especially colon carcinoma or colorectal adenoma, a tumor of the neck and head, a cancer of the central nervous system
  • a PI3K inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a neurodegenerative disease/disorder in a subject.
  • Neurodegenerative disease which can be treated according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, and cerebral ischemia, and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury, glutamate neurotoxicity and hypoxia.
  • a PI3K inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent an autoimmune disease in a subject.
  • Autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g. hemolytic anemia, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia), systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g.
  • ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease endocrine opthalmopathy
  • Grave's disease sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • the present invention provides a method of using the disclosed compounds to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of neurofibromatosis type I (NF1), neurofibromatosis type II (NF2) Schwann cell neoplasms (e.g. MPNST's), or Schwannomas.
  • NF1 neurofibromatosis type I
  • NF2 neurofibromatosis type II
  • MPNST's Schwann cell neoplasms
  • Schwannomas e.g. MPNST's
  • Inflammatory or obstructive airways diseases to which the present invention is applicable include asthma of whatever type or genesis including both intrinsic (non-allergic) asthma and extrinsic (allergic) asthma, mild asthma, moderate asthma, severe asthma, bronchitic asthma, exercise-induced asthma, occupational asthma and asthma induced following bacterial infection.
  • Treatment of asthma is also to be understood as embracing treatment of subjects, e.g. of less than 4 or 5 years of age, exhibiting wheezing symptoms and diagnosed or diagnosable as “whez infants”, an established patient category of major medical concern and now often identified as incipient or early-phase asthmatics.
  • Prophylactic efficacy in the treatment of asthma will be evidenced by reduced frequency or severity of symptomatic attack, e.g. of acute asthmatic or bronchoconstrictor attack, improvement in lung function or improved airways hyperreactivity. It may further be evidenced by reduced requirement for other, symptomatic therapy, such as therapy for or intended to restrict or abort symptomatic attack when it occurs, for example antiinflammatory or bronchodilatory.
  • Prophylactic benefit in asthma may in particular be apparent in subjects prone to “morning dipping.” “Morning dipping” is a recognized asthmatic syndrome, common to a substantial percentage of asthmatics and characterised by asthma attack, e.g. between the hours of about 4 to 6 am, i.e. at a time normally substantially distant form any previously administered symptomatic asthma therapy.
  • compounds of the current invention can be used to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of other inflammatory or obstructive airways diseases and conditions associated with PI3K including, but not limited to, acute lung injury (ALI), adult/acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), chronic obstructive pulmonary, airways or lung disease (COPD, COAD or COLD), including chronic bronchitis or dyspnea associated therewith, emphysema, as well as exacerbation of airways hyperreactivity consequent to other drug therapy, in particular other inhaled drug therapy.
  • ALI acute lung injury
  • ARDS adult/acute respiratory distress syndrome
  • COAD chronic obstructive pulmonary, airways or lung disease
  • COAD chronic obstructive pulmonary, airways or lung disease
  • exacerbation of airways hyperreactivity consequent to other drug therapy in particular other inhaled drug therapy.
  • the invention is also applicable to the treatment of bronchitis of whatever type or genesis including, but not limited to, acute, arachidic, catarrhal, croupus, chronic or phthinoid bronchitis.
  • inflammatory or obstructive airways diseases to which the present invention is applicable include pneumoconiosis (an inflammatory, commonly occupational, disease of the lungs, frequently accompanied by airways obstruction, whether chronic or acute, and occasioned by repeated inhalation of dusts) of whatever type or genesis, including, for example, aluminosis, anthracosis, asbestosis, chalicosis, ptilosis, siderosis, silicosis, tabacosis and byssinosis.
  • the methods disclosed herein may be used to treat eosinophil related disorders associated with PI3K, e.g. eosinsophilia, in particular eosinophil related disorders of the airways (e.g.
  • eosinophilic infiltration of pulmonary tissues including hypereosinophilia as it effects the airways and/or lungs as well as, for example, eosinophil-related disorders of the airways consequential or concomitant to Loffler's syndrome, eosinophilic pneumonia, parasitic (in particular metazoan) infestation (including tropical eosinophilia), bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, polyarteritis nodosa (including Churg-Strauss syndrome), eosinophilic granuloma and eosinophil-related disorders affecting the airways occasioned by drug-reaction.
  • eosinophil-related disorders of the airways consequential or concomitant to Loffler's syndrome
  • eosinophilic pneumonia including parasitic (in particular metazoan) infestation (including tropical eosinophilia), bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, polyarteritis nodosa (including Churg
  • the methods disclosed herein are also useful to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of psoriasis, contact dermatitis, atopic dermatitis, alopecia greata, erythema multiforma, dermatitis herpetiformis, scleroderma, vitiligo, hypersensitivity angiitis, urticaria, bullous pemphigoid, systemic lupus erythematosus, pemphisus, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, and other inflammatory or allergic conditions of the skin.
  • diseases or conditions having an inflammatory component caused by aberrant PI3K may also be prevented, treated, or used to reduce the severity by the methods disclosed herein.
  • diseases and disorders include, but are not limited to, diseases and conditions of the eye such as conjunctivitis, keratoconjunctivitis sicca, and vernal conjunctivitis, diseases affecting the nose including allergic rhinitis, and inflammatory disease in which autoimmune reactions are implicated or having an autoimmune component or etiology, including autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g.
  • hemolytic anemia aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia
  • systemic lupus erythematosus rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g.
  • ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease endocrine opthalmopathy
  • Grave's disease sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • Cardiovascular diseases which can be prevent, treated, or used to reduce the severity according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, restenosis, cardiomegaly, atherosclerosis, myocardial infarction, ischemic stroke and congestive heart failure.
  • the invention provides compositions useful for treating or preventing cancer, neurofibromatosis, ocular angiogenesis, stroke, diabetes, hepatomegaly, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer's disease, cystic fibrosis, viral diseases, autoimmune diseases, atherosclerosis, restenosis, psoriasis, allergic disorders, inflammation, neurological disorders, angiogenic disorders, a hormone-related disease, conditions associated with organ transplantation, immunodeficiency disorders, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, infectious diseases, conditions associated with cell death, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), liver disease, pathologic immune conditions involving T cell activation, and CNS disorders in a patient.
  • CML chronic myelogenous leukemia
  • the methods of the present invention may be advantageous for inhibiting angiogenesis, for example, to treat eye disease associated with ocular angiogenesis, such as by topical administration of the subject compounds.
  • Compounds according to the invention can be formulated for topical administration.
  • the irreversible inhibitor can be formulated for topical delivery to the lung (e.g., as an aerosol, such as a dry powder or liquid formulation) to treat asthma, as a cream, ointment, lotion or the like for topical application to the skin to treat psoriasis, or as an ocular formulation for topical application to the eye to treat an ocular disease.
  • Such a formulation will contain a subject inhibitor and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Additional components, such as preservatives, and agents to increase viscosity of the formulation such as natural or synthetic polymers may also be present.
  • the ocular formulation can be in any suitable form, such as a liquid, an ointment, a hydrogel or a powder.
  • Compounds of the current invention can be administered together with another therapeutic agent, such as an anti-VEGF agent, for example ranibizumab a Fab fragment of an antibody that binds VEGFA, or another anti-angiogenic compound as described further below.
  • 3-Phosphoinositide-dependent kinase 1 phosphorylates the activation loop of a number of protein serine/threonine kinases of the AGC kinase superfamily, including protein kinase B (PKB; also called Akt), serum and glucocorticoid-induced kinase, protein kinase C isoforms, and the p70 ribosomal S6 kinase.
  • PPK1 protein kinase B
  • Akt protein kinase B
  • serum and glucocorticoid-induced kinase protein kinase C isoforms
  • the phosphoinositide 3-kinase/3-phosphoinositide-dependent kinase 1 (PDPK1)/Akt signaling pathway plays a key role in cancer cell growth, survival, and tumor angiogenesis and represents a promising target for anti-cancer drugs.
  • a proliferative disorder can be prevented, treated, or reduce the severity of by administration of an effective amount of a PDPK1 inhibitor to a subject in need thereof.
  • Proliferative disorders that can be prevented, treated, or reduce the severity of by administering an effective amount of a PDPK1 inhibitor include, but are not limited to, cancer, uterine fibroids, benign prostatic hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neuro-fibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, an inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, a fungal infection, a defective apoptosis-associated condition, or a proliferative disease that is dependent on PDPK1 activity.
  • diseases and disorders that are regulated by PI3K are also implicated in aberrant PDPK1 function.
  • diseases treatable by regulating PDPK1 activity include, but are not limited to, cancer, neurofibromatosis, ocular angiogenesis, stroke, diabetes, hepatomegaly, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer's disease, cystic fibrosis, viral diseases, autoimmune diseases, atherosclerosis, restenosis, psoriasis, allergic disorders, inflammation, neurological disorders, angiogenic disorders, a hormone-related disease, conditions associated with organ transplantation, immunodeficiency disorders, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, infectious diseases, conditions associated with cell death, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), liver disease, pathologic immune conditions involving T cell activation, and CNS disorders in a patient.
  • CML chronic myelogenous leukemia
  • proliferative diseases/disorders include, but are not limited to, solid tumor cancers such as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, Leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, brain cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, bone cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, oral cancer, nasal cancer, throat cancer, head and neck cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adeno
  • a PDPK1 inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject. More specifically, compounds of the current invention are useful in the treatment of a proliferative disease selected from a benign or malignant tumor, carcinoma of the brain, kidney, liver, bile duct, adrenal gland, bladder, breast, esophagus, stomach, gastric tumors, ovaries, colon, rectum, prostate, pancreas, lung (including small cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer and bronchioalveolar cancer), stomach, vagina, endometrial, uterus, cervix and vulva, testes, genitourinary tract, larynx, skin, bone or thyroid, sarcoma, glioblastomas, neuroblastomas, multiple myeloma and lymphomas, gastrointestinal cancer, especially colon carcinoma or colorectal adenoma, a tumor of the neck and head, a cancer of the central nervous system
  • a PDPK1 inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a neurodegenerative disease/disorder in a subject.
  • Neurodegenerative disease which can be treated according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, and cerebral ischemia, and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury, glutamate neurotoxicity and hypoxia.
  • a PDPK1 inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent an autoimmune disease in a subject.
  • Autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g. hemolytic anemia, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia), systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g.
  • ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease endocrine opthalmopathy
  • Grave's disease sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • Blood-borne cancers implicated in aberrant PDPK1 expression include, but are not limited to, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic B-cell leukemia, acute lymphoblastic T-cell leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute monoblastic leukemia, acute erythroleukemic leukemia, acute megakaryoblastic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocyctic leukemia, acute undifferentiated leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia (“CML”), chronic lymphocytic leukemia (“CLL”), hairy cell leukemia, and myeloma.
  • acute lymphoblastic leukemia acute lymphoblastic B-cell leukemia, acute lymphoblastic T-cell leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute monoblastic leukemia, acute erythrole
  • Lymphomas where PDPK1 is implicated include, but are not limited to, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphomas, multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and polycythemia vera.
  • CNS and brain cancers where aberrant PDPK1 expression include, but not limited to, glioma, pilocytic astrocytoma, astrocytoma, anaplastic astrocytoma, glioblastoma multiforme, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, vestibular schwannoma, adenoma, metastatic brain tumor, and meningioma.
  • Virally-mediated cancers have also been implicated in overexpression of PDPK1.
  • viruses include human papilloma virus, which can lead to cervical cancer (see, e.g., Hernandez-Avila et al., Archives of Medical Research (1997) 28:265-271); Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), which can lead to lymphoma (see, e.g., Herrmann et al., J Pathol (2003) 199(2):140-5); hepatitis B or C virus, which can lead to liver carcinoma (see, e.g., El-Serag, J Clin Gastroenterol (2002) 35(5 Suppl 2):572-8); human T cell leukemia virus (HTLV)-I, which can lead to T-cell leukemia (see e.g., Mortreux et al., Leukemia (2003) 17(1):26-38); human herpesvirus-8 infection, which can lead to Kaposi's sarcoma (see, e.g., Kadow
  • the invention provides methods for treating or preventing these aforementioned cancers, disorders and diseases, comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment or prevention an effective amount of a PDPK1 inhibitor.
  • HCV is a positive-stranded RNA virus whose genome encodes a polyprotein of approximately 3000 amino acids. This precursor protein is processed into at least 10 viral structural and nonstructural proteins: C, E1, E2, p7, NS2, NS3, NS4A, NS4B, NS5A, and NS5B (Blight, K. J., et al., Antiviral Ther. 3, Suppl. 3: 71-81, 1998). HCV nonstructural (NS) proteins are derived by proteolytic cleavage of the polyprotein and are presumed to provide the essential catalytic machinery for viral replication.
  • NS nonstructural
  • NS3 is an approximately 68 Kda protein, and has both an N-terminal serine protease domain and an RNA-dependent ATPase domain at its C-terminus. It has been shown that the NS4A protein serves as a co-factor for the serine protease activity of NS3. NS3 functions as a proteolytic enzyme that cleaves sites liberating other nonstructural proteins necessary for HCV replication and is a validated therapeutic target for antiviral chemotherapy.
  • Symptoms of HCV infection can either be acute or chronic. Acute symptoms include decreased appetite, fatigue, abdominal pain, jaundice, itching, and flu-like symptoms. Most patients diagnosed with HCV infection with acute symptoms eventually develop chronic symptoms, which include fatigue, flu-like symptoms, joint pains, itching, sleep disturbances, appetite changes, nausea, and depression. Chronic HCV infection eventually leads to liver inflammation, fibrosis, and eventually cirrhosis all of which lead to decreased liver function and eventually liver failure.
  • Chronic hepatitis C can also be associated with extrahepatic manifestations associated with the presence of HCV such as porphyria cutanea tarda, cryoglobulinemia (a form of small-vessel vasculitis) and glomerulonephritis (inflammation of the kidney), specifically membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis (MPGN).
  • the invention provides compositions useful for treating or preventing a an HCV infection.
  • the compositions are suitable for internal use and comprise an effective amount of a HCV inhibitor and a physiologically acceptable carrier or vehicle.
  • a HCV inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of an HCV infection in a subject.
  • additional therapeutic agents which are normally administered to treat that condition, may be administered in combination with compounds and compositions of this invention.
  • additional therapeutic agents that are normally administered to treat a particular disease, or condition are known as “appropriate for the disease, or condition, being treated”.
  • a provided compound, or composition thereof is administered in combination with another inhibitor of HCV protease, or a variant thereof.
  • a provided compound, or composition thereof is administered in combination with another antiviral agent.
  • antiviral agents include, but are not limited to, immunomodulatory agents, such as ⁇ -, ⁇ -, and ⁇ -interferons, pegylated derivatized interferon- ⁇ compounds, and thymosin; other anti-viral agents, such as ribavirin, amantadine, and telbivudine; other inhibitors of hepatitis C proteases (NS2-NS3 inhibitors and NS3-NS4A inhibitors, e.g.
  • BILN 2061 and VX-950 inhibitors of other targets in the HCV life cycle, including helicase and polymerase inhibitors; inhibitors of internal ribosome entry; broad-spectrum viral inhibitors, such as IMPDH inhibitors (e.g., mycophenolic acid and derivatives thereof); or combinations of any of the above.
  • IMPDH inhibitors e.g., mycophenolic acid and derivatives thereof
  • a combination of 2 or more antiviral agents may be administered. In certain embodiments, a combination of 3 or more antiviral agents may be administered.
  • the antiviral agents are selected from ribavirin or interferon. In other embodiments, the antiviral agent is ⁇ -interferon.
  • agents the inhibitors of this invention may also be combined with include, without limitation: treatments for Alzheimer's Disease such as Aricept® and Excelon®; treatments for HIV such as ritonavir; treatments for Parkinson's Disease such as L-DOPA/carbidopa, entacapone, ropinrole, pramipexole, bromocriptine, pergolide, trihexephendyl, and amantadine; agents for treating Multiple Sclerosis (MS) such as beta interferon (e.g., Avonex® and Rebif®), Copaxone®, and mitoxantrone; treatments for asthma such as albuterol and Singulair®; agents for treating schizophrenia such as zyprexa, risperdal, seroquel, and haloperidol; anti-inflammatory agents such as corticosteroids, TNF blockers, IL-1 RA, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, and sulfasalazine; immunomodulatory and
  • compounds of the present invention are administered in combination with a monoclonal antibody or an siRNA therapeutic.
  • Those additional agents may be administered separately from an inventive compound-containing composition, as part of a multiple dosage regimen.
  • those agents may be part of a single dosage form, mixed together with a compound of this invention in a single composition. If administered as part of a multiple dosage regime, the two active agents may be submitted simultaneously, sequentially or within a period of time from one another normally within five hours from one another.
  • the methods of the present invention may be used to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of cancer, an autoimmune disorder, a neurodegenerative or neurological disorder, schizophrenia, a bone-related disorder, liver disease, or a cardiac disorder.
  • the exact amount required will vary from subject to subject, depending on the species, age, and general condition of the subject, the severity of the infection, the particular agent, its mode of administration, and the like.
  • the compounds of the invention are preferably formulated in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage.
  • dosage unit form refers to a physically discrete unit of agent appropriate for the patient to be treated. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment.
  • the specific effective dose level for any particular patient or organism will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • patient means an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human.
  • Administration of an inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be accomplished via any mode of administration for therapeutic agents. These modes include systemic or local administration such as oral, nasal, parenteral, transdermal, subcutaneous, vaginal, buccal, rectal or topical administration modes. In some instances, administration will result in the release of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein into the bloodstream.
  • the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein is administered orally.
  • compositions can be in solid, semi-solid or liquid dosage form, such as, for example, injectables, tablets, suppositories, pills, time-release capsules, elixirs, tinctures, emulsions, syrups, powders, liquids, suspensions, or the like, preferably in unit dosages and consistent with conventional pharmaceutical practices.
  • injectables tablets, suppositories, pills, time-release capsules, elixirs, tinctures, emulsions, syrups, powders, liquids, suspensions, or the like, preferably in unit dosages and consistent with conventional pharmaceutical practices.
  • they can also be administered in intravenous (both bolus and infusion), intraperitoneal, subcutaneous or intramuscular form, all using forms well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubil
  • sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using dissolution or suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents.
  • the sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, ethanol, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • the injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • the rate of compound release can be controlled.
  • biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides).
  • Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the compound in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
  • compositions of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules.
  • the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders or diluents such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, cellulose, saccharin, glycine, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, magnesium aluminum silicate, starch paste, tragacanth, carboxymethylcellulose, methyl cellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, magnesium carbonate, natural sugars, corn sweeteners, sucrose, waxes and natural or synthetic gums such as acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polethylene glycols and the like.
  • the active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above.
  • the solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art.
  • the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch.
  • Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose.
  • the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
  • buffering agents include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can also be administered in the form of liposome delivery systems, such as small unilamellar vesicles, large unilamellar vesicles and multilamellar vesicles.
  • Liposomes can be formed from a variety of phospholipids, containing cholesterol, stearylamine or phosphatidylcholines.
  • a film of lipid components is hydrated with an aqueous solution of drug to a form lipid layer encapsulating the drug, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,564.
  • the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can also be delivered by the use of monoclonal antibodies as individual carriers to which the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein are coupled.
  • the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can also be coupled with soluble polymers as targetable drug carriers.
  • Such polymers can include polyvinylpyrrolidone, pyran copolymer, polyhydroxypropylmethacrylamide-phenol, polyhydroxyethylaspanamidephenol, or polyethyleneoxidepolylysine substituted with palmitoyl residues.
  • inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be coupled to a class of biodegradable polymers useful in achieving controlled release of a drug, for example, polylactic acid, polyepsilon caprolactone, polyhydroxy butyric acid, polyorthoesters, polyacetals, polydihydropyrans, polycyanoacrylates and cross-linked or amphipathic block copolymers of hydrogels.
  • biodegradable polymers useful in achieving controlled release of a drug, for example, polylactic acid, polyepsilon caprolactone, polyhydroxy butyric acid, polyorthoesters, polyacetals, polydihydropyrans, polycyanoacrylates and cross-linked or amphipathic block copolymers of hydrogels.
  • Parenteral injectable administration can be used for subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injections and infusions.
  • Injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions or solid forms suitable for dissolving in liquid prior to injection.
  • One embodiment, for parenteral administration employs the implantation of a slow-release or sustained-released system, according to U.S. Pat. No. 3,710,795, incorporated herein by reference.
  • compositions can be sterilized or contain non-toxic amounts of adjuvants, such as preserving, stabilizing, wetting or emulsifying agents, solution promoters, salts for regulating the osmotic pressure, pH buffering agents, and other substances, including, but not limited to, sodium acetate or triethanolamine oleate. In addition, they can also contain other therapeutically valuable substances.
  • adjuvants such as preserving, stabilizing, wetting or emulsifying agents, solution promoters, salts for regulating the osmotic pressure, pH buffering agents, and other substances, including, but not limited to, sodium acetate or triethanolamine oleate.
  • adjuvants such as preserving, stabilizing, wetting or emulsifying agents, solution promoters, salts for regulating the osmotic pressure, pH buffering agents, and other substances, including, but not limited to, sodium acetate or triethanolamine oleate.
  • they can also contain other therapeutically valuable substances.
  • Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches.
  • the active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required.
  • Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, and eye drops are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • the present invention contemplates the use of transdermal patches, which have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body.
  • Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • compositions can be prepared according to conventional mixing, granulating or coating methods, respectively, and the present pharmaceutical compositions can contain from about 0.1% to about 99%, preferably from about 1% to about 70% of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein by weight or volume.
  • the dosage regimen utilizing the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be selected in accordance with a variety of factors including type, species, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the subject; the severity of the condition to be treated; the route of administration; the renal or hepatic function of the subject; and the particular inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein employed.
  • a person skilled in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the drug useful for treating or preventing a proliferative disorder.
  • Effective dosage amounts of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein, when administered to a subject range from about 0.05 to about 1000 mg of inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein per day.
  • Compositions for in vivo or in vitro use can contain about 0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 50.0, 100.0, 250.0, 500.0 or 1000.0 mg of the inhibitor described herein.
  • the compositions are in the form of a tablet that can be scored.
  • Effective plasma levels of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can range from about 0.002 mg to about 50 mg per kg of body weight per day.
  • the amount of an inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein that is effective in the treatment or prevention of cancer can be determined by clinical techniques that are known to those of skill in the art.
  • in vitro and in vivo assays can optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges.
  • the precise dose to be employed can also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the proliferative disorder being treated and can be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each subject's circumstances in view of, e.g., published clinical studies.
  • Suitable effective dosage amounts can range from about 10 micrograms to about 5 grams about every 4 h, although they are typically about 500 mg or less per every 4 hours.
  • the effective dosage is about 0.01 mg, 0.5 mg, about 1 mg, about 50 mg, about 100 mg, about 200 mg, about 300 mg, about 400 mg, about 500 mg, about 600 mg, about 700 mg, about 800 mg, about 900 mg, about 1 g, about 1.2 g, about 1.4 g, about 1.6 g, about 1.8 g, about 2.0 g, about 2.2 g, about 2.4 g, about 2.6 g, about 2.8 g, about 3.0 g, about 3.2 g, about 3.4 g, about 3.6 g, about 3.8 g, about 4.0 g, about 4.2 g, about 4.4 g, about 4.6 g, about 4.8 g, and about 5.0 g, every 4 hours.
  • Equivalent dosages can be administered over various time periods including, but not limited to, about every 2 hours, about every 6 hours, about every 8 hours, about every 12 hours, about every 24 hours, about every 36 hours, about every 48 hours, about every 72 hours, about every week, about every two weeks, about every three weeks, about every month, and about every two months.
  • the effective dosage amounts described herein refer to total amounts administered; that is, if more than one inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein is administered, the effective dosage amounts correspond to the total amount administered.
  • the dosage regimen utilizing the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be selected in accordance with a variety of factors including type, species, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the subject; the severity of the proliferative disorder to be treated; the route of administration; the renal or hepatic function of the subject; and the particular inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein employed.
  • a person skilled in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the drug required to prevent, counter or arrest the progress of the proliferative disorder.
  • the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be administered in a single daily dose, or the total daily dosage can be administered in divided doses of two, three or four times daily. Furthermore, the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be administered in intranasal form via topical use of suitable intranasal vehicles, or via transdermal routes, using those forms of transdermal skin patches well known to those of ordinary skill in that art. To be administered in the form of a transdermal delivery system, the dosage administration can be continuous rather than intermittent throughout the dosage regimen.
  • Topical preparations include creams, ointments, lotions, aerosol sprays and gels, wherein the concentration of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein ranges from about 0.1% to about 15%, w/w or w/v.
  • additional therapeutic agents which are normally administered to treat that condition, may be administered in combination with compounds and compositions of this invention.
  • additional therapeutic agents that are normally administered to treat a particular disease, or condition are known as “appropriate for the disease, or condition, being treated”.
  • the additional therapeutic agent is not a competitive binder for the active binding site within the target protein for the inhibitor used in the combination.
  • an inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent provided herein, or composition thereof is administered in combination with another pharmaceutically active agent, or a variant thereof.
  • a provided compound, or composition thereof is administered in combination with one or more additional pharmaceutically active agent.
  • Such additional pharmaceutically active agents include, but are not limited to, treatments for Alzheimer's Disease such as Aricept® and Excelon®; treatments for HIV such as ritonavir; treatments for Parkinson's Disease such as L-DOPA/carbidopa, entacapone, ropinrole, pramipexole, bromocriptine, pergolide, trihexephendyl, and amantadine; agents for treating Multiple Sclerosis (MS) such as beta interferon (e.g., Avonex® and Rebif®), Copaxone®, and mitoxantrone; treatments for asthma such as albuterol and Singulair®; agents for treating schizophrenia such as zyprexa, risperdal, seroquel, and haloperidol; anti-inflammatory agents such as corticosteroids, TNF blockers, IL-1 RA, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, and sulfasalazine; immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive agents
  • compounds of the present invention are administered in combination with a monoclonal antibody or an siRNA therapeutic.
  • Those additional agents may be administered separately from an inventive compound-containing composition, as part of a multiple dosage regimen.
  • those agents may be part of a single dosage form, mixed together with a compound of this invention in a single composition. If administered as part of a multiple dosage regime, the two active agents may be submitted simultaneously, sequentially or within a period of time from one another normally within five hours from one another.
  • the term “combination,” “combined,” and related terms refers to the simultaneous or sequential administration of therapeutic agents in accordance with this invention.
  • a compound of the present invention may be administered with another therapeutic agent simultaneously or sequentially in separate unit dosage forms or together in a single unit dosage form.
  • the present invention provides a single unit dosage form comprising a compound of the invention, an additional therapeutic agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle.
  • compositions of this invention should be formulated so that a dosage of between 0.01-100 mg/kg body weight/day of an inventive can be administered.
  • compositions which comprise an additional therapeutic agent that additional therapeutic agent and the compound of this invention may act synergistically. Therefore, the amount of additional therapeutic agent in such compositions will be less than that required in a monotherapy utilizing only that therapeutic agent. In such compositions a dosage of between 0.01-100 mg/kg body weight/day of the additional therapeutic agent can be administered.
  • the amount of additional therapeutic agent present in the compositions of this invention will be no more than the amount that would normally be administered in a composition comprising that therapeutic agent as the only active agent.
  • the amount of additional therapeutic agent in the presently disclosed compositions will range from about 50% to 100% of the amount normally present in a composition comprising that agent as the only therapeutically active agent.
  • the compositions comprise an amount of an anticancer inhibitor described herein, e.g., a XIAP inhibitor, and another anticancer agent which together are effective to treat or prevent cancer.
  • the amount of the anticancer inhibitor described herein and another anticancer agent is at least about 0.01% of the combined combination chemotherapy agents by weight of the composition. When intended for oral administration, this amount can be varied from about 0.1% to about 80% by weight of the composition.
  • Some oral compositions can comprise from about 4% to about 50% of the anticancer inhibitor described herein and another anticancer agent.
  • Other compositions of the present invention are prepared so that a parenteral dosage unit contains from about 0.01% to about 2% by weight of the composition.
  • the present methods for treating or preventing cancer in a subject in need thereof can further comprise administering another prophylactic or therapeutic agent to the subject being administered an anticancer inhibitor described herein.
  • the other prophylactic or therapeutic agent is administered in an effective amount.
  • the other prophylactic or therapeutic agent includes, but is not limited to, an anti-inflammatory agent, an anti-renal failure agent, an anti-diabetic agent, an anti-cardiovascular disease agent, an antiemetic agent, a hematopoietic colony stimulating factor, an anxiolytic agent, and an opioid or non-opioid analgesic agent.
  • the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after an antiemetic agent, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours or 72 hours of each other.
  • the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after a hematopoietic colony stimulating factor, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks or 4 weeks of each other.
  • the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after an opioid or non-opioid analgesic agent, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours or 72 hours of each other.
  • the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after an anxiolytic agent, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours or 72 hours of each other.
  • Effective amounts of the other therapeutic agents are well known to those skilled in the art. However, it is well within the skilled artisan's purview to determine the other therapeutic agent's optimal effective amount range. In one embodiment of the invention, where, another therapeutic agent is administered to a subject, the effective amount of the anticancer inhibitor described herein is less than its effective amount would be where the other therapeutic agent is not administered. In this case, without being bound by theory, it is believed that the anticancer inhibitor described herein and the other therapeutic agent act synergistically to treat or prevent cancer.
  • Antiemetic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, metoclopromide, domperidone, prochlorperazine, promethazine, chlorpromazine, trimethobenzamide, ondansetron, granisetron, hydroxyzine, acetylleucine monoethanolamine, alizapride, azasetron, benzquinamide, bietanautine, bromopride, buclizine, clebopride, cyclizine, dimenhydrinate, diphenidol, dolasetron, meclizine, methallatal, metopimazine, nabilone, oxyperndyl, pipamazine, scopolamine, sulpiride, tetrahydrocannabinol, thiethylperazine, thioproperazine, and tropisetron.
  • Hematopoietic colony stimulating factors useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, filgrastim, sargramostim, molgramostim and epoietin alfa.
  • Opioid analgesic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, morphine, heroin, hydromorphone, hydrocodone, oxymorphone, oxycodone, metopon, apomorphine, normorphine, etorphine, buprenorphine, meperidine, lopermide, anileridine, ethoheptazine, piminidine, betaprodine, diphenoxylate, fentanil, sufentanil, alfentanil, remifentanil, levorphanol, dextromethorphan, phenazocine, pentazocine, cyclazocine, methadone, isomethadone and propoxyphene.
  • morphine heroin, hydromorphone, hydrocodone, oxymorphone, oxycodone, metopon, apomorphine, normorphine, etorphine, buprenorphine, meperidine, lopermide, anileridine
  • Non-opioid analgesic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, aspirin, celecoxib, rofecoxib, diclofinac, diflusinal, etodolac, fenoprofen, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, ketoprofen, indomethacin, ketorolac, meclofenamate, mefanamic acid, nabumetone, naproxen, piroxicam and sulindac.
  • Anxiolytic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, buspirone, and benzodiazepines such as diazepam, lorazepam, oxazapam, chlorazepate, clonazepam, chlordiazepoxide and alprazolam.
  • kits that can simplify the administration of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site to a subject.
  • a typical kit of the invention comprises a unit dosage form of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site.
  • the unit dosage form is a container, which can be sterile, containing an effective amount of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site and a physiologically acceptable carrier or vehicle.
  • the kit can further comprise a label or printed instructions instructing the use of the ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site to treat or prevent cancer.
  • the kit can also further comprise a unit dosage form of another prophylactic or therapeutic agent, for example, a container containing an effective amount of another prophylactic or therapeutic agent or another anticancer agent.
  • the kit comprises a container containing an effective amount of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site and an effective amount of another prophylactic or therapeutic agent.
  • examples of other prophylactic or therapeutic agents and other anticancer agents include, but are not limited to, those listed above.
  • a compound of the present invention may be tethered to a detectable moiety.
  • a detectable moiety may be attached to a provided compound via a suitable substituent.
  • suitable substituent refers to a moiety that is capable of covalent attachment to a detectable moiety.
  • moieties are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art and include groups containing, e.g., a carboxylate moiety, an amino moiety, a thiol moiety, or a hydroxyl moiety, to name but a few.

Abstract

The present invention relates to enzyme inhibitors. More specifically, the present invention relates to ligand-directed covalent modification of proteins; method of designing same; pharmaceutical formulation of same; and method of use.

Description

    PRIORITY CLAIM
  • This application claims the benefit of U.S. provisional application 61/335,043, filed Dec. 30, 2009, the disclosure of which is relied on and incorporated by reference into the present application in its entirety. All patents, patent applications and referenced articles are hereby incorporated by reference into this application in their entireties.
    • DESCRIPTION OF THE TEXT FILE SUBMITTED ELECTRONICALLY
  • The contents of the text file submitted electronically herewith are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety: A computer readable format copy of the Sequence Listing (filename: AVIL—001—01US_SeqList_ST25.txt, date recorded: Feb. 27, 2011, file size 26 kilobytes).
    • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to enzyme inhibitors. More specifically, the present invention relates to ligand-directed covalent modification of lysine-containing proteins.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Compounds that inhibit the activity of proteins, such as enzymes, are important therapeutic agents. Most inhibitors reversibly bind to their target protein and therefore reversibly inhibit the activity of their target protein. Although reversible inhibitors have been developed that are efficacious therapeutic agents, reversible inhibitors have certain disadvantages. For example, many reversible inhibitors of kinases interact with the ATP-binding site. Because the structure of the ATP-binding site is highly conserved among kinases, it has been very challenging to develop reversible inhibitors that selectively inhibit one or more desired kinases. In addition, because reversible inhibitors dissociate from their target protein, the duration of inhibition may be shorter than desired. Thus, when reversible inhibitors are used as therapeutic agents higher quantities and/or more frequent dosing than is desired may be required in order to achieve the intended biological effect. This dosing requirement may produce toxicity or result in other undesirable effects.
  • Irreversible inhibitors that covalently bind to their target protein have been described in the art. Covalent irreversible inhibitors of drug targets have a number of important advantages over their reversible counterparts as therapeutics. Prolonged suppression of the drug targets may be necessary for maximum pharmacodynamic effect and an irreversible inhibitor can provide this advantage by permanently eliminating existing drug target activity, which will return only when new target protein is synthesized. When an irreversible inhibitor is administered, the therapeutic plasma concentration of the irreversible inhibitor would need to be attained only long enough to briefly expose the target protein to the inhibitor, which would irreversibly suppress activity of the target and plasma levels could then rapidly decline while the target protein would remain inactivated. This irreversible binding has the potential advantage of lowering the minimal blood plasma concentration at which therapeutic activity occurs, minimizing multiple dosing requirements and eliminating the requirement for long plasma half-lives without compromising efficacy. All of these considerations could reduce toxicity due to any nonspecific off-target interactions that may occur at high or prolonged blood plasma levels. Irreversible inhibitors also likely have advantages in overcoming drug resistance requirements in two ways. First, irreversible inhibitors eliminate the requirement for long blood plasma half-lives without compromising efficacy. Second, because resistance mutations may compromise non-covalent binding, but even in the face of reduced non-covalent affinity, the inactivation mechanism will often, nonetheless, lead to protein target modification and irreversible inhibition. All of these considerations could reduce toxicity due to any nonspecific off-target interactions that may occur at high or prolonged blood plasma levels. Another advantage of irreversible inhibitors is that the inactivation mechanism that drives potency will often lead to a selectivity profile that is “orthogonal” to those readily achieved using only non-covalent binding interactions—a profile that is both pharmacologically advantageous and difficult to achieve using non-covalent inhibition.
  • Many reversible inhibitors of proteins are presently known, as are many of their binding sites in the proteins to which the reversible inhibitors bind. The binding sites of these reversible inhibitors are sometimes populated with amino acids that are capable of covalent modification with suitably reactive ligands. In other instances, amino acids are located near the binding sites of reversible inhibitors that are capable of covalent modification with suitably reactive ligands. Amino acids capable of covalent modification are typically those which have a heteroatom such as O, S, or N in the side chain, such as threonine, cysteine, histidine, serine, tyrosine, and lysine. Sulfur is amenable to covalent modification due to the nucleophilicty of sulfur, and as such there are examples of ligands that modify cysteine in proteins of interest. However, amino acids such as lysine are usually sufficiently unreactive that ligands do not react in vivo with lysine. In fact, highly reactive indiscriminate reagents are usually employed for lysine modification. And, as such, ligand-directed modification of lysine has heretofore remained unrealized. For this reason and others, there is a need for irreversible inhibitors of proteins of medicinal interest, which inhibitors exert their biological influence through a ligand-directed modification of lysine.
    • I. SUMMARY OF INVENTION
  • In one aspect, the invention provides a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a target protein. The method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked within, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, (b) identifying a lysine residue of the target protein in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site that is less than about 15 Å from the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, (c) producing at least a structural model of at least one ligand-warhead compound docked within, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein the ligand-warhead compound comprises the reversible ligand in step (b) or a portion thereof, a warhead comprising a reactive chemical moiety, and optionally a Tether, and (d) identifying a ligand-warhead compound whose structural model allows the lysine residue in step (b) to readily assume a conformation that brings the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue within bond-forming proximity of the warhead electrophile.
  • In another aspect, the invention provides a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a lysine residue of a target protein. The method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site; (b) identifying a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the target protein that is adjacent to the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site; (c) producing structural models of a plurality of ligand-warhead compounds docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein each ligand-warhead compound comprises a warhead covalently attached to a substitutable position of the reversible ligand in step (b) the warhead comprising a reactive chemical moiety and optionally a linker; (d) identifying among the structural models in step (c) at least one ligand-warhead compound whose structural model allows the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue in step (b) to be within bonding distance of the warhead electrophile; and (e) further identifying among the structural models identified in step (d) a hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue in, or in the proximity to, the ligand-binding site, wherein the hydrogen-bond donor amino acid residue is within hydrogen-bonding distance of the warhead.
  • In another aspect, the invention provides a method for identifying at least one lysine residue within at least one protein that can be modified covalently. The method comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) docking a reversible ligand in, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site in the structural model, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site, thereby creating a structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site; and (d) identifying in the structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site one or more lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the identified protein which is less than about 15 Å from the reversible ligand.
  • In yet another aspect, the invention provides a method of covalently modifying a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site of a protein, comprising contacting a compound of Formula I:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00001
  • wherein Scaffold, Tether, Warhead, x and y are as defined herein;
  • with the protein containing a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the protein and forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue and the Warhead of the compound.
  • In another aspect, the invention provides compounds of Formula I:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00002
  • wherein Scaffold, Warhead, Tether, x and y are as defined herein.
  • In a further aspect, the invention provides protein-modifier-ligand conjugates of Formula XIII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00003
  • wherein Scaffold, Polypeptide, Tether, M, Y1, x and y are as defined herein.
  • In yet another aspect of the disclosure, a method for selecting a warhead that binds to a target lysine within a ligand binding site of a protein is disclosed. The method comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) identifying the locations of at least one lysine in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of step (a); (d) providing at least one warhead in proximity to the at least one identified lysine; (e) aligning the electrophilic atom of the warhead within bonding distance of the primary amine of the at least one identified lysine; (f) forming a covalent bond between the electrophilic atom of the warhead and the primary amine of the at least one lysine; (g) docking a reversible ligand in the identified protein's ligand-binding site within 15 Å of the covalently attached warhead of step (f), wherein the reversible ligand maintains most of its known noncovalent interactions with the ligand binding site; (h) aligning the closest atom of the ligand with the covalently bound warhead of step (f) and determining the geometric requirements for a Tether between the ligand and the covalently bound warhead of step (f).
    • II. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • FIG. 1 shows the X-ray co-crystal structure (2JK7) with key lysines in XIAP proximal to bound Smac-mimetic ligand.
  • FIG. 2 depicts non-limiting examples of weaponizing the Smac-mimetic ligand.
  • FIG. 3 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XVI-26 contacted with HCV NS3 Protease.
  • FIG. 4 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XVI-26 treated with HCV NS3 Protease (WT); HCV NS3 Protease (C159S); and HCV NS3 protease (C159S/K136A).
  • FIG. 5 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of compound XVI-1 treated with HCV NS3 Protease (WT1b).
  • FIG. 6 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of compound VII-1 contacted with XIAP.
  • FIG. 7 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of chymotrypsin digestion of XIAP (top) and XIAP contacted with compound VII-1 (bottom).
  • FIG. 8 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of compound VII-21 contacted with XIAP.
  • FIG. 9 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of chymotrypsin digestion of XIAP (top) and XIAP contacted with compound VII-21 (bottom).
  • FIG. 10 depicts that the probe compound XVI-27 modifies NS3/4A C159S.
  • FIG. 11 depicts the prolonged duration of action of XVI-26.
  • FIG. 12 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XI-27 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 13 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of the trypsin digestion of PDPK-1 (whole protein) contacted with Compound XI-27 identifying the peptide 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1).
  • FIG. 14 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) modified by XI-27 from the digest depicted in FIG. 13 and identifying K169 as the lysine modified by XI-27.
  • FIG. 15 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XI-21 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 16 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of the trypsin digestion of PDPK-1 (whole protein) contacted with Compound XI-21 identifying three peptides 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1), 173KIGSFDETCTR183 (SEQ ID NO.:2), and 84FGKILGEGSFSTVVLAR100 (SEQ ID NO.:3).
  • FIG. 17 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) from the digest depicted in FIG. 16 and identifying K169 as the lysine modified by XI-21.
  • FIG. 18 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 173KIGSFDETCTR183 (SEQ ID NO.:2) from the digest depicted in FIG. 16 and identifying K173 as the lysine modified by XI-21.
  • FIG. 19 depicts the MSMS analysis of the peptide 84FGKILGEGSFSTVVLAR100 (SEQ ID NO.:3) from the digest depicted in FIG. 16 and identifying K86 as the lysine modified by XI-21.
  • FIG. 20 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XXXVI-2 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 21 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XXXVI-1 contacted with PDPK-1 (whole protein).
  • FIG. 22 depicts the mass spectrometric analysis of Compound XXII-33 contacted with PI3Kγ (whole protein).
    •  III. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF INVENTION A. Definitions
  • Compounds of this invention include those described generally above, and are further illustrated by the classes, subclasses, and species disclosed herein. As used herein, the following definitions shall apply unless otherwise indicated. For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry are described in “Organic Chemistry,” Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito: 1999, and “March's Advanced Organic Chemistry,” 5th Ed., Ed.: Smith, M. B. and March, J., John Wiley & Sons, New York: 2001, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference. The biochemical definitions can be found in Structure and Mechanism in Protein Science: A Guide to Enzyme Catalysis and Protein Folding, Alan Fersht, W. H. Freeman, 1998, 1st Edition; Enzymatic Reaction Mechanisms, Perry A. Frey and Adrian D. Hegeman, Perry A. Frey (Author), Oxford University Press, 2007, 1st Edition; and Biochemistry, 6th Edition, Jeremy M. Berg, W. H. Freeman, 2007; the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
  • As used herein the term “protein” means linear polymers made up of the 20 different naturally occurring L-α-amino acids, as well as other less common amino acids. The amino acids in a polymer are joined together by peptide bonds between the carboxyl and amino groups of adjacent amino acid residues. The term polypeptide can be used interchangeably herein with the term protein. Polypeptides can be full length proteins, as well as any portion of a protein. As used herein the terms protein and polypeptide are used to describe proteins containing ligand binding sites. Any protein or polypeptide contemplated herein will be large enough to fold and constitute a ligand binding site.
  • The term “aliphatic” or “aliphatic group,” as used herein, means a straight-chain (i.e., unbranched) or branched, substituted or unsubstituted hydrocarbon chain that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, or a monocyclic hydrocarbon or bicyclic hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic (also referred to herein as “carbocycle,” “carbocyclic,” “cycloaliphatic” or “cycloalkyl”), that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule. Unless otherwise specified, aliphatic groups contain 1-8 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-5 aliphatic carbon atoms. In other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-4 aliphatic carbon atoms. In still other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-3 aliphatic carbon atoms, and in yet other embodiments, aliphatic groups contain 1-2 aliphatic carbon atoms. In some embodiments, “carbocyclic” (or “cycloaliphatic” or “carbocycle” or “cycloalkyl”) refers to a monocyclic C3-C8 hydrocarbon that is completely saturated or that contains one or more units of unsaturation, but which is not aromatic, that has a single point of attachment to the rest of the molecule. Suitable aliphatic groups include, but are not limited to, linear or branched, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl groups and hybrids thereof such as (cycloalkyl)alkyl, (cycloalkenyl)alkyl or (cycloalkyl)alkenyl.
  • As used herein, the term “bridged bicyclic” refers to any bicyclic ring system, i.e., carbocyclic or heterocyclic, saturated or partially unsaturated, having at least one bridge. As defined by IUPAC, a “bridge” is an optionally substituted chain of atoms or an atom or a valence bond connecting two bridgeheads, where a “bridgehead” is any skeletal atom of the ring system which is bonded to three or more skeletal atoms (excluding hydrogen). In some embodiments, a bridged bicyclic group has 7- to 12-ring members and 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Such bridged bicyclic groups are well known in the art and include those groups set forth below where each group is attached to the rest of the molecule at any substitutable carbon or nitrogen atom. Unless otherwise specified, a bridged bicyclic group or the bridge is optionally substituted with one or more substituents as set forth for aliphatic groups. Additionally or alternatively, any substitutable nitrogen of a bridged bicyclic group is optionally substituted. Exemplary bridged bicyclics include:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00004
  • The term “lower alkyl” refers to a C1-4 straight or branched alkyl group. Exemplary lower alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, and tert-butyl.
  • The term “lower haloalkyl” refers to a C1-4 straight or branched alkyl group that is substituted with one or more halogen atoms.
  • The term “heteroatom” means one or more of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, phosphorus, or silicon (including, any oxidized form of nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, or silicon; the quaternized form of any basic nitrogen or; a substitutable nitrogen of a heterocyclic ring, for example N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl) or NR+ (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl)).
  • The term “unsaturated,” as used herein, means that a moiety has one or more units of unsaturation.
  • As used herein, the term “bivalent C1-8 (or C1-6) saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched, hydrocarbon chain,” refers to bivalent alkylene, alkenylene, and alkynylene chains that are straight or branched as defined herein.
  • The term “alkylene” refers to a bivalent alkyl group. An “alkylene chain” is a polymethylene group, i.e., —(CH2)n—, wherein n is a positive integer, preferably from 1 to 6, from 1 to 4, from 1 to 3, from 1 to 2, or from 2 to 3. A substituted alkylene chain is a polymethylene group in which one or more methylene hydrogen atoms are replaced with a substituent. Suitable substituents include those described below for a substituted aliphatic group.
  • The term “alkenylene” refers to a bivalent alkenyl group. A substituted alkenylene chain is a polymethylene group containing at least one double bond in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with a substituent. Suitable substituents include those described below for a substituted aliphatic group.
  • As used herein, the term “cyclopropylenyl” refers to a bivalent cyclopropyl group of the following structure:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00005
  • The term “halogen” means F, Cl, Br, or I.
  • The term “aryl” used alone or as part of a larger moiety as in “aralkyl,” “aralkoxy,” or “aryloxyalkyl,” refers to monocyclic or bicyclic ring systems having a total of five to fourteen ring members, wherein at least one ring in the system is aromatic and wherein each ring in the system contains 3 to 7 ring members. The term “aryl” may be used interchangeably with the term “aryl ring.” In certain embodiments of the present invention, “aryl” refers to an aromatic ring system which includes, but not limited to, phenyl, biphenyl, naphthyl, anthracyl and the like, which may bear one or more substituents. Also included within the scope of the term “aryl,” as it is used herein, is a group in which an aromatic ring is fused to one or more non-aromatic rings, such as indanyl, phthalimidyl, naphthimidyl, phenanthridinyl, or tetrahydronaphthyl, and the like.
  • The terms “heteroaryl” and “heteroar-,” used alone or as part of a larger moiety, e.g., “heteroaralkyl,” or “heteroaralkoxy,” refer to groups having 5 to 10 ring atoms, preferably 5, 6, or 9 ring atoms; having 6, 10, or 14 π electrons shared in a cyclic array; and having, in addition to carbon atoms, from one to five heteroatoms. The term “heteroatom” as used within this definition refers to nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, and includes any oxidized form of nitrogen or sulfur, and any quaternized form of a basic nitrogen. Heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, indolizinyl, purinyl, naphthyridinyl, and pteridinyl. The terms “heteroaryl” and “heteroar-,” as used herein, also include groups in which a heteroaromatic ring is fused to one or more aryl, cycloaliphatic, or heterocyclyl rings, where the radical or point of attachment is on the heteroaromatic ring. Nonlimiting examples include indolyl, isoindolyl, benzothienyl, benzofuranyl, dibenzofuranyl, indazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzthiazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and pyrido[2,3-b]-1,4-oxazin-3(4H)-one. A heteroaryl group may be mono- or bicyclic. The term “heteroaryl” may be used interchangeably with the terms “heteroaryl ring,” “heteroaryl group,” or “heteroaromatic,” any of which terms include rings that are optionally substituted. The term “heteroaralkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted by a heteroaryl, wherein the alkyl and heteroaryl portions independently are optionally substituted.
  • As used herein, the terms “heterocycle,” “heterocyclyl,” “heterocyclic radical,” and “heterocyclic ring” are used interchangeably and refer to a stable 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic heterocyclic moiety that is either saturated or partially unsaturated, and having, in addition to carbon atoms, one or more, preferably one to four, heteroatoms, as defined above. When used in reference to a ring atom of a heterocycle, the term “nitrogen” includes a substituted nitrogen. As an example, in a saturated or partially unsaturated ring having 0-3 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen, the nitrogen may be N (as in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrrolyl), NH (as in pyrrolidinyl), or +NR (as in N-substituted pyrrolidinyl).
  • A heterocyclic ring can be attached to its pendant group at any heteroatom or carbon atom that results in a stable structure and any of the ring atoms can be optionally substituted. Examples of such saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic radicals include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperazinyl, dioxanyl, dioxolanyl, diazepinyl, oxazepinyl, thiazepinyl, morpholinyl, and quinuclidinyl. The terms “heterocycle,” “heterocyclyl,” “heterocyclyl ring,” “heterocyclic group,” “heterocyclic moiety,” and “heterocyclic radical,” are used interchangeably herein, and also include groups in which a heterocyclyl ring is fused to one or more aryl, heteroaryl, or cycloaliphatic rings, such as indolinyl, 3H-indolyl, chromanyl, phenanthridinyl, or tetrahydroquinolinyl, where the radical or point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring. A heterocyclyl group may be mono- or bicyclic. The term “heterocyclylalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted by a heterocyclyl, wherein the alkyl and heterocyclyl portions independently are optionally substituted.
  • As used herein, the term “partially unsaturated” refers to a ring moiety that includes at least one double or triple bond. The term “partially unsaturated” is intended to encompass rings having multiple sites of unsaturation, but is not intended to include aryl or heteroaryl moieties, as herein defined.
  • As described herein, compounds of the invention may contain “optionally substituted” moieties. In general, the term “substituted,” whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that one or more hydrogens of the designated moiety are replaced with a suitable substituent. Unless otherwise indicated, an “optionally substituted” group may have a suitable substituent at each substitutable position of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure may be substituted with more than one substituent selected from a specified group, the substituent may be either the same or different at every position. Combinations of substituents envisioned by this invention are preferably those that result in the formation of stable or chemically feasible compounds. The term “stable,” as used herein, refers to compounds that are not substantially altered when subjected to conditions to allow for their production, detection, and, in certain embodiments, their recovery, purification, and use for one or more of the purposes disclosed herein.
  • Suitable monovalent substituents on a substitutable carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group are independently halogen; —(CH2)0-4Ro; —(CH2)0-4ORo; —O(CH2)0-4Ro, —O—(CH2)0-4C(O)ORo; —(CH2)0-4CH(ORo)2; —(CH2)0-4SRo; —(CH2)0-4Ph, which may be substituted with Ro; —(CH2)0-4O(CH2)0-1Ph which may be substituted with Ro; —CH═CHPh, which may be substituted with Ro; —(CH2)0-4O(CH2)0-1-pyridyl which may be substituted with Ro; —NO2; —CN; —N3; —(CH2)0-4N(Ro)2; —(CH2)0-4N(Ro)C(O)Ro; —N(Ro)C(S)Ro; —(CH2)0-4N(Ro)C(O)NRo 2; —N(Ro)C(S)NRo 2; —(CH2)0-4N(Ro)C(O)ORo; —N(Ro)N(Ro)C(O)Ro; —N(Ro)N(Ro)C(O)NRo 2; —N(Ro)N(Ro)C(O)ORo; —(CH2)0-4C(O)Ro; —C(S)Ro; —(CH2)0-4C(O)ORo; —(CH2)0-4C(O)SRo; —(CH2)0-4C(O)OSiRo 3; —(CH2)0-4OC(O)Ro; —OC(O)(CH2)0-4SR—, SC(S)SRo; —(CH2)0-4SC(O)Ro; —(CH2)0-4C(O)NRo 2; —C(S)NRo 2; —C(S)SRo; —SC(S)SRo, —(CH2)0-4OC(O)NRo 2; —C(O)N(ORo)Ro; —C(O)C(O)Ro; —C(O)CH2C(O)Ro; —C(NORo)Ro; —(CH2)0-4SSRo; —(CH2)0-4S(O)2Ro; —(CH2)0-4S(O)2ORo; —(CH2)0-4OS(O)2Ro; —S(O)2NRo 2; —(CH2)0-4S(O)Ro; —N(Ro)S(O)2NRo 2; —N(Ro)S(O)2Ro; —N(ORo)Ro; —C(NH)NRo 2; —P(O)2Ro; —P(O)Ro 2; —OP(O)Ro 2; —OP(O)(ORo)2; SiRo 3; —(C1-4 straight or branched)alkylene)O—N(Ro)2; or —(C1-4 straight or branched alkylene)C(O)O)—N(Ro)2, wherein each Ro may be substituted as defined below and is independently hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic, —CH2Ph, —O(CH2)0-1Ph, —CH2-(5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring), or a 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of Ro, taken together with their intervening atom(s), form a 3- to 12-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, which may be substituted as defined below.
  • Suitable monovalent substituents on Ro (or the ring formed by taking two independent occurrences of Ro together with their intervening atoms), are independently halogen, —(CH2)0-2R•, -(haloR•), —(CH2)0-2OR•, —(CH2)0-2OR•, —(CH2)0-2CH(OR•)2; —O(haloR•), —CN, —N3, —(CH2)0-2C(O)R•, —(CH2)0-2C(O)OH, —(CH2)0-2C(O)OR•, —(CH2)0-2SR•, —(CH2)0-2SH, —(CH2)0-2NH2, —(CH2)0-2NHR•, —(CH2)0-2NR• 2, —NO2, —SiR• 3, —OSiR• 3, —C(O)SR•, —(C1-4 straight or branched alkylene)C(O)OR•, or —SSR• wherein each R• is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently selected from C1-4 aliphatic, —CH2Ph, —O(CH2)0-1Ph, or a 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of Ro include ═O and ═S.
  • Suitable divalent substituents on a saturated carbon atom of an “optionally substituted” group include the following: ═O (“oxo”), ═S, ═NNR*2, ═NNHC(O)R*, ═NNHC(O)OR*, ═NNHS(O)2R*, ═NR*, ═NOR*, —O(C(R*2))2-3O—, or —S(C(R*2))2-3S—, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Suitable divalent substituents that are bound to vicinal substitutable carbons of an “optionally substituted” group include: —O(CR*2)2-3O—, wherein each independent occurrence of R* is selected from hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, or an unsubstituted 5-6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R• include halogen, —R•, -(haloR•), —OH, —OR•, —O(haloR•), —CN, —C(O)OH, —C(O)OR•, —NH2, —NHR•, —NR• 2, or —NO2, wherein each R• is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C1-4 aliphatic, —CH2Ph, —O(CH2)0-1Ph, or a 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on a substitutable nitrogen of an “optionally substituted” group include —R†, —C(O)R† 2, —C(O)R†, —C(O)C(O)R†, —C(O)CH2C(O)R†, —S(O)2R†, —S(O)2NR† 2, —C(S)NR† 2, —C(NH)NR† 2, or —N(R†)S(O)2R†; wherein each R† is independently hydrogen, C1-6 aliphatic which may be substituted as defined below, unsubstituted —OPh, or an unsubstituted 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or, notwithstanding the definition above, two independent occurrences of R†, taken together with their intervening atom(s) form an unsubstituted 3- to 12-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl mono- or bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Suitable substituents on the aliphatic group of R• are independently halogen, —R•, -(haloR•), —OH, —OR•, —O(haloR•), —CN, —C(O)OH, —C(O)OR•, —NH2, —NHR•, —NR• 2, or —NO2, wherein each R• is unsubstituted or where preceded by “halo” is substituted only with one or more halogens, and is independently C1-4 aliphatic, —CH2Ph, —O(CH2)0-1Ph, or a 5- to 6-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aryl ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge et al., describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 66, 1-19 (1977), incorporated herein by reference. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like.
  • Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium and N+(C1-4alkyl)4 salts. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, loweralkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.
  • Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include all isomeric (e.g., enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational)) forms of the structure; for example, the R and S configurations for each asymmetric center, Z and E double bond isomers, and Z and E conformational isomers. Therefore, single stereochemical isomers as well as enantiomeric, diastereomeric, and geometric (or conformational) mixtures of the present compounds are within the scope of the invention. Unless otherwise stated, all tautomeric forms of the compounds of the invention are within the scope of the invention. Additionally, unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant to include compounds that differ only in the presence of one or more isotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the present structures including the replacement of hydrogen by deuterium or tritium, or the replacement of a carbon by a 13C- or 14C-enriched carbon are within the scope of this invention. Such compounds are useful, for example, as analytical tools, as probes in biological assays, or as therapeutic agents in accordance with the present invention.
  • As used herein, the term “irreversible” or “irreversible inhibitor” refers to an inhibitor (i.e., a compound) that is able to covalently binds to an enzyme, or portion thereof in a substantially non-reversible manner. That is, whereas a reversible inhibitor is able to bind to (but is generally unable to form a covalent bond with) an enzyme, and therefore can become dissociated from the enzyme an irreversible inhibitor will remain substantially bound to an enzyme once covalent bond formation has occurred. Irreversible inhibitors usually display time dependency, whereby the degree of inhibition increases with the length of time with which the inhibitor is in contact with the enzyme. In certain embodiments, an irreversible inhibitor will remain substantially bound to an enzyme once covalent bond formation has occurred and will remain bound for a time period that is longer than the life of the enzyme.
  • Methods for identifying if a compound is acting as an irreversible inhibitor are known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, enzyme kinetic analysis of the inhibition profile of the compound with the enzyme, the use of mass spectrometry of the protein drug target modified in the presence of the inhibitor compound, discontinuous exposure, also known as “washout,” experiments, and the use of labeling, such as radiolabelled inhibitor, to show covalent modification of the enzyme, as well as other methods known to one of skill in the art.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that certain reactive functional groups can act as “warheads.” As used herein, the term “warhead” or “warhead group” refers to a functional group present on a compound of the present invention wherein that functional group is capable of covalently binding to lysine, present in or near the binding pocket of a target protein, thereby irreversibly inhibiting the protein. It will be appreciated that in some embodiments the Tether-Warhead group, as defined and described herein, provides such warhead groups for covalently, and irreversibly, inhibiting the protein.
  • As used herein, the term “inhibitor” is defined as a compound that binds to and/or inhibits an enzyme with measurable affinity. In certain embodiments, an inhibitor has an IC50 and/or binding constant of less about 10 μM, less than about 1 μM, less than about 100 nM, or less than about 10 nM.
  • The terms “measurable affinity” and “measurably inhibit,” as used herein, means a measurable change in any lysing-containing protein, such as, e.g., XIAP, PI3Kβ/γ, PDPK1 and HCV-NS3 protease activity between a sample comprising a compound of the present invention, or composition thereof, and at least one of XIAP, PI3Kβ/γ, PDPK1 and HCV-NS3 protease, and an equivalent sample comprising at least one of XIAP, PI3Kβ/γ, PDPK1 and HCV-NS3 protease, in the absence of said compound, or composition thereof.
  • The disclosure of U.S. application Ser. No. 12/554,433, filed Sep. 4, 2009, entitled “Design Algorithm”, is hereby incorporated by reference into the subject application in its entirety. As described therein, the incorporated application describes design methods and algorithms for the modification of one or more cysteine residues in a protein target, which design methods and algorithms are equally applicable to the modification of one or more lysine residues in a protein target. Any structural and computational modeling, as well as the software used to generate that modeling described therein, are equally useful in the instant design of covalent inhibitors of lysine and, accordingly are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties into this application.
    • B. Protein Families Containing Targetable Lysine Residues
  • In general, lysine residues located in, or in proximity to, a ligand binding site in any targeted family of proteins can be targeted for ligand-directed lysine modification. For example, lysine residues of protein family members targeted for ligand-directed modification by irreversible inhibitors include, without limitation, those summarized in Table 1, below, where “Family” column refers to a family of proteins of interest; the “UniProtAC” column refers to the accession number identifier of a particular protein in accordance with UniProt Knowledgebase (UniProtKB) accession numbers (www.uniprot.org); the “Sequence” column refers to an identifying fragment of the Family member protein's amino acid sequence which includes the lysine of interest; and the “Residue Number” column refers to the lysine residue number as set forth in the sequence. However, antibodies, as a family of proteins, are not contemplated within the present invention and therefore are excluded. (See e.g., Carlos F. Barbas, III, et al., Science 278, 2085-2092 (1997); Popkov et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA, 106, 4378-4383, (2009); Doppalapudi et al., Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 17, 501-506, (2007); Li et al., J. Med. Chem., 47, 5630-5640, (2004); Guo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 103, 11009-11014, (2006); Rader et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA, 100, 5396-5400, (2003).
  • 1. TABLE OF PROTEIN FAMILIES
    UniProt Residue
    Family KB AC Protein Name Sequence Number
    BCL-2 Q9BXK5 Bcl-2-like protein 13 107-LGEKVSQ-113 K110
    (BCL2L13 aka** (SEQ ID NO.: 4)
    MIL1) 118-PLHKALQ-124 K121
    (SEQ ID NO.: 5)
    149-GWNKILV-155 K152
    (SEQ ID NO.: 6)
    Q16548 Bcl-2-related protein 043-SVQKEVE-049 K046
    A1 (BCL2A1 aka (SEQ ID NO.:7)
    BCL2L5 aka BFL1 aka 047-EVEKNLK-053 K050
    GRS aka HBPA1) (SEQ ID NO.: 8)
    074-VMEKEFE-080 K077
    (SEQ ID NO.: 9)
    144-FVKKEEP-150 K147
    (SEQ ID NO.: 10)
    Q9UMX3 Bcl-2-related ovarian 119-TWGKVVS-125 K122
    killer protein (BOK aka (SEQ ID NO.: 11)
    BCL2L9)
    Calpains P20807 Calpain-3 (CAPN3 aka 217-EALKGGN-223 K220
    CANP3 aka CANPL3 (SEQ ID NO.: 12)
    aka NCL1) 417-HFTKLEI-413 K410
    (SEQ ID NO.: 13)
    O15484 Calpain-5 (ITIH2 aka 230-ASIKAVT-236 K233
    IGHEP2) (SEQ ID NO.: 14)
    Q9Y6Q1 Calpain-6 (CAPN5 aka 078-LGHKPMV-084 K081
    NCL3) (SEQ ID NO.: 15)
    333-NFHKLNV-339 K336
    (SEQ ID NO.: 16)
    O14815 Calpain-9 (CAPN9 aka 185-EALKGGS-191 K188
    NCL4) (SEQ ID NO.: 17)
    327-HFDKVEI-333 K330
    (SEQ ID NO.: 18)
    Caspases P42575 Caspase-2 (CASP2 aka 378-RNTKRGS-384 K381
    ICH1 aka NEDD2) (SEQ ID NO.: 19)
    P42574 Caspase-3 (CASP3 aka 207-RNSKDGS-213 K210
    CPP32) (SEQ ID NO.: 20)
    P55212 Caspase-6 (CASP6 aka 262-DFCKDPS-268 K265
    MCH2) (SEQ ID NO.: 21)
    Q14790 Caspase-8 (CASP8 aka 250-KVPKLHS-256 K253
    MCH5) (SEQ ID NO.: 22)
    450-VSNKDDK-456 K453
    (SEQ ID NO.: 23)
    453-KDDKKNM-459 K456
    (SEQ ID NO.: 24)
    454-DDKKNMG-460 K457
    (SEQ ID NO.: 25)
    P55211 Caspase-9 (CASP9 aka 355-RDPKSGS-361 K358
    MCH6) (SEQ ID NO.: 26)
    391-VSVKGIY-397 K394
    (SEQ ID NO.: 27)
    Q92851 Caspase-10 (CASP10 295-TSLKDRQ-301 K298
    aka MCH4) (SEQ ID NO.: 28)
    P31944 Caspase-14 (CASP14) 093-GFLKGED-099 K096
    (SEQ ID NO.:29)
    Q9UDY8 Mucosa-associated 355-EHPKLKA-361 K358
    lymphoid tissue (SEQ ID NO.: 30)
    lymphoma 357-PKLKAPL-363 K360
    translocation protein 1 (SEQ ID NO.: 31)
    (MALT1 aka MLT) 463-MCRKRND-469 K466
    (SEQ ID NO.: 32)
    510-IFMKFLK-516 K513
    (SEQ ID NO.: 33)
    Cathepsins Q9UBX1 Cathepsin F (CTSF) 325-DCDKMDK-331 K328
    (SEQ ID NO.: 34)
    328-KMDKACM-334 K331
    (SEQ ID NO.: 35)
    371-EKAKVYI-377 K374
    (SEQ ID NO.: 36)
    P09668 Cathepsin H (CTSH 275-TPDKVNH-281 K278
    aka CPSB) (SEQ ID NO.: 37)
    P56202 Cathepsin W (CTSW) 264-INMKPLQ-270 K267
    (SEQ ID NO.: 38)
    HCV P26663 Genome polyprotein 1233-GSGKSTK-1239 K12361
    (NS3 Protease) (SEQ ID NO.: 39)
    P26663 Genome polyprotein 2013-RGYKGVW-2019 K2016
    (NSSA aka p56) (SEQ ID NO.: 40)
    P26663 Genome polyprotein 2557-IMAKNEV-2563 K2560
    (NS5B aka RNA- (SEQ ID NO.: 41)
    directed RNA
    polymerase aka p68)
    HDAC Q13547 Histone deacetylase 1 028-HPMKPHR-034 K031
    (HDAC1 aka RPD3L1) (SEQ ID NO.: 42)
    Q96DB2 Histone deacetylase 11 303-GYQKRTA-309 K306
    (HDAC11) (SEQ ID NO.: 43)
    Q92769 Histone deacetylase 2 029-HPMKPHR-035 K032
    (HDAC2) (SEQ ID NO.: 44)
    O15379 Histone deacetylase 3 022-HPMKPHR-028 K025
    (HDAC3) (SEQ ID NO.: 45)
    Q9UBN7 Histone deacetylase 6 350-GDPKGEM-356 K353
    (HDAC6) (SEQ ID NO.: 46)
    Q9BY41 Histone deacetylase 8 030-SLAKIPK-036 K033
    (HDAC8 aka (SEQ ID NO.:47)
    HDACL1)
    HSP70 P17066 Heat shock 70 kDa 055-DAAKSQA-061 K058
    protein 6 (HSPA6 aka (SEQ ID NO.: 48)
    HSP70B′ 070-FDAKRLI-076 K073
    (SEQ ID NO.: 49)
    270-ERAKRTL-276 K273
    (SEQ ID NO.: 50)
    P11142 Heat shock cognate 71 058-DAAKNQV-064 K061
    kDa protein (HSPA8 (SEQ ID NO.: 51)
    aka HSC70 aka HSP73 068-FDAKRLI-074 K071
    aka HSPA10) (SEQ ID NO.:52)
    268-ERAKRTL-274 K271
    (SEQ ID NO.: 53)
    HSP90 P07900 Heat shock protein 055-ALDKIRY-061 K058
    HSP 90-alpha (SEQ ID NO.:54)
    (HSP90AA1 aka
    HSP90A aka HSPC1
    aka HSPCA)
    P08238 Heat shock protein 050-ALDKIRY-056 K053
    HSP 90-beta (SEQ ID NO.: 55)
    (HSP90AB1 aka
    HSP90B aka HSPC2
    aka HSPCB)
    IAP Q13075 Baculoviral IAP 188-FTGKQDT-194 K191
    repeat-containing (SEQ ID NO.: 56)
    protein 1 (NAIP aka 216-EHAKWFP-222 K199
    BIRC1) (SEQ ID NO.: 57)
    Q13490 Baculoviral IAP 302-DDVKCFC-308 K305
    repeat-containing (SEQ ID NO.: 58)
    protein 2 (BIRC2 aka
    C-IAP1 aka API1 aka
    IAP2 aka MIHB)
    Q13489 Baculoviral IAP 288-DDVKCFC-294 K291
    repeat-containing (SEQ ID NO.: 59)
    protein 3 (BIRC3 aka
    C-IAP2 aka API2 aka
    IAP1 aka MIHC)
    P98170 Baculoviral IAP 294-EGDKVKC-300 K297
    repeat-containing (SEQ ID NO.: 60)
    protein 4 (XIAP aka 296-DKCKCFH-302 K299
    ILP1 aka HILP aka (SEQ ID NO.: 61)
    API3 aka BIRC4 aka 308-TDWKPSE-314 K311
    IAP3) (SEQ ID NO.: 62)
    O15392 Baculoviral IAP 059-FCFKELE-065 K062
    repeat-containing (SEQ ID NO.: 63)
    protein 5 (BIRC5 aka 076-EKHKKSS-082 K079
    Survivin aka API4 aka (SEQ ID NO.: 64)
    IAP4)
    Q6R308 Baculoviral IAP 118-HQDKVRC-124 K121
    repeat-containing (SEQ ID NO.: 65)
    protein 7 (BIRC7 aka 132-QSWKRGD-138 K135
    ML-IAP aka livin aka (SEQ ID NO.: 66)
    K-IAP) 143-EHAKWPF-149 K146
    (SEQ ID NO.: 67)
    Q96P09 Baculoviral IAP 033-QEDKVQC-039 K036
    repeat-containing (SEQ ID NO.: 68)
    protein 8 (BIRC8 aka 047-ANWKPKE-053 K050
    ILP2 aka TsIAP) (SEQ ID NO.: 69)
    058-QHAKWYP-064 K061
    (SEQ ID NO.: 70)
    Kinase P15056 B-Raf proto-oncogene 480-VAVKMLN-486 K483
    serine/threonine- (SEQ ID NO.: 71)
    protein kinase (BRAF
    aka BRAF1 aka
    RAFB1)
    O96017 Serine/threonine- 221-IMSKTLG-227 K224
    protein kinase Chk2 (SEQ ID NO.: 72)
    (CHEK2 aka CHK2 242-TCKKVAI-248 K245
    aka RAD53) (SEQ ID NO.:73)
    249-VAIKISK-256 K252
    (SEQ ID NO.:74)
    346-RDLKPEN-352 K349
    (SEQ ID NO.: 75)
    P00533 Epidermal growth 713-KKIKVLG-719 K716
    factor receptor (EGFR (SEQ ID NO.: 76)
    aka ERBB1) 725-TVYKGLW-731 K728
    (SEQ ID NO.: 77)
    742-VAIKELR-748 K745
    (SEQ ID NO.: 78)
    P08581 Hepatocyte growth 1107-CAVKSLN-1113 K1110
    factor receptor (MET (SEQ ID NO.: 79)
    aka c-MET) 1158-PYMKHGD-1164 K1161
    (SEQ ID NO.: 80)
    O15530 3-phosphoinositide- 083-KFGKILG-089 K086
    dependent protein (SEQ ID NO.: 81)
    kinase 1 (PDPK1 aka 160-SYAKNGE-166 K163
    PDK-1) (SEQ ID NO.: 82)
    166-ELLKYIR-172 K169
    (SEQ ID NO.: 83)
    170-YIRKIGS-176 K173
    (SEQ ID NO.: 84)
    204-RDLKPEN-210 K207
    (SEQ ID NO.: 85)
    P11309 Proto-oncogene 257-RDIKDEN-263 K260
    serine/threonine- (SEQ ID NO.: 86)
    protein kinase Pim-1
    (PIM1)
    P11362 Basic fibroblast growth 511-VAVKMLK-517 K514
    factor receptor 1 (SEQ ID NO.: 87)
    (FGFR1) 563-YASKGNL-569 K566
    (SEQ ID NO.: 88)
    P21802 Fibroblast growth 514-VAVKMLK-520 K517
    factor receptor 2 (SEQ ID NO.: 89)
    (FGFR2) 566-YASKGNL-572 K569
    (SEQ ID NO.: 90)
    P22607 Fibroblast growth 557-YAAKGNL-563 K560
    factor receptor 3 (SEQ ID NO.: 91)
    (FGFR3) 505-VAVKMLK-511 K508
    (SEQ ID NO.: 92)
    P22455 Fibroblast growth 500-VAVKMLK-506 K503
    factor receptor 4 (SEQ ID NO.: 93)
    (FGFR4) 552-CAAKGNL-558 K555
    (SEQ ID NO.: 94)
    P15056 Serine/threonine- 470-TVYKGKW-476 K473
    protein kinase B-raf (b- (SEQ ID NO.: 95)
    RAF)
    P04049 RAF proto-oncogene 362-TVYKGKW-368 K365
    serine/threonine- (SEQ ID NO.:96)
    protein kinase (RAF1 372-VAVKILK-378 K375
    aka c-RAF) (SEQ ID NO.: 97)
    428-SLYKHLH-434 K431
    (SEQ ID NO.: 98)
    P43405 Tyrosine-protein kinase 372-LEDKELG-378 K375
    SYK (SEQ ID NO.: 99)
    384-TVKKGYY-390 K387
    (SEQ ID NO.: 100)
    455-PLNKYLQ-461 K458
    (SEQ ID NO.: 101)
    MDM2 Q00987 E3 ubiquitin-protein 048-YTMKEVL-064 K051
    ligase Mdm2 (MDM2) (SEQ ID NO.: 102)
    091-FSVKEHR-097 K094
    (SEQ ID NO.: 103)
    O15151 Protein Mdm4 (MDM4 047-FTVKEVM-053 K050
    aka MDMX) (SEQ ID NO.: 104)
    090-FSVKDPS-096 K093
    (SEQ ID NO.: 105)
    Q96GM5 SWI/SNF-related 324-KTHKLQD-330 K327
    matrix-associated (SEQ ID NO.: 106)
    actin-dependent
    regulator of chromatin
    subfamily D member 1
    (SMARCD1 aka
    BAF60A)
    Q92925 SWI/SNF-related 298-IPMKLAG-304 K301
    matrix-associated (SEQ ID NO.: 107)
    actin-dependent
    regulator of chromatin
    subfamily D member 2
    (SMARCD2 aka
    BAF60B)
    Q6STE5 SWI/SNF-related 299-SHDKEYI-305 K302
    matrix-associated (SEQ ID NO.: 108)
    actin-dependent
    regulator of chromatin
    subfamily D member 3
    (SMARCD3 aka
    BAF60C)
    MMP P39900 Macrophage 230-SDPKAVM-236 P233
    metalloelastase (SEQ ID NO.: 109)
    (MMP12 aka HME) 238-PTYKYVD-244 P241
    (SEQ ID NO.: 110)
    P45452 Collagenase 3 147-AFKKAFK-153 K150
    (MMP13) (SEQ ID NO.: 111)
    246-YTGKSHF-252 K249
    (SEQ ID NO.: 112)
    P50281 Matrix 143-AIRKAFR-149 K146
    metalloproteinase-14 (SEQ ID NO.: 113)
    (MMP14 aka MMP-X1)
    P51511 Matrix 281-YQWKDVD-287 K284
    metalloproteinase-15 (SEQ ID NO.: 114)
    (MMP15 aka SMCP-2)
    O60882 Matrix 248-YKYKNPY-254 K251
    metalloproteinase-20 (SEQ ID NO.: 115)
    (MMP20)
    NHR P03372 Estrogen receptor 526-YSMKCKN-532 K529
    (ESR1 aka ESR aka (SEQ ID NO.: 116)
    NR3A1)
    Q92731 Estrogen receptor beta 311-SWAKKIP-317 K314
    (ESR2 aka ESTRB aka (SEQ ID NO.: 117)
    NR3A2)
    Q07869 Peroxisome 249-MAEKTLV-264 K252
    proliferator-activated (SEQ ID NO.: 118)
    receptor alpha (PPARA 355-MEPKFDF-361 K358
    aka NR1C1 aka PPAR) (SEQ ID NO.: 119)
    P06401 Progesterone receptor 916-QLPKILA-922 K919
    (PGR aka NR3C3) (SEQ ID NO.: 120)
    PI3K P42336 Phosphatidylinositol- 773-SSAKRPL-779 K776
    4,5-bisphosphate 3- (SEQ ID NO.: 121)
    kinase catalytic subunit 799-IIFKNGD-805 K802
    alpha isoform (PI3K- (SEQ ID NO.: 122)
    alpha aka PIK3CA)
    P42338 Phosphatidylinositol- 774-EKCKYMD-780 K777
    4,5-bisphosphate 3- (SEQ ID NO.: 123)
    kinase catalytic subunit 802-VIFKNGD-808 K805
    beta isoform (PI3K- (SEQ ID NO.:124)
    beta aka PIK3CB aka
    PIK3C1)
    P48736 Phosphatidylinositol- 799-EKCKVMA-805 K802
    4,5-bisphosphate 3- (SEQ ID NO.:125)
    kinase catalytic subunit 804-MASKKKP-810 K807
    gamma isoform (PI3K (SEQ ID NO.: 126)
    gamma aka PIK3CG) 830-IIFKHGD-836 K833
    (SEQ ID NO.: 127)
    880-EIVKDAT-886 K883
    (SEQ ID NO.: 128)
    887-TIAKIQQ-893 K890
    (SEQ ID NO.: 129)
    Phospha- P08575 Leukocyte common 620-DDEKQLM-626 K623
    tase antigen (PTPRC aka (SEQ ID NO.: 130)
    CD45) 756-NRNKCAE-762 K759
    (SEQ ID NO.: 131)
    P18031 Tyrosine-protein 117-GSLKCAQ-123 K120
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 132)
    receptor type 1 (PTPN1
    aka PTP1B)
    Q06124 Tyrosine-protein 257-QECKLLY-263 K260
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 133)
    receptor type 11 277-NRYKNIL-283 K280
    (PTPN11 aka PTP2C (SEQ ID NO.: 134)
    aka SHPTP2) 361-ERGKSKC-367 K364
    (SEQ ID NO.: 135)
    363-GKSKCVK-369 K366
    (SEQ ID NO.: 136)
    Q12923 Tyrosine-protein 2221-QELKPLD-2227 K2224
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 137)
    receptor type 13 2241-NRYKNIL-2247 K2244
    (PTPN13 aka PNP1 (SEQ ID NO.: 138)
    aka PTP1E aka PTPL1) 2313-EGEKIKC-2319 K2316
    (SEQ ID NO.: 139)
    2315-EKIKCQR-2321 K2318
    (SEQ ID NO.: 140)
    Q15678 Tyrosine-protein 1015-GRTKSHR-1021 K1018
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 141)
    receptor type 14 915-QIPKKKA-921 K918
    (PTPN14 aka PEZ) (SEQ ID NO.: 142)
    916-IPKKKAN-922 K919
    (SEQ ID NO.: 143)
    Q99952 Tyrosine-protein 038-AAWKADG-044 K041
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 144)
    receptor type 18 060-NRYKDVL-066 K063
    (PTPN18 aka BDP1) (SEQ ID NO.: 145)
    P17706 Tyrosine-protein 035-RVAKFPE-041 K038
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 146)
    receptor type 2 (PTPN2
    aka PTPT)
    Q9Y2R2 Tyrosine-protein 029-LKLKRQS-035 K032
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 147)
    receptor type 22 036-TKYKADK-042 K039
    (PTPN22 aka PTPN8) (SEQ ID NO.: 148)
    133-EMGKKKC-139 K136
    (SEQ ID NO.: 149)
    135-GKKKCER-141 K138
    (SEQ ID NO.: 150)
    P26045 Tyrosine-protein 653-LYRKKPG-659 K656
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 151)
    receptor type 3 (PTPN3 663-TFAKLPQ-669 K666
    aka PTPH1) (SEQ ID NO.: 152)
    674-NRYKDVL-680 K677
    (SEQ ID NO.: 153)
    750-GRTKCHQ-756 K753
    (SEQ ID NO.: 154)
    P29074 Tyrosine-protein 662-LYRKKPG-668 L665
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 155)
    receptor type 4 (PTPN4 759-GRVKCHQ-765 K762
    aka MEG) (SEQ ID NO.: 156)
    P54829 Tyrosine-protein 326-NRYKTIL-332 K329
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 157)
    receptor type 5 404-MNEKCTE-410 K407
    (PTPN5) (SEQ ID NO.: 158)
    P29350 Tyrosine-protein 274-NRYKNIL-2280 K277
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 159)
    receptor type 6 (PTPN6
    aka HCP aka PTP1C)
    P35236 Tyrosine-protein 123-DRYKTIL-129 K126
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 160)
    receptor type 7
    (PTPN7)
    P43378 Tyrosine-protein 408-GRRKCGQ-414 K411
    phosphatase non- (SEQ ID NO.: 161)
    receptor type 9
    (PTPN9)
    P23467 Receptor-type tyrosine- 1808-GRVKCDH-1814 K1811
    protein phosphatase (SEQ ID NO.: 162)
    beta (PTPRB aka
    PTPB)
    Transthy- P02766 Transthyretin 032-LMVKVLD-038 K035
    retin (Prealbumin aka TBPA (SEQ ID NO.: 163)
    aka TTR aka ATTR
    aka PALB)
    PARP P09874 Poly [ADP-ribose] 900-MVSKSAN-906 K903
    polymerase 1 (PARP1 (SEQ ID NO.: 164)
    aka ADPRT aka PPOL
    aka ADPRT)
    Q9Y6F1 Poly [ADP-ribose] 418-ENSKSAG-424 K421
    polymerase 3 (PARP3 (SEQ ID NO.: 165)
    aka ADPRT3 aka
    ADPRTL3 aka IRT1)
    Q53GL7 Poly [ADP ribose] 938-DGHKAVF-944 K941
    polymerase 10 (SEQ ID NO.: 166)
    (PARP10)
    Q9H0J9 Poly [ADP-ribose] 606-HYSKSDT-612 K609
    polymerase 12 (SEQ ID NO.: 167)
    (PARP12 aka
    ZC3HDC1)
    Q460N3 Poly [ADP-ribose] 563-SYGKGTY-569 k566
    polymerase 15 (SEQ ID NO.: 168)
    (PARP15 aka BAL3) 576-YSAKDTY-582 K579
    (SEQ ID NO.: 169)
    633-RSPKLFV-639 K636
    (SEQ ID NO.: 170)
    O95271 Tankyrase-1 (TNKS 1217-NSSKSNQ-1223 K1220
    aka PARPSA, PARPL (SEQ ID NO.: 171)
    aka TIN1 aka TINF1 1264-STIKMAH-1270 K1269
    aka TNKS1) (SEQ ID NO.: 172)
    HIV P03369 Gag-Pol polyprotein 532-WKPKMIG-538 K535
    Protease (HIV protease aka (SEQ ID NO.: 173)
    Retropepsin aka PR)
    1In Protein Databank (PDB; www.pdb.org): alternatively numbered as K136.
  • In some embodiments, the family of proteins having targetable lysine residues according to the present invention is BCL-2. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Calpains. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Caspases. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Cathepsins. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is HCV. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is HDAC. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is HSP70. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is HSP90. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is IAP. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Kinase. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is MDM2. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is MMP. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is NHR. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is PI3K. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Phosphatase. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is Transthyretin. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is PARP. In other embodiments, the family of proteins is HIV Protease.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the BCL-2 family of proteins comprise Bcl-2-like protein 13, Bcl-2-related protein A1, and Bcl-2-related ovarian killer protein. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K110, K121, and K152 in Bcl-2-like protein 13; K046, K050, K077, and K147 in Bcl-2-related protein A1; and K122 in Bcl-2-related ovarian killer protein.
  • In other embodiments, the members of the Calpains family of proteins comprise Calpain-3, Calpain-5, Calpain-6, and Calpain-9. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K220, and K410 in Calpain 3; K233 in Calpain-5; K081 and K336 in Calpain-6; and K188 and K330 in Calpain-9.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the Caspases family of proteins comprises Caspase-2, Caspase-3, Caspase-6, Caspase-8, Caspase-9, Caspase-10, Caspase-14, and Mucosa-associated lymphoid tissue lymphoma translocation protein 1. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K381 in Caspase-2; K210 in Caspase-3; K265 in Caspase-6; K253, K453, K456, and K457 in Caspase-8; K358 and K394 in Caspase-9; K298 in Caspase-10; K096 in Caspase-14, and K358, K360, K466, and K513 in Mucosa-associated lymphoid tissue lymphoma translocation protein 1.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the Cathepsin family of proteins comprise Cathepsin F, Cathepsin H, and Cathepsin W. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K238, K331, and K374 in Cathepsin F; K278 in Cathepsin H; and K267 in Cathepsin W.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the HCV family of proteins comprises Genome polyprotein (NS3), Genome polyprotein (NS5A), and Genome polyprotein (NS5B). In these embodiments, the target lysines are K1236 in Genome polyprotein (NS3); K2016 in Genome polyprotein (NS5A); and K2560 in Genome polyprotein (NS5B).
  • In some embodiments, the members of the HCV family of proteins comprises HCV-NS3, HCV-NS5A, and HCV-NS5B.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the HDAC family of proteins comprise Histone deacetylase 1, Histone deacetylase 11, Histone deacetylase 2, Histone deacetylase 3, Histone deacetylase 6, and Histone deacetylase 8. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K031 in Histone deacetylase 1; K306 in Histone deacetylase 11; K032 in Histone deacetylase 2; K025 in Histone deacetylase 3; K353 in Histone deacetylase 6; and K033 in Histone deacetylase 8.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the HSP70 family of proteins comprise Heat shock 70 kDa protein 6, and Heat shock cognate 71 kDa protein. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K058, K073, and K273 in Heat shock 70 kDa protein 6; and K061, K071, and K271 in Heat shock cognate 71 kDa protein.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the HSP90 family of proteins comprise Heat shock protein HSP 90-alpha, and Heat shock protein HSP 90-beta. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K058 in Heat shock protein HSP 90-alpha; and K053 in Heat shock protein HSP 90-beta.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the IAP family of proteins comprise Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1 (NAIP aka BIRC1), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 2 (BIRC2 aka C-IAP1 aka API1 aka IAP2 aka MIHB), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 3 (BIRC3 aka C-IAP2 aka API2 aka IAP1 aka MIHC), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4 (XIAP aka ILP1 aka HILP aka API3 aka BIRC4 aka IAP3), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 5 (BIRC5 aka Survivin aka API4 aka IAP4), Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 7 (BIRC7 aka ML-IAP aka livin aka K-IAP), and Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 8 (BIRC8 aka ILP2 aka TsIAP). In these embodiments, the target lysines are K191 and K199 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1; K305 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 2; K291 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 3; K297, K299, and K311 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4; K062 and K079 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 5; K121, K135, and K146 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 7; and K036, K050, and K061 in Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 8.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the IAP family of proteins comprises XIAP, cIAP1, cIAP2, and ML-IAP.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the Kinases family of proteins comprise B-Raf proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase, Serine/threonine-protein kinase Chk2, Epidermal growth factor receptor, Hepatocyte growth factor receptor, 3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1 (PDPK1), Proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase Pim-1. Basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 (FGFR1), Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 (FGFR2), Fibroblast growth factor receptor 3 (FGFR3), Fibroblast growth factor receptor 4 (FGFR4), 3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1 (PDPK1), Serine/threonine-protein kinase B-raf (b-RAF), RAF proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase (RAF1 aka c-RAF), and Tyrosine-protein kinase SYK. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K483 in B-Raf proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase; K224, K245, K252, and K349 in Serine/threonine-protein kinase Chk2; K716, K728, and K745 in Epidermal growth factor receptor; K1110 and K1161 in Hepatocyte growth factor receptor; K086, K163, K169, and K207 in PDPK1; K260 in Proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase Pim-1; K514, K566 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 1 (FGFR1), K517, K569 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 (FGFR2); K560, K508 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 3 (FGFR3); K503, K555 in basic fibroblast growth factor receptor 4 (FGFR4); K173 in 3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1 (PDPK1); K473 in Serine/threonine-protein kinase B-raf (b-RAF); K365 in RAF proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase (RAF1 aka c-RAF); K375 and K431 in RAF proto-oncogene serine/threonine-protein kinase (RAF1 aka c-RAF); and K375, K387, and K458 in Tyrosine-protein kinase SYK.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the PDK family of proteins comprises PDPK1.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the MDM2 family of proteins comprise E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase Mdm2, Protein Mdm4, SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 1, SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 2, and SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 3. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K051 and K094 in E3 ubiquitin-protein ligase Mdm2; K050 and K093 in Protein Mdm4; K327 in SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 1; K301 in SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 2; and K302 in SWI/SNF-related matrix-associated actin-dependent regulator of chromatin subfamily D member 3.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the MMP family of proteins comprise Macrophage metalloelastase, Collagenase 3, Matrix metalloproteinase-14, Matrix metalloproteinase-15, and Matrix metalloproteinase-20. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K233 and K241 in Macrophage metalloelastase; K150 and K249 in Collagenase 3; K146 in Matrix metalloproteinase-14; K284 in Matrix metalloproteinase-15; and K251 in Matrix metalloproteinase-20.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the NHR family of proteins comprise Estrogen receptor, Estrogen receptor beta, Peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor alpha, and Progesterone receptor. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K529 in Estrogen receptor; K314 in Estrogen receptor beta; K252 and K358 in Peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor alpha; and K919 in Progesterone receptor.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the PI3K protein family comprise Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit alpha isoform (PI3K-alpha aka PIK3CA), Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit beta isoform (PI3K-beta aka PIK3CB aka PIK3C1), and Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform (PI3K gamma aka PIK3CG). In these embodiments, the target lysines are K776 and K802 in Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit alpha isoform; K777 and K805 in Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit beta isoform; and K802, K807, K833, K883, and K890 in Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the PI3K family of proteins comprises PI3Kα, PI3Kβ and PI3Kγ. The term PI3K, as used herein, refers to PI3Kβ and PI3Kγ interchangeably as the ligand-directed warhead of the present invention, directed to PI3K will modify both PI3Kβ as well as PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the Phosphatase family of proteins comprise Leukocyte common antigen, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 1, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 11, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 13, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 14, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 18, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 2, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 22, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 3, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 4, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 5, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 6, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 7, Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 9, and Receptor-type tyrosine-protein phosphatase beta. In these embodiments, the target lysines are K623 and K759 in Leukocyte common antigen; K120 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 1; K260, K280, K364, K366 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 11; K2224, K2244, K2316, and K2318 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 13; K918, K919, and K1018 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 14; K041 and K063 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 18; K038 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 2; K032, K039, K136, and K138 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 22, K656, K666, K677, and K753 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 3; K665 and K762 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 4; K329 and K407 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 5; K277 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 6; K126 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 7; K411 in Tyrosine-protein phosphatase non-receptor type 9; and K1811 in Receptor-type tyrosine-protein phosphatase beta.
  • In some embodiments, the member of the Transthyretin family of proteins comprises Transthyretin (Prealbumin aka TBPA aka TTR aka ATTR aka PALB). In these embodiments, the target lysine is K035 in Transthyretin.
  • In some embodiments, the members of the PARP family of proteins comprise Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 1 (PARP1 aka ADPRT aka PPOL aka ADPRT), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 3 (PARP3 aka ADPRT3 aka ADPRTL3 aka IRT1), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 10 (PARP10), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 12 (PARP12 aka ZC3HDC1), Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 15 (PARP15 aka BAL3), and Tankyrase-1 (TNKS aka PARPSA, PARPL aka TIN1 aka TINF1 aka TNKS1). In these embodiments, the target lysines are K903 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 1; K421 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 3; K941 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 10; K609 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 12; K566, K579 and K636 in Poly [ADP-ribose] polymerase 15; and K1220 and K1269 in Tankyrase-1.
  • In some embodiments, the member of the HIV Protease family of proteins comprises Gag-Pol polyprotein (HIV protease aka Retropepsin aka PR). In these embodiments, the target lysine is K535 in Gag-Pol polyprotein.
    • IV. METHODS FOR DESIGNING A LIGAND THAT COVALENTLY BINDS A TARGET PROTEIN
  • One aspect of the present disclosure is a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a target protein. The method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked within, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, (b) identifying a lysine residue of the target protein in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site that is less than about 15A from the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, (c) producing at least a structural model of at least one ligand-warhead compound docked within, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein the ligand-warhead compound comprises the reversible ligand in step (b) or a portion thereof, a warhead comprising a reactive chemical moiety, and optionally a Tether, and (d) identifying a ligand-warhead compound whose structural model allows the lysine residue in step (b) to readily assume a conformation that brings the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue within bond-forming proximity of the warhead electrophile.
  • A non-limiting example of steps (a) and (b) of the method described above is depicted in FIG. 1. FIG. 1 shows X-ray co-crystal structure (2JK7) showing key lysines in XIAP proximal to bound Smac-mimetic ligand. Review of the space occupied by Smac-mimetic ligand in relation to protein XIAP, allowed lysines 299 and 297 to be identified that were about 5.2 Å and 4.5 Å, respectively, from portions of the Smac-mimetic ligand. FIG. 2 depicts non-limiting lysine-targeted warheads installed on scaffolds such that they are directed toward the targeted lysines positioned strategically at portions of compounds based on the pharmacophore of the Smac-mimetic ligand which are in proximity to the identified lysines, above. The reactive warheads (along with a Tether when required) are positioned in silico such that docking of a modified pharmacophore of the ligand in the structural model of the protein binding site (provided in step (a) above), as described in step (c) above, allows for determination of the spatial arrangement of the reactive warhead vis a vis the identified lysine of step (b).
  • The disclosure of U.S. application Ser. No. 12/554,433, filed Sep. 4, 2009, entitled “Design Algorithm”, is hereby incorporated by reference into the subject application in its entirety. As described therein, the incorporated application describes design methods and algorithms for the modification of one or more cysteine residues in a protein target, which design methods and algorithms are equally applicable to the modification of one or more lysine residues in a protein target. Any structural and computational modeling, as well as the software used to generate that modeling described therein, are equally useful in the instant design of covalent inhibitors of lysine and, accordingly are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties into this application.
  • In certain embodiments, the method further comprises step (e): forming, for the ligand-warhead compound identified in step (d), a ligand-protein, covalent adduct by forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue identified in step (b) and the warhead electrophile in ligand-warhead compound identified in step (d) while maintaining the binding elements of the pharmacophore required for non-covalent binding to the ligand's target protein.
  • In some embodiments, the method further comprises step (f): evaluating the conformation of the resulting ligand-protein covalent adduct formed in step (e) by analyzing the global energy of the resulting conformation, or by analyzing the energy of the conformation of the Tether. In other embodiments, the method comprises alternate step (f): determining whether the ligand-binding site is occluded when the covalent bond is formed between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site and the warhead electrophile.
  • In other embodiments, the method comprising steps (a)-(f) is iterated with changes to the Tether and the global energy of the resulting conformation is less than the previous iteration.
  • In certain embodiments, the covalent bond formed in step (e) is formed using a computational method in which the warhead and the side chain of the lysine residue are flexible and the remainder of the structures of the ligand-warhead compound and the ligand-binding site are fixed.
  • In some embodiments, in step (b) of the method, each of the lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the target protein, which is less than about 15 Å from the reversible ligand, when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, is identified.
  • In other embodiments, step (c) of the method further comprises providing a plurality of models of the ligand-warhead compound, wherein the warhead is bonded to a different substitutable position of the ligand or a portion of the ligand in each model of the ligand-warhead compound, optionally with the Tether in between the warhead and the substitutable position.
  • In certain embodiments of the method disclosed, the target protein, is an identified member of an identified protein family and the lysine residue is not conserved across the identified members of the protein family.
  • In other embodiments of the method, the target protein is an identified member of an identified protein family and the lysine residue is conserved among more than one identified member of the identified protein family.
  • In some embodiments, the lysine residue is conserved across identified members of the protein family.
  • In some embodiments of the method disclosed herein, the target protein has catalytic activity.
  • In other embodiments, the target protein family is selected from the group consisting of BCL-2, Calpains, Caspases, Cathepsins, HCV, HDAC, HSP70, HSP90, IAP, Kinase, MDM2, MMP, NHR, PI3Kβ/γ, Phosphatase, Transthyretin, PARP, and HIV Protease.
  • In some embodiments, the target family of proteins is selected from the group consisting of IAP, PI3K, PDPK1, and HCV.
  • In other embodiments, the target protein is selected from the group consisting of XIAP, PI3Kβ/γ, PDPK1, and HCV.
  • In certain embodiments of the method disclosed, the ligand-binding site is a ligand-binding site for a substrate or cofactor.
  • In other embodiments of the methods, the lysine residue for covalent modification is not a catalytic residue.
  • In another aspect, the disclosure provides a method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a lysine residue of a target protein. The method comprises (a) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site, (b) identifying a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the target protein that is adjacent to the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, (c) producing one or more structural models of a plurality of ligand-warhead compounds docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein each ligand-warhead compound comprises a warhead covalently attached to a substitutable position of the reversible ligand in step, (b) the warhead comprising a reactive chemical moiety and optionally a linker; (d) identifying among the structural models in step (c) at least one ligand-warhead compound whose structural model allows the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue in step (b) to be within bonding distance of the warhead electrophile, and (e) further identifying among the structural models identified in step (d) a hydrogen-bond-donor-containing amino acid residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, wherein the hydrogen-bond donor group is within hydrogen-bonding distance of the warhead.
  • In some embodiments, the hydrogen-bond donor amino acid can participate in the chemical reaction between the warhead of the ligand-warhead and the targeted lysine of the protein. For example, when the hydrogen bond donating amino acid is either lysine or arginine, the interaction between lysine and lysine or lysine and arginine are repulsive interactions that lower the pKa of the targeted lysine, thus enhancing its nucleophilicity. In other examples, hydrogen bond donation, either by a sidechain, or even a mainchain amide can, in many cases, enhance the electrophilicity of a warhead. When such a hydrogen bond donor is also positively charged, Coulombic attraction can accelerate the reaction, for example, by stabilizing the formation of an enolate. In a specific embodiment, when the warhead of the ligand-warhead comprises an acrylamide, the warhead requires a hydrogen bond donor amino acid residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, wherein the hydrogen-bond donor group is within hydrogen-bonding distance of the warhead comprising acrylamide.
  • In certain embodiments, the method further comprises step (f) forming, for the ligand-warhead compound identified in step (e), a ligand-protein covalent adduct by forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue identified in step (b) and the warhead electrophile; and also forming a hydrogen bond between the hydrogen-bond donor moiety and the warhead electrophile; or a hydrogen bond between the hydrogen-bond donor moiety and the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue identified in step (d) while substantially maintaining the non-covalent interactions between the pharmacophore of the ligand and the ligand-binding site.
  • In certain embodiments of the method of designing a ligand, the method further comprises step (g) evaluating a resulting conformation of the ligand-protein covalent adduct by analyzing the global energy of the resulting conformation.
  • In some embodiments of the method, steps (a) through (g) are iterated with changes to the linker and the global energy of the resulting conformation is less than the previous iteration.
  • In other embodiments of the method, the hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue is any amino acid residue that is capable of acting as a hydrogen bond donor. In yet other embodiments of the method, the hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue is selected from the group consisting of arginine, lysine, threonine, serine, histidine, and tyrosine.
  • In certain embodiments of the method, the target protein is selected from the group consisting of XIAP, PDPK1, PI3Kβ/γ, and HCV. In other embodiments, when the warhead comprises an acrylamide moiety, the warhead requires a hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, wherein the hydrogen-bond donor group is within hydrogen-bonding distance of the warhead comprising acrylamide to facilitate the warhead covalently binding to the target lysine. In some embodiments, the hydrogen-bond donor-containing amino acid residue is lysine.
  • In yet another aspect, a method for identifying at least one lysine residue within at least one protein that can be modified covalently is disclosed. The method comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) docking a reversible ligand in, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site in the structural model, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent contact with the ligand-binding site, thereby creating a structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site; and (d) identifying in the structural model of the reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, an identified protein's ligand-binding site one or more lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the identified protein which is less than about 15 Å from the reversible ligand.
  • In certain embodiments, the method further comprises identifying a plurality of proteins having ligand-binding sites that are structurally homologous. Herein, the method further comprises (a) providing a three-dimensional structural model for at least one of the identified proteins, (b) docking a reversible ligand in, or in proximity to, the structural model of the ligand-binding site of at least one of the identified proteins, wherein the reversible ligand makes at least one non-covalent interaction with the ligand-binding site, thereby creating a structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site; and (c) identifying in the structural model of a reversible ligand bound to, or in proximity to, the identified protein's ligand-binding site one or more lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the identified protein which is less than about 15 Å from the reversible ligand.
  • In some embodiments of the method, the method comprises comparing the three-dimensionally equivalent amino acid positions of the homologous ligand-binding sites of more than one of the plurality of identified proteins and determining the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins.
  • In other embodiments of the method, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in only one of the identified proteins.
  • In certain embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins are in more than one of the identified proteins.
  • In some of these embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins, is in less than 10% of the identified proteins of a family at the ligand binding site position. In other embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in less than or greater than 50% of the identified proteins. More than 50%, in some embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in more than 75% of the identified proteins, while in other embodiments, the prevalence of lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand binding sites of the identified proteins is in all of the identified proteins.
  • In certain embodiments of the method, the protein is selected from the group consisting of BCL-2, Calpains, Caspases, Cathepsins, HCV, HDAC, HSP70, HSP90, IAP, Kinase, MDM2, MMP, NHR, PI3Kβ/γ, Phosphatase, Transthyretin, PARP, and HIV Protease.
  • In other embodiments, the protein is selected from the group consisting of XIAP, PI3Kβ/γ, PDPK1, and HCV.
    • V. METHODS FOR DESIGNING WARHEADS THAT BIND TO A TARGET LYSINE WITHIN A LIGAND BINDING SITE OF A PROTEIN
  • In yet another aspect of the disclosure, a method for selecting a warhead that binds to a target lysine within a ligand binding site of a protein is disclosed. The method comprises (a) identifying at least one protein having a ligand-binding site, (b) providing a three-dimensional structural model for the identified protein, (c) identifying the location of at least one lysine in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of step (a); (d) providing at least one warhead in proximity to the at least one identified lysine; (e) aligning the electrophilic atom of the warhead within bonding distance of the primary amine of the at least one identified lysine; (f) forming a covalent bond between the electrophilic atom of the warhead and the primary amine of the at least one lysine; (g) docking a reversible ligand in the identified protein's ligand-binding site within 15 Å of the covalently attached warhead of step (f), wherein the reversible ligand maintains noncovalent interactions with the ligand binding site; and (h) aligning the closest atom of the ligand with the covalently bound warhead of step (f) and providing the spatial requirements necessary for designing a tether between the ligand and the covalently bound warhead of step (f). In step (h), it is advantageous when the area between the tether and the ligand is complementary with the protein surface in the region between the warhead and the ligand.
    • VI. METHODS OF COVALENTLY MODIFYING LYSINE
  • In another aspect, the method comprises contacting a compound of Formula I with a protein containing a lysine residue in, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site of a protein and forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue and Warhead of the compound. The method encompasses compounds of Formula I:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00006
  • wherein
  • Scaffold is
      • a) a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a ligand capable of binding to, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site; or
      • b) a portion of a pharmacophore of a ligand resulting from truncation of the pharmacophore, such that the Scaffold is capable of binding to, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site;
  • Warhead is an organic moiety optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from O, N, and S, and has a molecular weight of about 14 daltons to about 200 daltons, the Warhead is capable of reacting with a side chain primary amine group of a lysine residue and attaches to the Scaffold through the Tether;
  • Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C1-C15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —C(═S)—, or C(═NR1)—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C1-C15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00007
  • x is 0, 1, or 2;
  • y is 1, 2, or 3; and
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula I′,
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00008
  • It is to be understood that naturally occurring compounds that exert their biological effects through an inherent ability to covalently modify lysine are not contemplated or claimed in this disclosure, nor are synthetically modified analogues of the same, where the inherent lysine covalent modifying mechanism has not been substantially altered. Furthermore, compounds which are based primarily on single amino acids, nucleoside/nucleotide derived drugs, anhydrides, compounds comprising an yne-one, are also not contemplated in the present invention. Further, compounds that are mechanism-based irreversible inhibitors, i.e. suicide inhibitors, such as, for example Vigabatrin, or carbaglucose-6-phosphate (pseudo-DL-glucose, C-6-P) are not contemplated in the present invention. (See Structure and Mechanism in Protein Science: A Guide to Enzyme Catalysis and Protein Folding, Alan Fersht, W. H. Freeman, 1998, 1st Edition; Enzymatic Reaction Mechanisms, Perry A. Frey and Adrian D. Hegeman, Perry A. Frey (Author), Oxford University Press, 2007, 1st Edition, for a definition of the term mechanism-based irreversible inhibitors.) Antibodies, as a family of proteins, are not contemplated within the present invention and therefore are excluded. (See e.g., Carlos F. Barbas, III, et al., Science 278, 2085-2092 (1997); Popkov et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA, 106, 4378-4383, (2009); Doppalapudi et al., Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 17, 501-506, (2007); Li et al., J. Med. Chem., 47, 5630-5640, (2004); Guo et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 103, 11009-11014, (2006); Rader et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA, 100, 5396-5400, (2003).
  • For example, the natural product wortmannin is known to covalently modify lysine in the protein phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase (PI3K). Thus, wortmannin is a naturally occurring compound known to covalently modify lysine and exert its biological effects through its inherent ability to covalently bind to lysine. Known analogues of wortmannin that covalently modify lysine through substantially the same mechanism as wortmannin, are also excluded from the present invention. Examples of such wortmannin analogues include, without limitation:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00009
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00010
  • Another example of a naturally occurring compound that is believed to covalently modify lysine and is not encompassed within the present invention is Liphagal:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00011
  • Other compounds not encompassed within the present invention are the following compounds disclosed in Choi et al., Nature Chemical Biology, advance online publication, December 20, (2009):
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00012
  • Additional compounds not encompassed within the present invention are the following compounds disclosed in Lawate et al., J. Med. Chem. 33, 2319, (1990):
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00013
  • Other compound not encompassed within the present invention is the following compound disclosed in Nango et al., J. Org. Chem. 69, 593-600, (2004):
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00014
  • Compounds based primarily on amino acids such as tyrosine derived DpaTyr-Ni (II) complex that binds to FLAG (Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, 19, 6696, (2009) and Vigabatrin (also known as 4-aminohex-5-enoate or vinylGABA (Daniela De Biase, D., et al., J. Biol. Chem., 266, 20056, 1991)) are also not contemplated in the present invention.
  • Nucleoside/nucleotide derived drugs, such as, for example, those disclosed in Statsuk, A. V., et al., JACS, 130, 17568, (2008) and Guillerm, G., et al., J. Med. Chem., 49, 1223, (2006), and the like, are also not contemplated in the present invention.
  • Another example of a natural product and analogues thereof that are not encompassed in the present invention is manolide and its analogues which are believed to covalently modify lysine, such as manoalogue (Reynolds, L. J., et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1988, 110, 5172-5177):
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00015
  • A further example of a compound and analogues thereof that are not encompassed in the present invention is neratinib (aka HKI-272) which covalently modify lysine in intact proteins (Wang, J., et al., Drug Metabolism and Disposition, 2010, 38, 1083-1093):
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00016
  • Another example of a natural product and analogues thereof that are not encompassed in the present invention is azaphilone and its analogues which are believed to covalently modify lysine. Non limiting illustrative examples of azaphilone cores are described below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00017
  • In certain embodiments, the Warhead of Formula I is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00018
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00019
  • wherein
  • each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
  • each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
  • each X9 is independently
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00020
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00021
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
  • wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
  • A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
  • n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
  • In some embodiments, at least one of R2 and R3 of the compounds of Formula I-b and I-c is hydrogen.
  • In other embodiments, the compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-e, I-j, I-k, or I-l is a compound of Formula II-a, II-b, II-c, II-d, II-e, II-f, II-g, II-h, II-j, II-k, II-l, II-m, II-n, II-o, II-p, II-q, II-r, II-s, II-t, II-u, II-v, II-w, II-x, II-y, II-z, II-aa, II-bb, II-cc, II-dd, II-ee, II-ff, II-gg, II-hh, II-jj, II-kk, II-ll, II-mm, II-nn, II-oo, or II-pp:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00022
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00023
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00024
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00025
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00026
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00027
  • wherein
  • each m is independently an integer from 0-4;
  • each m5 is independently an integer from 0-3;
  • each m4 is independently an integer from 0-5;
  • each n2 is independently an integer from 0-2;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14, and R15 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl and R1 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, CF3, or nitro, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—, one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00028
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and,
  • optionally, when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14, and R15, when taken together, form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • In yet another embodiment, the compound of Formula I-d, or I-h is a compound of Formula III-a, III-b, III-h, or III-i:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00029
  • wherein
  • n3 is an integer from 0-2;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • each B1, B2, B4, and B5 is independently CR7 or N;
  • each B3 is NR7, O, or S;
  • each Rz1, Rz2, Rz3, Rz4, and Rz5 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, CF3, or nitro, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—, one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00030
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and,
  • optionally, when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formula I-h is a compound of Formula IV-a, IV-b, IV-c, IV-d, IV-e, IV-f, IV-g, IV-h, or IV-i:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00031
  • wherein
  • R1, R2, and R3 are as defined above for Formula I-h; and
  • any of the substitutable hydrogens on the nitrogen heterocycle of the compound can be substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, amido, acyl, acyloxy, oxoacyl, or halogen.
  • In other embodiments, the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula V-a, V-b, V-c, V-d, V-e, V-f, V-g, V-h, V-i, or V-j:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00032
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00033
  • wherein
  • m1 and m2 are each independently an integer from 0 to 2;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00034
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11, when taken together, form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • In some illustrative embodiments, the compounds of Formulae I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t are described below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00035
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00036
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00037
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00038
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00039
  • In the foregoing compounds aa-ooo, any substitutable hydrogen may be substituted with the substituents as those defined by R2-R8.
  • In certain embodiments, the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula VI-a, VI-b, VI-c, VI-d, VI-e, VI-f, VI-g, VI-h, VI-i, VI-j, VI-k, VI-l, VI-m, VI-n, VI-o, VI-p, VI-q, VI-r, VI-s, or VI-t:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00040
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00041
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00042
  • wherein, Rzz is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, —CH2OCH3, or —CH2CH2OCH3.
  • In some embodiments, Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C1-C15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, —C(═S)—, or C(═NR1)—; R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and optionally one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms; and optionally one or more methine groups of the C1-C15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00043
  • In certain embodiments, the Scaffold is selected from the group consisting of Formulas VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXII, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
    • VII. COMPOUNDS OF THE INVENTION
  • The present disclosure provides compounds capable of covalently binding to lysine residues of a protein thereby inhibiting the function of the protein. Described herein are compounds of the Formula I:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00044
  • and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof;
  • wherein Scaffold, Warhead, Tether, x, y are as defined above for Formula I, with the proviso that the compound of Formula I is not: wortmannin:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00045
  • known analogues of wortmannin that covalently modify lysine through substantially the same mechanism as wortmannin:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00046
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00047
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00048
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00049
  • azaphilone core analogues such as
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00050
  • and any mechanism-based irreversible inhibitors.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula I′,
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00051
  • wherein Scaffold, Warhead and Tether are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • In certain embodiments, the Warhead is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00052
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00053
  • wherein
  • each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
  • each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
  • each X9 is independently
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00054
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00055
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
  • wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
  • A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
  • n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
  • In some embodiments, at least one of R2 and R3 of the compounds of Formula I-b and I-c is hydrogen.
  • In other embodiments, the compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-e, I-j, I-k, or I-l is a compound of Formula II-a, II-b, II-c, II-d, II-e, II-f, II-g, II-h, II-j, II-k, II-l, II-m, II-II-o, II-p, II-q, II-r, II-s, II-t, II-u, II-v, II-w, II-x, II-y, II-z, II-aa, II-bb, II-cc, II-dd, II-ee, II-ff, II-gg, II-hh, II-jj, II-kk, II-ll, II-mm, II-nn, II-oo, or II-pp.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00056
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00057
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00058
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00059
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00060
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00061
  • wherein
  • each m is independently an integer from 0-4;
  • each m5 is independently an integer from 0-3;
  • each m4 is independently an integer from 0-5;
  • each n2 is independently an integer from 0-2;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14, and R15 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; R1 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, CF3, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00062
  • optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14, and R15 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl.
  • In yet another embodiment, the compound of Formula I-d or I-h is a compound of Formula III-a, III-b, III-h, or III-i:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00063
  • wherein
  • n3 is an integer from 0-2;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • each B1, B2, B4, and B5 is independently CR7 or N and each B3 is NRS, O, or S;
  • each Rz1, Rz2, Rz3, Rz4, and Rz5 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, CF3, or nitro;
  • one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00064
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formula I-h is a compound of Formula IV-a, IV-b, IV-c, IV-d, IV-e, IV-f, IV-h, or IV-i:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00065
  • wherein R2, R3 and R4 are defined above for Formula I-d or I-h; and the hydrogen on the nitrogen heterocycle of the compound of Formula IV-a, IV-b, and IV-c can be substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, amido, acyl, acyloxy, oxoacyl, and halogen.
  • In other embodiments, the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula V-a, V-b, V-c, V-d, V-e, V-f, V-g, V-h, V-i, or V-j:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00066
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00067
  • wherein
  • m1 and m2 are each independently an integer from 0 to 2;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00068
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11, when taken together, form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • In some illustrative embodiments, the compounds of Formulae I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t are described below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00069
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00070
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00071
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00072
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00073
  • In the foregoing compounds aa-ooo, any substitutable hydrogen may be substituted with the substituents as those defined by R2-R8.
  • In certain embodiments, the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula VI-a, VI-b, VI-c, VI-d, VI-e, VI-f, VI-g, VI-h, VI-i, VI-j, VI-k, VI-l, VI-m, VI-n, VI-o, VI-p, or VI-q:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00074
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00075
  • wherein
  • Rzz is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, —CH2OCH3, or —CH2CH2OCH3.
  • In some embodiments of the compound of Formula I, the Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C1-C15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, —C(═S)—, or C(═NR1)—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C1-C15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00076
  • and
    R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, the Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C1-C15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, —C(═S)—, or C(═NR1)—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C1-C15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00077
  • and
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, the Scaffold is selected from the group consisting of Formulas VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXII, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
    • A. IAP Protein Scaffolds
  • 1. Compounds of Formula I Based on Compounds of Formula VII
  • In some embodiments, the compounds of Formula I are described wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of one or more hydrogens of a compound of Formula VII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00078
  • wherein
  • V and W are each independently —(CR14R15)qX3(CR16R17)r—;
  • q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • X3 is —CR18R19—, or —NR20—;
  • Rx, Ry, R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, and R20 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, —C(═S)—, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl groups; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00079
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • Tether and Warhead are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula VII is a compound of Formula VII-a:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00080
  • wherein
  • V and W are each independently —(CR14R15)qX3(CR16R17)r—;
  • q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • X3 is —CR18R19—, or —NR20—;
  • p is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, and R20 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, —C(═S)—, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl groups; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00081
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and;
  • R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00082
  • and
  • optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
  • In other embodiments, the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula VII-b:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00083
  • wherein R12, R13, R21, R22, R23, V, W, p, are as defined above for Formula VII-a and T and Rwh are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formula VII-b is a compound of Formula VII-h:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00084
  • wherein T, Rwh, p, R12, R13, R23, and p are as described above for Formula VII-b.
  • In other embodiments, the compound of Formula VII-h is a compound of Formula VII-j, VII-k, VII-l, VII-m, VII-n, or VII-o:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00085
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00086
  • wherein, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 are as described above for embodiments of Formula I, and R12, R13, R23, and p are as described above for Formulas VII and VII-h.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula VII are as set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00087
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00088
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00089
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00090
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00091
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00092
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00093
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00094
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00095
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00096
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00097
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00098
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00099
  • 2. Compounds of Formula I Based on Compounds of Formula VIII
  • In other embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula VIII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00100
  • wherein
  • X4 is —CR33— or —N—;
  • p and s are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • R12, R13, R21, R22, R24, R25, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, and R33 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00101
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring; and
  • Tether and Warhead are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula VIII-a or VIII-b.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00102
  • wherein X4, p, s, R12, R13, R21, R22, R23, R24, R25, R26, R27, R28, R31, R32, are as defined above for Formula VIII, and T and Rwh are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula VIII are as set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00103
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00104
  • 3. Compounds of Formula I Based on Compounds of Formulas IX-a and IX-b
  • In other embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula IX-a or IX-b:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00105
  • wherein
  • X5 is —O—, —CR42R43— or —NR42—;
  • R12, R13, R27, R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, R33, R34, R35, R36, R37, R38, R39, R40, R41, R42, and R43 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00106
  • D, E, F, G, and H are each independently optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl;
  • wherein F and G are fused together to form a bicyclic optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; and
  • Tether and Warhead are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • In yet another embodiment, the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula IX-c or IX-d:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00107
  • wherein R12, R13, R31, F, G, and H are as defined above for Formulas IX-a and IX-b, and T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • 4. Compounds of Formula XVII
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I′ are described by compounds of the Formula XVII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00108
  • wherein T is Tether and Rwh is Warhead and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XVII are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00109
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00110
  • 5. Compounds of Formula XVIII
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of the Formula XVIII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00111
  • wherein T is Tether and Rwh is Warhead and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XVIII are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00112
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00113
  • 6. Compounds of Formula XIX
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XIX:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00114
  • wherein T is Tether and Rwh is Warhead and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XIX are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00115
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00116
  • 7. Compounds of Formula XX-a AND XX-b
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XX-a and Formula XX-b:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00117
  • wherein
  • R1000 is C(H) or N, wherein -T-Rwh can be attached to any carbon or the NH of the heteroaryl moiety of Formula XX-a and Formula XX-b; and
  • T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XX-a and Formula XX-b are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00118
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00119
  • 8. Compounds of Formula XXI-a, XXI-b, and XXI-c
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I′ are described by compounds of Formula XXI-a, Formula XXI-b, and Formula XXI-c:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00120
  • wherein T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXI-a, Formula XXI-b, and Formula XXI-c are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00121
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00122
    • B. PDPK1 Protein Scaffolds
  • 1. Compounds of Formula XI
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I′ are described by compounds of Formula XI:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00123
  • wherein
  • B6 and B7 are each independently CR7 or N;
  • R69 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro, or —NH(CO)NR78R79;
  • R70 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro;
  • R7, R71, R72, R73, R74, R75, R76, R77, R78, and R79 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00124
  • optionally R78, and R79 taken together form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;
  • p is an integer from 0 to 4, u is an integer from 1 to 4; and
  • T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • In other embodiments, the compound of Formula XI is a compound of Formula XI-a, XI-b, or XI-c.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00125
  • In yet another embodiment, the compound of Formula XI-a, XI-b or XI-c is a compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00126
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00127
  • wherein
  • R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R80, R81, R82, R83, R84, R85, R86, and R87 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl, wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—, R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl, and one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00128
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-k, XI-l, XI-m, XI-n, XI-o, XI-p, or XI-q.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00129
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00130
  • wherein R1-R8, R70, R88, and R89 are as defined above for Formula XI-a, XI-b or XI-c;
  • X6 is CH2, NH, O, or S; and
  • n5 is an integer from 0 to 3.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula XI-e or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-r, XI-s, XI-t, XI-u, XI-v, XI-w, or XI-x:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00131
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00132
  • wherein R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are as defined above for Formula XI-a, XI-b, and XI-c.
  • In other embodiments, the compound of Formula XI-e, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-y, XI-z, XI-aa, or XI-bb.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00133
  • wherein
  • R2-R9 are as defined above for Formula II-a above; and
  • X6 is as defined above for Formula XI-t above.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formula XI-h or XI-i is a compound of Formula XI-cc, XI-dd, XI-ee, or XI-ff.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00134
  • wherein R2-R7, R8, R9, are as defined above for Formula II-a.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds of the Formula XI are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00135
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00136
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00137
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00138
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00139
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00140
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00141
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00142
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00143
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00144
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00145
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00146
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00147
  • 2. Compounds of Formula XII
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00148
  • wherein T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I; and
  • R1 and R2 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00149
  • 3. Compounds of Formula XXXVI
  • In some embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described by compounds of Formula XXXVI:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00150
  • wherein
  • Rv is H, optionally substituted C1-C3 branched or straight chain alkyl, or optionally substituted C1-C3 branched or straight chain acyl; and
  • T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds of the Formula XXXVI are set forth below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00151
    • C. HCV Protease
  • 1. Compounds of Formula I Based on Compounds of Formula XVI-a, XVI-b, and XVI-c
  • In other embodiments, compounds of Formula I are described wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula XVI-a, XVI-b, or XVI-c:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00152
  • wherein
  • R90, R91, R92, R93, R94, R95, R96, R97, R98, R99, R100, R102, R104, R105, R106, R107, R108, R109, R110, R111, R112, R113, and R114 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
  • R103 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, or C2-C8 alkenyl;
  • one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00153
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
  • each R101 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C8 alkenyl, halogen, amino, nitro, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl;
  • n6 and n7 are each independently integer from 0 to 4; n8 is an integer from 0 to 2; and
  • Warhead is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-b, I-c, I-e, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-n, or I-o;
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00154
  • wherein
  • each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, or —NR6—;
  • each X9 is independently
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00155
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
  • one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00156
  • optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
  • A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl;
  • n is an integer from 2-4;
  • each n1 and n2 are independently an integer from 0-2;
  • n3 is an integer from 1-2;
  • n4 is an integer from 1-3;
  • T is Tether and is null, a bond, or a bivalent C1-C15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —C(═S)—, or C(═NR1)—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C1-C15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00157
  • and
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl.
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XVI-d, XVI-e, or XVI-f:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00158
  • wherein
  • R90, R101, R114, n6, n8, T and Rwh are as defined above for Formula XV-a; and
  • R103 is hydrogen or C2-C8 alkenyl.
  • In certain embodiments, the compound of Formulas XVI-d, XVI-e, or XVI-f is a compound of Formula XVI-g, XVI-h, or XVI-i:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00159
  • wherein, R2, R3, R4, R5, R101, R114 are as defined above for Formulas XVI-a.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula XVI-a, Formula XVI-b, and Formula XVI-c are as set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00160
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00161
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00162
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00163
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00164
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00165
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00166
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00167
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00168
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00169
    • D. PI3Kβ and PI3Kγ Protein Scaffolds
  • 1. Compounds of Formula XXII-a, Formula XXII-b, or Formula XXII-c
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXII-a, Formula XXII-b, or Formula XXII-c:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00170
  • wherein
  • n, m, p, and q for Formula XXII-a and Formula XXII-b are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3; provided that n and q are not 0 at the same time, and m and q are not 0 at the same time;
  • T and Rwh are as defined in embodiments of Formula I;
  • A2 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 4-8 membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5-10 membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic heterocyclic ring having at least one nitrogen, at least one oxygen, and optionally 1-2 additional heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • B′ is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or -T-Rwh; and
  • C2 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds for Formula XXII-a and Formula XXII-b are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00171
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00172
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00173
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00174
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00175
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00176
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00177
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00178
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00179
  • 2. Compounds of Formula XXIII
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXIII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00180
  • wherein:
  • Rwh is a warhead group and is as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • R201 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
  • R202 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, or (C1-6 alkylene)-R203; or
  • R201 and R202 are taken together with the intervening carbon to form an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered carbocyclic ring or a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • R203 is a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • Ring A6 is absent or an optionally substituted group selected from a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXIII are listed below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00181
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00182
  • 3. Compounds of Formula XXIV-a and XXIV-b
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXIV-a or XXIV-b:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00183
  • wherein
  • Rwh is a warhead group;
  • R204 is an hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, —(CH2)m-(3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring), —(CH2)m-(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring), —(CH2)m-(4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH2)m-(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH2)m-phenyl, —(CH2)m-(8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring), —(CH2)m-(5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), or —(CH2)m-(8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur);
  • each R205 and R206 is independently —R″, halogen, —NO2, —CN, —OR″, —SR″, —N(R″)2, —C(O)R″, —CO2R″, —C(O)C(O)R″, —C(O)CH2C(O)R″, —S(O)R″, —S(O)2R″, —C(O)N(R″)2, —SO2N(R″)2, —OC(O)R″, —N(R″)C(O)R″, —N(R″)N(R″)2, —N(R″)C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C═NOR″, —N(R″)C(O)N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2R″, or —OC(O)N(R″)2;
  • each R″ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • two R″ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • m is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive;
  • each n for Formula XXIV-a or Formula XXIV-b is independently 0, 1, or 2; and
  • Ring A5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • Non-limiting examples of compounds of Formula XXIV-a and XXIV-b are set forth below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00184
  • 4. Compounds of Formula XXV
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXV:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00185
  • wherein
  • Rwh is a warhead group
  • each R205 and R206 is independently —R″, halogen, —NO2, —CN, —OR″, —SR″, —N(R″)2, —C(O)R″, —CO2R″, —C(O)C(O)R″, —C(O)CH2C(O)R″, —S(O)R″, —S(O)2R″, —C(O)N(R″)2, —SO2N(R″)2, —OC(O)R″, —N(R″)C(O)R″, —N(R″)N(R″)2, —N(R″)C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C═NOR″, —N(R″)C(O)N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2R″, or —OC(O)N(R″)2;
  • each R″ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • optionally, two R″ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • m is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive;
  • each n is independently 0, 1, or 2; and
  • Ring A5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • In other nonlimiting illustrative embodiments, compounds of Formula XXV are shown below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00186
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00187
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00188
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00189
  • 5. Compounds of Formula XXVI
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXVI:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00190
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof;
    wherein:
  • Rwh is a warhead group and is as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • Ring A7 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 4- to 8-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5-10 membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic heterocyclic ring having at least one nitrogen, at least one oxygen, and optionally 1-2 additional heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • R207 is R′″, halogen, —OR″ —CN, —NO2, —SO2R′″, —SOR′″, —C(O)R′″, —CO2R′″, —C(O)N(R′″)2, —NRC(O)R′″, —NR′″C(O)N(R′″)2, —NRSO2R′″, or —N(R′″)2;
  • each R′″ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, aryl, a 4- to 7-membered heterocylic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5- to 6-membered monocyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or:
  • optionally two R′″ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 4- to 7-membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • Ring B7 is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • T7 is a covalent bond or a bivalent straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-6 hydrocarbon chain wherein one or more methylene units of T7 are optionally replaced by —O—, —S—, —C(O)—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)O—, —C(O)N(R′″)—, —N(R′″)C(O)—, —N(R′″)C(O)N(R′″)—, —SO2—, —SO2N(R′″)—, —N(R′″)SO2—, or —N(R′″)SO2N(R′″)—;
  • Ring C7 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 12-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • Ring D7 is absent or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 12-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic ring having 0-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXVI are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00191
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00192
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00193
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00194
  • 6. Compounds of Formula XXVII
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXVII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00195
  • or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof;
    wherein:
  • T and Rwh are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • R is H, alkyl, or alkoxy.
  • Nonlimiting examples of the compounds of the Formula XXVII are set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00196
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00197
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00198
  • 7. Compounds of Formula XXVIII
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXVIII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00199
  • and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof;
    wherein
  • T and Rwh and are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXVIII are set forth below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00200
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00201
  • 8. Compounds of Formula XXIX
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXIX:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00202
  • and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof;
    wherein
  • T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined as above for Formula I; and
  • A8 is an optionally substituted aryl, biaryl, or heteroaryl.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXIX are set forth below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00203
  • 9. Compounds of Formula XXXVII
  • In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I is a compound of Formula XXXVII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00204
  • and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof;
    wherein
  • T and Rwh are Tether and Warhead, respectively, and are as defined as above for Formula I.
  • Non-limiting examples of the compounds of Formula XXXVII are set forth below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00205
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00206
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that a variety of warhead groups, as defined herein, are suitable for covalent bonding to lysine. Such Rwh groups include, but are not limited to, those described herein and depicted in Formulas VI-a-VI-t, and aa-ooo, inclusive, supra. That these warheads are suitable for covalent bonding to the primary amine of a lysine residue was determined by performing mass spectrometric experiments using the protocol described in detail in Examples 50-54, 88, 163-164, and 174-175, infra, the results of which are depicted in FIGS. 3-9, and 12-22. These experiments show that the compounds described herein covalently modify a target lysine residue in HCV-NS3 protease, XIAP, PDPK-1, and PI3Kβ/γ.
    • VIII. IN A FURTHER ASPECT, THE INVENTION PROVIDES PROTEIN-MODIFIER-LIGAND CONJUGATES OF THE FORMULA XIII
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00207
  • wherein
  • Scaffold is
      • a) a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a ligand capable of binding to, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site; or
      • b) a portion of a pharmacophore of a ligand resulting from truncation of the pharmacophore, such that the Scaffold is capable of binding to, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site;
  • Warhead is an organic moiety optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from O, N, and S; the organic moiety having a molecular weight of about 14 daltons to about 200 daltons; Warhead being capable of reaction with a side chain primary amine group of a lysine residue; and Warhead being attached to Scaffold through Tether; and
  • Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C1-C15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —C(═S)—, or C(═NR1)—; optionally, one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms, and optionally, one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00208
  • x is 0, 1, or 2;
  • y is 1, 2, or 3;
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • Y1 is a bivalent or trivalent moiety resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a radical of Formula XIV-a, XIV-b, XIV-c, XIV-d, XIV-e, XIV-f, XIV-g, XIV-h, or XIV-i,
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00209
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00210
  • wherein
  • each X1 and X2 is independently —CR2R3R4, —OR2, or —NR2R3;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 can be linked together to form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;
  • one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by and
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00211
  • n is an integer from 2-4, m4 is an integer from 1 to 2;
  • A is an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl;
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-P00001
    is a single or a double bond;
  • a hydrogen of a radical of Formula XIV-a, XIV-b, XIV-c, XIV-d, XIV-e, XIV-f, XIV-g, XIV-h, or XIV-i, is substituted by Tether-Scaffold; and
  • M is connected to the position labeled as “*” and is —NH— or ═N—, the nitrogen atom of M being a nitrogen from the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue of the protein.
  • In some embodiments, the conjugate of Formula XIII, is a conjugate of Formula XIII′,
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00212
  • In some embodiments, the Scaffold is selected from the group consisting of Formulas VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXII, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
  • In other embodiments, M(CH2)4-Protein, is selected from the group consisting of M(CH2)4-K1236-HCV-NS3 μM(CH2)4-K2016-HCV-NS3, M(CH2)4-K2560-HCV-NS3, M(CH2)4-K191-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1), M(CH2)4-K199-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 1), M(CH2)4-K305-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 2), M(CH2)4-K291-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 3), M(CH2)4-K297-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4), M(CH2)4-K299-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4), M(CH2)4-K311-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 4), M(CH2)4-K062-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 5), M(CH2)4-K079-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 5), M(CH2)4-K121-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 7), M(CH2)4-K135-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 7), M(CH2)4-K146-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 7), M(CH2)4-K036-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 8), M(CH2)4-K050-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 8), M(CH2)4-K061-(Baculoviral IAP repeat-containing protein 8), M(CH2)4-K776-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit alpha isoform), M(CH2)4-K802-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit alpha isoform), M(CH2)4-K777-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit beta isoform), M(CH2)4-K805-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit beta isoform), M(CH2)4-K802-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform), M(CH2)4-K807-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform), M(CH2)4-K833-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform), M(CH2)4-K890-(Phosphatidylinositol-4,5-bisphosphate 3-kinase catalytic subunit gamma isoform), M(CH2)4-K086-(3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1), M(CH2)4-K163-(3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1), M(CH2)4-K169-(3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1), and M(CH2)4-K207-(3-phosphoinositide-dependent protein kinase 1).
  • In other embodiments, the bivalent or trivalent moiety resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a radical of Formula XIV-a, XIV-d, XIV-h, or XIV-i is a moiety of Formula XV-a, XV-b, XV-c, XV-d, XV-e, XV-f, or XV-g;
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00213
  • wherein
  • m4 is an integer from 1 to 2;
  • each R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein
      • optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 can be linked together to form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring; and
      • one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
      • one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00214
      • M is connected to the position of Y1 labeled as “*”; and
      • Tether is connected to the position of Y1 labeled as “**”.
  • In some embodiments, the bivalent moiety of Formula XV-a, XV-b, XV-c, XV-d, XV-e, XV-f, or XV-g is a bivalent moiety of Formula XV-h, XV-i, XV-j, XV-k, XV-1, XV-m, XV-n, XV-o, XV-p, XV-q, XV-r, XV-s, or XV-t;
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00215
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00216
  • wherein
  • M is connected to the position of Y1 labeled as “*”; and
  • Tether is connected to the position of Y1 labeled as “**”.
  • As defined generally above, Rwh is a warhead group. Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that such Rwh groups, i.e. warhead groups, are particularly suitable for covalently binding to a key lysine residue in the binding domain of, for example, but not limited to, XIAP, PDPK-1, HCV protease, and PI3K. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that XIAP, PDPK-1, HCV protease, and PI3K, and mutants thereof, have at least one lysine residue in the binding domain of each protein.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds may target the K297 lysine residue of XIAP. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K86 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K169 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K173 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In other embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K136 lysine residue of HCV protease. In other embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K777 lysine residue of PI3Kβ. In other embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K802 lysine residue of PI3Kγ. In other embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K890 lysine residue of PI3Kγ.
  • Thus, in some embodiments, Rwh is characterized in that the -T-Rwh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme.
  • According to another aspect, the present invention provides a conjugate comprising XIAP, or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K297. In some embodiments, the inhibitor moiety is bonded via a linker moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the Formula K297-linker-inhibitor moiety. One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-Rwh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-Rwh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-Rwh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K297 of XIAP, or a mutant thereof.
  • In certain embodiments for XIAP, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula A:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00217
  • wherein
  • V and W are each independently —(CR14R15)qX3(CR16R17)r;
  • p, q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • X3 is —CR18R19—, or —NR20—; and
  • R21 and R22 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00218
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00219
  • wherein R12, R13, R21, R22, R23, V, W, and p are as defined above for formula A.
  • In certain embodiments, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of formula B:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00220
  • wherein
  • X4 is —CR33— or —N—;
  • p and s are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
  • R12, R13, R21, R22, R24, R25, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, and R33 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00221
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
  • optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00222
  • wherein X4, p, s, R12, R13, R21, R22, R24, R25, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, R33, and R23 are as defined above for Formula B.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K86 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K169 lysine residue of PDPK-1. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K173 lysine residue of PDPK-1.
  • In some embodiments, Rwh is characterized in that the -T-Rwh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme. In certain embodiments, the lysine residue is K86 lysine residue of PDPK-1, or a mutant thereof.
  • According to another aspect, the present invention provides a conjugate comprising PDPK-1, or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K86. In some embodiments, the inhibitor is covalently bonded via a linker moiety.
  • In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K86-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K169-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K173-linker-inhibitor moiety. One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-Rwh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-Rwh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-Rwh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K86, K169, or K173 of PDPK-1, or a mutant thereof.
  • In certain embodiments for PDPK-1, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula C:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00223
  • wherein
  • B6 and B7 are each independently CR7 or N;
  • R69 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro, or —NH(CO)NR78R79;
  • R70 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro;
  • R7, R71, R72, R73, R74, R75, R76, R77, R78, and R79 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00224
  • optionally R78, and R79 taken together form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring; and
  • p is an integer from 0 to 4, u is an integer from 1 to 4.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00225
  • wherein B6, B7, R69, R70, R7, R71, R72, R73, R74, R75, R76, R77, R78, R79, R1 and p are as defined above for Formula C and Kxxx is K86, K169, or K173.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K86 of PDPK-1.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K169 of PDPK-1.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K173 of PDPK-1.
  • In certain embodiments for PDPK-1, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula D:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00226
  • wherein Rv is H, optionally substituted C1-C3 branched or straight chain alkyl, or optionally substituted C1-C3 branched or straight chain acyl.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00227
  • wherein Rv is as defined above for Formula D.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00228
  • wherein Rv is as defined above for Formula D.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00229
  • wherein Rv is as defined above for Formula D.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K136 lysine residue of HCV protease.
  • In some embodiments, Rwh is characterized in that the -T-Rwh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme. In certain embodiments, the lysine residue is K136 lysine residue of HCV protease, or a mutant thereof.
  • According to another aspect, the present invention provides a conjugate comprising HCV protease, or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K136. In some embodiments, the inhibitor is covalently bonded via a linker moiety.
  • In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K136-linker-inhibitor moiety. One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-Rwh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-Rwh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-Rwh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K136 of HCV protease, or a mutant thereof.
  • In certain embodiments for HCV protease, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of E, F, or G:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00230
  • wherein
  • R90, R94, R95, R96, R97, R98, R99, R100, R102, R104, R105, R106, R107, R108, R109, R110, R111, R112, R113, and R114 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
  • R103 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, or C2-C8 alkenyl;
  • one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00231
  • R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
  • each R101 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C8 alkenyl, halogen, amino, nitro, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; n6 is an integer from 0 to 4; and n8 is an integer from 0 to 2.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00232
  • where R1, R90, R94, R95, R96, R97, R98, R99, R100, R101, R102, R103, R104, R105, R106, R107, R108, R109, R110, R111, R112, R113, R114, n6, and n8 are as defined above for Formula E.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00233
  • where R1, R90, R94, R95, R96, R97, R98, R99, R100, R101, R102, R103, R104, R105, R106, R107, R108, R109, R110, R111, R112, R113, R114, n6, and n8 are as defined above for Formula F.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00234
  • where R1, R90, R94, R95, R96, R97, R98, R99, R100, R101, R102, R103, R104, R105, R106, R107, R108, R109, R110, R111, R112, R113, R114, n6, and n8 are as defined above for Formula G.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K777 lysine residue of PI3Kβ. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K802 lysine residue of PI3Kγ. In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention have a warhead group characterized in that inventive compounds target the K890 lysine residue of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Rwh is characterized in that the -T-Rwh moiety is capable of covalently binding to a lysine residue thereby irreversibly inhibiting the enzyme. In certain embodiments, the lysine residue is K777 lysine residue of PI3Kβ, or a mutant thereof.
  • According to another aspect, the present invention provides a conjugate comprising PI3Kβ, or a mutant thereof, covalently bonded to an inhibitor at K777. In some embodiments, the inhibitor is covalently bonded via a linker moiety.
  • In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K777-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K802-linker-inhibitor moiety. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula K890-linker-inhibitor moiety. One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the “linker” group corresponds to a -T-Rwh as described herein. Accordingly, in certain embodiments, the linker group is as defined for -T-Rwh was defined above and described in classes and subclasses herein. It will be appreciated, however, that the linker group is bivalent and, therefore, the corresponding -T-Rwh group is also intended to be bivalent resulting from the reaction of the warhead with the K777 of PI3Kβ, or from the reaction of the warhead with the K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ, or a mutant thereof.
  • In certain embodiments for PI3K, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula H, J or K:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00235
  • wherein
  • n, m, p, and q are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3; provided that n and q are not 0 at the same time, and m and q are not 0 at the same time;
  • A2 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 4-8 membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5-10 membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic heterocyclic ring having at least one nitrogen, at least one oxygen, and optionally 1-2 additional heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • B′ is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or -T-Rwh; and
  • C2 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00236
  • wherein m, n, o, p and B′ are as defined above for Formula H, and Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00237
  • wherein B′ and A2 are as defined above for Formula J, and Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00238
  • wherein A2 and C2 are as defined above for Formula K, and Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In certain embodiments for PI3K, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula L or M:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00239
  • wherein
  • R204 is an hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, —(CH2)m-(3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring), —(CH2)m-(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring), —(CH2)m-(4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH2)m-(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH2)m-phenyl, —(CH2)m-(8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring), —(CH2)m-(5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), or —(CH2)m-(8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur);
  • each R205 and R206 is independently —R″, halogen, —NO2, —CN, —OR″, —SR″, —N(R″)2, —C(O)R″, —CO2R″, —C(O)C(O)R″, —C(O)CH2C(O)R″, —S(O)R″, —S(O)2R″, —C(O)N(R″)2, —SO2N(R″)2, —OC(O)R″, —N(R″)C(O)R″, —N(R″)N(R″)2, —N(R″)C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C═NOR″, —N(R″)C(O)N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2R″, or —OC(O)N(R″)2;
  • each R″ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • two R″ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • m is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive;
  • each n is independently 0, 1, or 2; and
  • Ring A5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00240
  • wherein R204, R205, R206, n, and A5 defined as above for Formula L and Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00241
  • wherein R204, R205, R206, n, and A5 defined as above for Formula M and Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In certain embodiments for PI3K, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula N:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00242
  • wherein:
  • R201 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
  • R202 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, or (C1-6 alkylene)-R203; or
  • R201 and R202 are taken together with the intervening carbon to form an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered carbocyclic ring or a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • R203 is a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • Ring A6 is absent or an optionally substituted group selected from a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00243
  • wherein R201, R202, R203 and A6 are as defined above for Formula N, and Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In certain embodiments for PI3K, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula O:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00244
  • wherein
  • each R205 and R206 is independently —R″, halogen, —NO2, —CN, —OR″, —SR″, —N(R″)2, —C(O)R″, —CO2R″, —C(O)C(O)R″, —C(O)CH2C(O)R″, —S(O)R″, —S(O)2R″, —C(O)N(R″)2, —SO2N(R″)2, —OC(O)R″, —N(R″)C(O)R″, —N(R″)N(R″)2, —N(R″)C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C═NOR″, —N(R″)C(O)N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2R″, or —OC(O)N(R″)2;
  • each R″ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
  • optionally, two R″ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
  • m is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive;
  • each n is independently 0, 1, or 2; and
  • Ring A5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00245
  • wherein R205, R206, n and A5 are as defined above for formula O, and Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In certain embodiments for PI3K, the inhibitor moiety is a compound of Formula P:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00246
  • Thus, in certain embodiments, the present invention provides a conjugate of the formula:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00247
  • wherein Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ, or K802 or K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K777 of PI3Kβ.
  • In some embodiments, Kxxx is K802 of PI3Kγ.
  • In other embodiments, Kxxx is K890 of PI3Kγ.
  • As used herein, the term “inhibitor moiety” refers to a Scaffold group that binds in the active site of a protein. Such Scaffold groups are well known in the art and include those described in, for example, but not limited to, Formulae VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXII, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that certain compounds described herein are reversible inhibitors. In certain embodiments, such compounds are useful as assay comparator compounds. In some embodiments, such reversible compounds are useful as inhibitors of the proteins disclosed herein, or a mutants thereof, and are therefore useful for treating one or more disorders as described herein. In some embodiments, provided compounds are reversible counterparts of provided irreversible inhibitors.
    • A. Truncation of Pharmacophores
  • In some embodiments, when truncating a pharmacophore, the key elements of the pharmacophore required for non-covalent binding to the target protein are retained. Whether the key elements of the pharmacophore are retained for binding is demonstrated when the non-covalent affinity conferred by the Scaffold is sufficient to further confer selective binding of the ligand and also covalent bonding.
  • 1. The Pharmacophore is GDC-0941
  • Non-limiting examples of Scaffolds derived from the truncation of a pharmacophore, as described in the present disclosure, are set forth below in Formulas XXX, XXXI, XXXII, XXXIII, XXXIV, and XXXV.
  • In Formulas XXX, XXXI, and XXXII, the Scaffolds are based on truncating the pharmacophore GDC-0941:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00248
  • wherein the arrows indicate the possible sites of truncation.
  • One non-limiting example of a truncated form of GDC-0941 is described by Formula XXX:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00249
  • wherein
  • R200 is located at the site of truncation and is -Tether-Rwh, where Tether and Rwh are as defined for Formula I; and
  • Ring B is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Non-limiting examples of Scaffold of the Formula XXX above are set forth below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00250
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00251
  • Another non-limiting example of a Scaffold that has been truncated as described in the present disclosure is set forth below in Formula XXXI:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00252
  • wherein
  • R200 is located at the site of truncation and is -Tether-RWH, where Tether and Rwh are as defined in Formula I; and
  • Ring B is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Non-limiting examples of Scaffolds of the Formula XXXI above are set forth below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00253
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00254
  • Another non-limiting example of a Scaffold that has been truncated as described in the present disclosure is set forth below in Formula XXXII:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00255
  • wherein
  • R200 is at the site of truncation and is -Tether-RWH, where Tether and Rwh are as defined above in the embodiments of Formula I;
  • T2 is a covalent bond or a bivalent straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated C1-6 hydrocarbon chain wherein one or more methylene units of T2 are optionally replaced by —O—, —S, —N(R1)—, —C(O)—, —OC(O)—, —C(O)O—, —C(O)N(R1)—, —N(R1)C(O)—, —N(R1)C(O)N(R1)—, —SO2—, —SO2N(R1)—, —N(R1)SO2—, or —N(R1)SO2N(R1)—;
  • C2 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
  • B′ is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Non-limiting examples of Scaffolds of the Formula XXXII above include:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00256
  • 2. Scaffolds of Formula XXXIII through the Truncation OF Dihydroimidazoquinazoline:
  • In another embodiment, the Scaffolds described by Formula XXXIII are based on truncating the pharmacophore dihydroimidazoquinazoline:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00257
  • wherein the arrows indicate the possible sites of truncation.
  • Another non-limiting example of a Scaffold that has been truncated as described in the present disclosure is set forth below in Formula XXXIII
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00258
  • wherein
  • R200 is at the site of truncation and is -Tether-RWH, where Tether and Rwh are as defined previously;
  • X10 is hydrogen, alkoxy, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkoxy;
  • X11 is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • 3. IAP Scaffolds of Formula XXXIV and Formula XXXV through the Truncation of SM−337 and SM−122
  • In another embodiment, the Scaffolds described by Formula XXXIV and Formula XXXV are based on truncating the pharmacophore SM−337 and SM−122.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00259
  • wherein the arrows indicate the possible sites of truncation; and
  • R** is phenylacetamide.
  • Compounds of the truncated form of SM−337 are described by the formula XXXIV:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00260
  • wherein R** is phenylacetamide and the arrow denotes the site of attachment for T-RWH, both of which are as described herein.
  • Compounds of the truncated form of SM−122 are described by the formula XXXV:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00261
  • wherein the arrow denotes the site of attachment of T-Rwh; where T is Tether; and
    Rwh is Warhead, both of which are as defined herein.
  • B. Methods of Using
  • 1. IAP
  • X-linked Inhibitor of Apoptosis Protein (XIAP) is a member of the inhibitor of apoptosis family of proteins (IAP). Other family members of IAP include cIAP1, cIAP2 and ML-IAP. IAPs were initially identified in baculoviruses, but XIAP is one of the homologous proteins found in mammals. It is so called because it was first discovered by a 273 base pair site on the X chromosome.
  • Deregulation of XIAP can result in cancer, neurodegenerative disorders, and autoimmunity. High proportions of XIAP may function as a tumor marker. In the development of lung cancer NCI-H460, the overexpression of XIAP not only inhibits caspase, but also stops the apoptotic activity of cytochrome c (Apoptosis). In developing prostate cancer, XIAP is one of four IAPs overexpressed in the prostatic epithelium, indicating that a molecule that inhibits all IAPs may be necessary for effective treatment.
  • Among the diseases and disorders associated with XIAP deregulation include, but are not limited to, acute myelogenous leukemia (AML), Addison's disease, adrenoleukodystrophy (ALD), alcoholism, Alexander's disease, alopecia greata, Alper's disease, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (Lou Gehrig's Disease), angiitis, ankylosing spondylitis, antiphospholipid syndrome, ataxia telangiectasia, autism, autoimmune haemolytic anaemia, autoimmune hepatitis, Batten disease (also known as Spielmeyer-Vogt-Sjögren-Batten disease), Behcet's syndrome, Berger's disease, bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), bullous pemphigoid, Canavan disease, cardiomyopathy, Chagas disease, chronic fatigue syndrome (CFS, CFIDS), chronic inflammatory polyneuropathy, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, Churg-Strauss syndrome, Cockayne syndrome, coeliac disease, corticobasal degeneration, CREST syndrome, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, Crohns Disease (one of two types of idiopathic inflammatory bowel disease or IBD), dermatomyositis, diabetes mellitus type 1, endometriosis, familial fatal insomnia, fibromyalgia, giant cell arteritis, frontotemporal lobar degeneration, Goodpasture's syndrome, Graves' disease, Guillain-Barré syndrome (GBS), Hashimoto's thyroiditis, hidradenitis suppurativa, HIV-associated dementia, Huntington's disease, idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis, idiopathic thrombocytopenia purpura (ITP), idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura, IgA nephropathy, interstitial cystitis, Kawasaki disease, Kennedy's disease, Krabbe's disease, lactic acidosis and stroke (MELAS), Lewy body dementia, lichen planus, lung cancer, lupus erythematosus, Machado-Joseph disease (Spinocerebellar ataxia type 3), malignant lymphoma, malignant gliomas, Meniere's disease, mitochondrial encephalopathy, mixed connective tissue disease, morphea, multiple system atrophy, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, narcolepsy, neuroborreliosis, neuromyotonia, Niemann Pick disease, Parkinson's disease, Pelizaeus-Merzbacher disease, Pemphigus vulgaris pernicious anaemia, Pick's disease, polyarteritis nodosa, polymyalgia rheumatica, polymyositis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary lateral sclerosis, prion diseases, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, Raynaud's disease, Refsum's disease, Reiter's syndrome, relapsing polychondritis, progressive supranuclear palsy, rheumatic fever, rheumatoid arthritis (RA), Sandhoff disease, sarcoidosis, Schilder's disease, schizophrenia, scleroderma, Sjögren's syndrome, Spielmeyer-Vogt-Sjogren-Batten disease (also known as Batten disease), spinal muscular atrophy, spinocerebellar ataxia (multiple types with varying characteristics), Steele-Richardson-Olszewski disease, stiff person syndrome, subacute combined degeneration of spinal cord secondary to pernicious anaemia, Tabes dorsalis, temporal arteritis (also known as giant cell arteritis), toxic encephalopathy and X-linked lymphoproliferative disease (XLP), ulcerative colitis (one of two types of idiopathic inflammatory bowel disease or IBD), uveitis, vasculitis, vitiligo, and Wegener's granulomatosis.
  • In some embodiments, the invention provides compositions useful for treating or preventing a proliferative disorder or an autoimmune disease. The compositions are suitable for internal use and comprise an effective amount of a IAP inhibitor and a physiologically acceptable carrier or vehicle, useful for treating or preventing cancer, neurodegenerative disorders, and autoimmunity.
  • A XIAP inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject. Proliferative disorders include, but are not limited to, solid tumor cancers such as malignant lymphoma, malignant gliomas, X-linked lymphoproliferative disease (XLP), acute myelogenous leukemia (AML), fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, Leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, brain cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, bone cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, oral cancer, nasal cancer, throat cancer, head and neck cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, uterine cancer, testicular cancer, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, lung cancer, cancer of the central nervous system, epithelial carcinoma, skin cancer, melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma.
  • In some embodiments, the invention provides compositions of a IAP inhibitor useful for treating or preventing an autoimmune disease. Autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g. hemolytic anemia, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia), systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g. ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), endocrine opthalmopathy, Grave's disease, sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • A XIAP inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent an autoimmune disease in a subject. Neurodegenerative disease which can be treated according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, and cerebral ischemia, and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury, glutamate neurotoxicity and hypoxia.
  • A cIAP inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject. Proliferative disorders include, but are not limited to, mucosa associated lymphoid tissue lymphoma (MALT lymphoma) which is a subset of non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, breast cancer, prostate cancer, pancreatic cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, malignant gliomas, and acute myelogenous leukemia (AML).
  • 2. PI3Kβ/γ
  • The phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase (“PI3Kβ/γ”) pathway is a central signaling pathway that exerts its effect on numerous cellular functions including cell cycle progression, proliferation, motility, metabolism and survival (Marone, et al. Biochim. Biophys. Acta (2008) 1784: 159-185). Activation of receptor tyrosine kinases in the case of Class IA PI3Ks, or G-proteins in the case of Class IB PI3Kγ, causes phosphorylation of phosphatidylinositol-(4,5)-diphosphate, resulting in membrane-bound phosphatidylinositol-(3,4,5)-triphosphate. The latter promotes the transfer of a variety of protein kinases from the cytoplasm to the plasma membrane by binding of phosphatidylinositol-(3,4,5)-triphosphate to the pleckstrin-homology (PH) domain of the kinase.
  • Kinases that are downstream targets of PI3K include phosphatidylinositide-dependent kinase 1 (PI3K) and Akt (also known as Protein Kinase B or PKB). Phosphorylation of such kinases then allows for the activation or deactivation of numerous other pathways, involving mediators such as GSK3, mTOR, PRAS40, FKHD, NF-κB, BAD, Caspase-9, and others. These pathways are involved in many cellular processes, such as cell cycle progression, cell survival and apoptosis, cell growth, transcription, translation, metabolism, degranulation, and cell motility.
  • An important negative feedback mechanism for the PI3K pathway is PTEN, a phosphatase that catalyzes the dephosphorylation of phosphatidylinositol-(3,4,5)-triphosphate to phosphatidylinositol-(4,5)-diphosphate. In more than 60% of all solid tumors, PTEN is mutated into an inactive form, permitting a constitutive activation of the PI3K pathway. As many cancers are solid tumors, such an observation provides evidence that a targeting of PI3K itself or individual downstream kinases in the PI3K pathway provide a promising approach to mitigate or even abolish the disregulation in many cancers and thus restore normal cell function and behavior.
  • Diseases and disorders treatable by regulating the function of PI3K include, but are not limited to, cancer, neurofibromatosis, ocular angiogenesis, stroke, diabetes, hepatomegaly, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer's disease, cystic fibrosis, viral diseases, autoimmune diseases, atherosclerosis, restenosis, psoriasis, allergic disorders, inflammation, neurological disorders, angiogenic disorders, a hormone-related disease, conditions associated with organ transplantation, immunodeficiency disorders, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, infectious diseases, conditions associated with cell death, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), liver disease, pathologic immune conditions involving T cell activation, and CNS disorders in a patient. Such proliferative diseases/disorders include, but are not limited to, solid tumor cancers such as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, Leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, brain cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, bone cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, oral cancer, nasal cancer, throat cancer, head and neck cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, uterine cancer, testicular cancer, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, lung cancer, cancer of the central nervous system, epithelial carcinoma, skin cancer, melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma.
  • A PI3K inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject. More specifically, compounds of the current invention are useful in the treatment of a proliferative disease selected from a benign or malignant tumor, carcinoma of the brain, kidney, liver, bile duct, adrenal gland, bladder, breast, esophagus, stomach, gastric tumors, ovaries, colon, rectum, prostate, pancreas, lung (including small cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer and bronchioalveolar cancer), stomach, vagina, endometrial, uterus, cervix and vulva, testes, genitourinary tract, larynx, skin, bone or thyroid, sarcoma, glioblastomas, neuroblastomas, multiple myeloma and lymphomas, gastrointestinal cancer, especially colon carcinoma or colorectal adenoma, a tumor of the neck and head, a cancer of the central nervous system, an epidermal hyperproliferation, psoriasis, prostate hyperplasia, a neoplasia, a neoplasia of epithelial character, adenoma, adenocarcinoma, keratoacanthoma, epidermoid carcinoma, large cell carcinoma, non-small-cell lung carcinoma, lymphomas, Hodgkins, a mammary carcinoma, follicular carcinoma, undifferentiated carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, seminoma, melanoma, or leukemias (including ALL and CML). Other diseases include Cowden syndrome, Lhermitte-Dudos disease and Bannayan-Zonana syndrome, or diseases in which the PI3K/PKB pathway is aberrantly activated.
  • A PI3K inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a neurodegenerative disease/disorder in a subject. Neurodegenerative disease which can be treated according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, and cerebral ischemia, and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury, glutamate neurotoxicity and hypoxia.
  • A PI3K inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent an autoimmune disease in a subject. Autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g. hemolytic anemia, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia), systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g. ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), endocrine opthalmopathy, Grave's disease, sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a method of using the disclosed compounds to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of neurofibromatosis type I (NF1), neurofibromatosis type II (NF2) Schwann cell neoplasms (e.g. MPNST's), or Schwannomas.
  • Furthermore, compounds disclosed herein are useful to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of inflammatory or obstructive airways diseases associated with PI3K. Inflammatory or obstructive airways diseases to which the present invention is applicable include asthma of whatever type or genesis including both intrinsic (non-allergic) asthma and extrinsic (allergic) asthma, mild asthma, moderate asthma, severe asthma, bronchitic asthma, exercise-induced asthma, occupational asthma and asthma induced following bacterial infection. Treatment of asthma is also to be understood as embracing treatment of subjects, e.g. of less than 4 or 5 years of age, exhibiting wheezing symptoms and diagnosed or diagnosable as “wheezy infants”, an established patient category of major medical concern and now often identified as incipient or early-phase asthmatics.
  • Prophylactic efficacy in the treatment of asthma will be evidenced by reduced frequency or severity of symptomatic attack, e.g. of acute asthmatic or bronchoconstrictor attack, improvement in lung function or improved airways hyperreactivity. It may further be evidenced by reduced requirement for other, symptomatic therapy, such as therapy for or intended to restrict or abort symptomatic attack when it occurs, for example antiinflammatory or bronchodilatory. Prophylactic benefit in asthma may in particular be apparent in subjects prone to “morning dipping.” “Morning dipping” is a recognized asthmatic syndrome, common to a substantial percentage of asthmatics and characterised by asthma attack, e.g. between the hours of about 4 to 6 am, i.e. at a time normally substantially distant form any previously administered symptomatic asthma therapy.
  • In yet another embodiment, compounds of the current invention can be used to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of other inflammatory or obstructive airways diseases and conditions associated with PI3K including, but not limited to, acute lung injury (ALI), adult/acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), chronic obstructive pulmonary, airways or lung disease (COPD, COAD or COLD), including chronic bronchitis or dyspnea associated therewith, emphysema, as well as exacerbation of airways hyperreactivity consequent to other drug therapy, in particular other inhaled drug therapy. The invention is also applicable to the treatment of bronchitis of whatever type or genesis including, but not limited to, acute, arachidic, catarrhal, croupus, chronic or phthinoid bronchitis. Further inflammatory or obstructive airways diseases to which the present invention is applicable include pneumoconiosis (an inflammatory, commonly occupational, disease of the lungs, frequently accompanied by airways obstruction, whether chronic or acute, and occasioned by repeated inhalation of dusts) of whatever type or genesis, including, for example, aluminosis, anthracosis, asbestosis, chalicosis, ptilosis, siderosis, silicosis, tabacosis and byssinosis.
  • With regard to their anti-inflammatory activity, in particular in relation to inhibition of eosinophil activation, the methods disclosed herein may be used to treat eosinophil related disorders associated with PI3K, e.g. eosinsophilia, in particular eosinophil related disorders of the airways (e.g. involving morbid eosinophilic infiltration of pulmonary tissues) including hypereosinophilia as it effects the airways and/or lungs as well as, for example, eosinophil-related disorders of the airways consequential or concomitant to Loffler's syndrome, eosinophilic pneumonia, parasitic (in particular metazoan) infestation (including tropical eosinophilia), bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, polyarteritis nodosa (including Churg-Strauss syndrome), eosinophilic granuloma and eosinophil-related disorders affecting the airways occasioned by drug-reaction.
  • As PI3K has been implicated in inflammatory and allergies, the methods disclosed herein are also useful to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of psoriasis, contact dermatitis, atopic dermatitis, alopecia greata, erythema multiforma, dermatitis herpetiformis, scleroderma, vitiligo, hypersensitivity angiitis, urticaria, bullous pemphigoid, systemic lupus erythematosus, pemphisus, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, and other inflammatory or allergic conditions of the skin.
  • Furthermore, diseases or conditions having an inflammatory component caused by aberrant PI3K may also be prevented, treated, or used to reduce the severity by the methods disclosed herein. These diseases and disorders include, but are not limited to, diseases and conditions of the eye such as conjunctivitis, keratoconjunctivitis sicca, and vernal conjunctivitis, diseases affecting the nose including allergic rhinitis, and inflammatory disease in which autoimmune reactions are implicated or having an autoimmune component or etiology, including autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g. hemolytic anemia, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia), systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g. ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), endocrine opthalmopathy, Grave's disease, sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • Cardiovascular diseases which can be prevent, treated, or used to reduce the severity according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, restenosis, cardiomegaly, atherosclerosis, myocardial infarction, ischemic stroke and congestive heart failure.
  • In one embodiment, the invention provides compositions useful for treating or preventing cancer, neurofibromatosis, ocular angiogenesis, stroke, diabetes, hepatomegaly, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer's disease, cystic fibrosis, viral diseases, autoimmune diseases, atherosclerosis, restenosis, psoriasis, allergic disorders, inflammation, neurological disorders, angiogenic disorders, a hormone-related disease, conditions associated with organ transplantation, immunodeficiency disorders, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, infectious diseases, conditions associated with cell death, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), liver disease, pathologic immune conditions involving T cell activation, and CNS disorders in a patient.
  • Because PI3K is pro-angiogenic (Graupera et al. Nature (2008) 453(7195):662-6), the methods of the present invention may be advantageous for inhibiting angiogenesis, for example, to treat eye disease associated with ocular angiogenesis, such as by topical administration of the subject compounds. Compounds according to the invention can be formulated for topical administration. For example, the irreversible inhibitor can be formulated for topical delivery to the lung (e.g., as an aerosol, such as a dry powder or liquid formulation) to treat asthma, as a cream, ointment, lotion or the like for topical application to the skin to treat psoriasis, or as an ocular formulation for topical application to the eye to treat an ocular disease. Such a formulation will contain a subject inhibitor and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Additional components, such as preservatives, and agents to increase viscosity of the formulation such as natural or synthetic polymers may also be present. The ocular formulation can be in any suitable form, such as a liquid, an ointment, a hydrogel or a powder. Compounds of the current invention can be administered together with another therapeutic agent, such as an anti-VEGF agent, for example ranibizumab a Fab fragment of an antibody that binds VEGFA, or another anti-angiogenic compound as described further below.
  • 3. PDPK1
  • 3-Phosphoinositide-dependent kinase 1 (PDPK1) phosphorylates the activation loop of a number of protein serine/threonine kinases of the AGC kinase superfamily, including protein kinase B (PKB; also called Akt), serum and glucocorticoid-induced kinase, protein kinase C isoforms, and the p70 ribosomal S6 kinase. The phosphoinositide 3-kinase/3-phosphoinositide-dependent kinase 1 (PDPK1)/Akt signaling pathway plays a key role in cancer cell growth, survival, and tumor angiogenesis and represents a promising target for anti-cancer drugs.
  • A proliferative disorder can be prevented, treated, or reduce the severity of by administration of an effective amount of a PDPK1 inhibitor to a subject in need thereof. Proliferative disorders that can be prevented, treated, or reduce the severity of by administering an effective amount of a PDPK1 inhibitor include, but are not limited to, cancer, uterine fibroids, benign prostatic hyperplasia, familial adenomatosis polyposis, neuro-fibromatosis, atherosclerosis, pulmonary fibrosis, arthritis, psoriasis, glomerulonephritis, restenosis following angioplasty or vascular surgery, hypertrophic scar formation, an inflammatory bowel disease, transplantation rejection, endotoxic shock, a fungal infection, a defective apoptosis-associated condition, or a proliferative disease that is dependent on PDPK1 activity.
  • Because PDPK1 is a downstream target of PI3K, diseases and disorders that are regulated by PI3K are also implicated in aberrant PDPK1 function. Accordingly diseases treatable by regulating PDPK1 activity include, but are not limited to, cancer, neurofibromatosis, ocular angiogenesis, stroke, diabetes, hepatomegaly, cardiovascular disease, Alzheimer's disease, cystic fibrosis, viral diseases, autoimmune diseases, atherosclerosis, restenosis, psoriasis, allergic disorders, inflammation, neurological disorders, angiogenic disorders, a hormone-related disease, conditions associated with organ transplantation, immunodeficiency disorders, destructive bone disorders, proliferative disorders, infectious diseases, conditions associated with cell death, thrombin-induced platelet aggregation, chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML), liver disease, pathologic immune conditions involving T cell activation, and CNS disorders in a patient. Such proliferative diseases/disorders include, but are not limited to, solid tumor cancers such as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, Leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, brain cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, kidney cancer, liver cancer, pancreatic cancer, bone cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, oral cancer, nasal cancer, throat cancer, head and neck cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, uterine cancer, testicular cancer, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, lung cancer, cancer of the central nervous system, epithelial carcinoma, skin cancer, melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma.
  • A PDPK1 inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a proliferative disorder in a subject. More specifically, compounds of the current invention are useful in the treatment of a proliferative disease selected from a benign or malignant tumor, carcinoma of the brain, kidney, liver, bile duct, adrenal gland, bladder, breast, esophagus, stomach, gastric tumors, ovaries, colon, rectum, prostate, pancreas, lung (including small cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer and bronchioalveolar cancer), stomach, vagina, endometrial, uterus, cervix and vulva, testes, genitourinary tract, larynx, skin, bone or thyroid, sarcoma, glioblastomas, neuroblastomas, multiple myeloma and lymphomas, gastrointestinal cancer, especially colon carcinoma or colorectal adenoma, a tumor of the neck and head, a cancer of the central nervous system, an epidermal hyperproliferation, psoriasis, prostate hyperplasia, a neoplasia, a neoplasia of epithelial character, adenoma, adenocarcinoma, keratoacanthoma, epidermoid carcinoma, large cell carcinoma, non-small-cell lung carcinoma, lymphomas, Hodgkins, a mammary carcinoma, follicular carcinoma, undifferentiated carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, seminoma, melanoma, or leukemias (including ALL and CML). Other diseases include Cowden syndrome, Lhermitte-Dudos disease and Bannayan-Zonana syndrome, or diseases in which the PI3K/PKB pathway is aberrantly activated.
  • A PDPK1 inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of a neurodegenerative disease/disorder in a subject. Neurodegenerative disease which can be treated according to the methods of this invention include, but are not limited to, Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, and cerebral ischemia, and neurodegenerative disease caused by traumatic injury, glutamate neurotoxicity and hypoxia.
  • A PDPK1 inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent an autoimmune disease in a subject. Autoimmune diseases include, but are not limited to, autoimmune hematological disorders (e.g. hemolytic anemia, aplastic anemia, pure red cell anemia and idiopathic thrombocytopenia), systemic lupus erythematosus, rheumatoid arthritis, polychondritis, sclerodoma, Wegener granulamatosis, dermatomyositis, chronic active hepatitis, myasthenia gravis, Steven-Johnson syndrome, idiopathic sprue, acute pancreatitis, autoimmune inflammatory bowel disease (e.g. ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), endocrine opthalmopathy, Grave's disease, sarcoidosis, alveolitis, chronic hypersensitivity pneumonitis, multiple sclerosis, primary biliary cirrhosis, uveitis (anterior and posterior), keratoconjunctivitis sicca and vernal keratoconjunctivitis, interstitial lung fibrosis, psoriatic arthritis and glomerulonephritis (with and without nephrotic syndrome, e.g. including idiopathic nephrotic syndrome or minal change nephropathy).
  • Blood-borne cancers implicated in aberrant PDPK1 expression include, but are not limited to, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic B-cell leukemia, acute lymphoblastic T-cell leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute monoblastic leukemia, acute erythroleukemic leukemia, acute megakaryoblastic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocyctic leukemia, acute undifferentiated leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia (“CML”), chronic lymphocytic leukemia (“CLL”), hairy cell leukemia, and myeloma.
  • Lymphomas where PDPK1 is implicated include, but are not limited to, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's lymphomas, multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and polycythemia vera.
  • CNS and brain cancers where aberrant PDPK1 expression include, but not limited to, glioma, pilocytic astrocytoma, astrocytoma, anaplastic astrocytoma, glioblastoma multiforme, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, vestibular schwannoma, adenoma, metastatic brain tumor, and meningioma.
  • Virally-mediated cancers have also been implicated in overexpression of PDPK1. Such viruses include human papilloma virus, which can lead to cervical cancer (see, e.g., Hernandez-Avila et al., Archives of Medical Research (1997) 28:265-271); Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), which can lead to lymphoma (see, e.g., Herrmann et al., J Pathol (2003) 199(2):140-5); hepatitis B or C virus, which can lead to liver carcinoma (see, e.g., El-Serag, J Clin Gastroenterol (2002) 35(5 Suppl 2):572-8); human T cell leukemia virus (HTLV)-I, which can lead to T-cell leukemia (see e.g., Mortreux et al., Leukemia (2003) 17(1):26-38); human herpesvirus-8 infection, which can lead to Kaposi's sarcoma (see, e.g., Kadow et al., Curr Opin Investig Drugs (2002) 3(11): 1574-9); and Human Immune deficiency Virus (HIV) infection, which can lead to cancer as a consequence of immunodeficiency (see, e.g., Dal Maso et al., Lancet Oncol (2003) 4(2):110-9).
  • The invention provides methods for treating or preventing these aforementioned cancers, disorders and diseases, comprising administering to a subject in need of such treatment or prevention an effective amount of a PDPK1 inhibitor.
  • 4. HCV
  • HCV is a positive-stranded RNA virus whose genome encodes a polyprotein of approximately 3000 amino acids. This precursor protein is processed into at least 10 viral structural and nonstructural proteins: C, E1, E2, p7, NS2, NS3, NS4A, NS4B, NS5A, and NS5B (Blight, K. J., et al., Antiviral Ther. 3, Suppl. 3: 71-81, 1998). HCV nonstructural (NS) proteins are derived by proteolytic cleavage of the polyprotein and are presumed to provide the essential catalytic machinery for viral replication.
  • NS3 is an approximately 68 Kda protein, and has both an N-terminal serine protease domain and an RNA-dependent ATPase domain at its C-terminus. It has been shown that the NS4A protein serves as a co-factor for the serine protease activity of NS3. NS3 functions as a proteolytic enzyme that cleaves sites liberating other nonstructural proteins necessary for HCV replication and is a validated therapeutic target for antiviral chemotherapy.
  • No vaccines are available for HCV, and the established therapy of interferon treatment is effective in only 15-20% of patients (Weiland, O., FEMS Microbiol. Rev. 14: 279-88, 1994), and has significant side effects (Walker, M. A., et al., DDT 4: 518-29, 1999; Moradpour, D., et al., Eur. J. Gastroenterol. Hepatol. 11: 1199-1202, 1999). While the current standard of care, pegylated interferon α in combination with ribavirin, is more efficacious and appears to decrease hepatocellular carcinoma in patients with HCV-related cirrhosis (Hung, C. H., et al., J Viral Hepatitis 13(6): 409-414, 2006), this treatment has also been shown to produce side effects such as thyroid dysfunction (Huang, J. F., et al., J Viral Hepatitis 13(6): 396-401, 2006).
  • Symptoms of HCV infection can either be acute or chronic. Acute symptoms include decreased appetite, fatigue, abdominal pain, jaundice, itching, and flu-like symptoms. Most patients diagnosed with HCV infection with acute symptoms eventually develop chronic symptoms, which include fatigue, flu-like symptoms, joint pains, itching, sleep disturbances, appetite changes, nausea, and depression. Chronic HCV infection eventually leads to liver inflammation, fibrosis, and eventually cirrhosis all of which lead to decreased liver function and eventually liver failure. Chronic hepatitis C can also be associated with extrahepatic manifestations associated with the presence of HCV such as porphyria cutanea tarda, cryoglobulinemia (a form of small-vessel vasculitis) and glomerulonephritis (inflammation of the kidney), specifically membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis (MPGN).
  • In one embodiment, the invention provides compositions useful for treating or preventing a an HCV infection. The compositions are suitable for internal use and comprise an effective amount of a HCV inhibitor and a physiologically acceptable carrier or vehicle.
  • A HCV inhibitor can be administered in amounts that are effective to treat or prevent or reduce the severity of an HCV infection in a subject.
  • Depending upon the particular condition, or disease, to be treated, additional therapeutic agents, which are normally administered to treat that condition, may be administered in combination with compounds and compositions of this invention. As used herein, additional therapeutic agents that are normally administered to treat a particular disease, or condition, are known as “appropriate for the disease, or condition, being treated”.
  • In certain embodiments, a provided compound, or composition thereof, is administered in combination with another inhibitor of HCV protease, or a variant thereof. In some embodiments, a provided compound, or composition thereof, is administered in combination with another antiviral agent. Such antiviral agents include, but are not limited to, immunomodulatory agents, such as α-, β-, and γ-interferons, pegylated derivatized interferon-α compounds, and thymosin; other anti-viral agents, such as ribavirin, amantadine, and telbivudine; other inhibitors of hepatitis C proteases (NS2-NS3 inhibitors and NS3-NS4A inhibitors, e.g. BILN 2061 and VX-950); inhibitors of other targets in the HCV life cycle, including helicase and polymerase inhibitors; inhibitors of internal ribosome entry; broad-spectrum viral inhibitors, such as IMPDH inhibitors (e.g., mycophenolic acid and derivatives thereof); or combinations of any of the above.
  • In certain embodiments, a combination of 2 or more antiviral agents may be administered. In certain embodiments, a combination of 3 or more antiviral agents may be administered. In some embodiments, the antiviral agents are selected from ribavirin or interferon. In other embodiments, the antiviral agent is α-interferon.
  • Other examples of agents the inhibitors of this invention may also be combined with include, without limitation: treatments for Alzheimer's Disease such as Aricept® and Excelon®; treatments for HIV such as ritonavir; treatments for Parkinson's Disease such as L-DOPA/carbidopa, entacapone, ropinrole, pramipexole, bromocriptine, pergolide, trihexephendyl, and amantadine; agents for treating Multiple Sclerosis (MS) such as beta interferon (e.g., Avonex® and Rebif®), Copaxone®, and mitoxantrone; treatments for asthma such as albuterol and Singulair®; agents for treating schizophrenia such as zyprexa, risperdal, seroquel, and haloperidol; anti-inflammatory agents such as corticosteroids, TNF blockers, IL-1 RA, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, and sulfasalazine; immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive agents such as cyclosporin, tacrolimus, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, interferons, corticosteroids, cyclophophamide, azathioprine, and sulfasalazine; neurotrophic factors such as acetylcholinesterase inhibitors, MAO inhibitors, interferons, anti-convulsants, ion channel blockers, riluzole, and anti-Parkinsonian agents; agents for treating cardiovascular disease such as beta-blockers, ACE inhibitors, diuretics, nitrates, calcium channel blockers, and statins; agents for treating liver disease such as corticosteroids, cholestyramine, interferons, and anti-viral agents; agents for treating blood disorders such as corticosteroids, anti-leukemic agents, and growth factors; agents that prolong or improve pharmacokinetics such as cytochrome P450 inhibitors (i.e., inhibitors of metabolic breakdown) and CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketokenozole and ritonavir), and agents for treating immunodeficiency disorders such as gamma globulin.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition thereof, are administered in combination with a monoclonal antibody or an siRNA therapeutic.
  • Those additional agents may be administered separately from an inventive compound-containing composition, as part of a multiple dosage regimen. Alternatively, those agents may be part of a single dosage form, mixed together with a compound of this invention in a single composition. If administered as part of a multiple dosage regime, the two active agents may be submitted simultaneously, sequentially or within a period of time from one another normally within five hours from one another.
  • 5. Dosage
  • The methods of the present invention may be used to prevent, treat, or reduce the severity of cancer, an autoimmune disorder, a neurodegenerative or neurological disorder, schizophrenia, a bone-related disorder, liver disease, or a cardiac disorder. The exact amount required will vary from subject to subject, depending on the species, age, and general condition of the subject, the severity of the infection, the particular agent, its mode of administration, and the like. The compounds of the invention are preferably formulated in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. The expression “dosage unit form” as used herein refers to a physically discrete unit of agent appropriate for the patient to be treated. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compounds and compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific effective dose level for any particular patient or organism will depend upon a variety of factors including the disorder being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific compound employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the patient; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific compound employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific compound employed, and like factors well known in the medical arts. The term “patient”, as used herein, means an animal, preferably a mammal, and most preferably a human.
  • Administration of an inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be accomplished via any mode of administration for therapeutic agents. These modes include systemic or local administration such as oral, nasal, parenteral, transdermal, subcutaneous, vaginal, buccal, rectal or topical administration modes. In some instances, administration will result in the release of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein into the bloodstream.
  • In one embodiment, the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein is administered orally.
  • Depending on the intended mode of administration, the compositions can be in solid, semi-solid or liquid dosage form, such as, for example, injectables, tablets, suppositories, pills, time-release capsules, elixirs, tinctures, emulsions, syrups, powders, liquids, suspensions, or the like, preferably in unit dosages and consistent with conventional pharmaceutical practices. Likewise, they can also be administered in intravenous (both bolus and infusion), intraperitoneal, subcutaneous or intramuscular form, all using forms well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active compounds, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
  • Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions may be formulated according to the known art using dissolution or suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, ethanol, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.
  • The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.
  • In order to prolong the effect of a compound of the present invention, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the compound from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the compound then depends upon its rate of dissolution that, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered compound form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the compound in an oil vehicle. Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the compound in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending upon the ratio of compound to polymer and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of compound release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the compound in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissues.
  • Compositions of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein for rectal or vaginal administration are preferably suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the compounds of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the active compound is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders or diluents such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, cellulose, saccharin, glycine, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, magnesium aluminum silicate, starch paste, tragacanth, carboxymethylcellulose, methyl cellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, magnesium carbonate, natural sugars, corn sweeteners, sucrose, waxes and natural or synthetic gums such as acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators or disintegrants such as quaternary ammonium compounds, starches, agar, methyl cellulose, bentonite, xanthangum, algiic acid, and effervescent mixtures, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, h) absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay, and i) lubricants such as talc, silica, stearic acid, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, sodium oleate, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage form may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polethylene glycols and the like.
  • The active compounds can also be in micro-encapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. In such solid dosage forms the active compound may be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch. Such dosage forms may also comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage forms may also comprise buffering agents. They may optionally contain opacifying agents and can also be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • The inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can also be administered in the form of liposome delivery systems, such as small unilamellar vesicles, large unilamellar vesicles and multilamellar vesicles. Liposomes can be formed from a variety of phospholipids, containing cholesterol, stearylamine or phosphatidylcholines. In some embodiments, a film of lipid components is hydrated with an aqueous solution of drug to a form lipid layer encapsulating the drug, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,564.
  • The inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can also be delivered by the use of monoclonal antibodies as individual carriers to which the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein are coupled. The inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can also be coupled with soluble polymers as targetable drug carriers. Such polymers can include polyvinylpyrrolidone, pyran copolymer, polyhydroxypropylmethacrylamide-phenol, polyhydroxyethylaspanamidephenol, or polyethyleneoxidepolylysine substituted with palmitoyl residues. Furthermore, the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be coupled to a class of biodegradable polymers useful in achieving controlled release of a drug, for example, polylactic acid, polyepsilon caprolactone, polyhydroxy butyric acid, polyorthoesters, polyacetals, polydihydropyrans, polycyanoacrylates and cross-linked or amphipathic block copolymers of hydrogels.
  • Parenteral injectable administration can be used for subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injections and infusions. Injectables can be prepared in conventional forms, either as liquid solutions or suspensions or solid forms suitable for dissolving in liquid prior to injection.
  • One embodiment, for parenteral administration employs the implantation of a slow-release or sustained-released system, according to U.S. Pat. No. 3,710,795, incorporated herein by reference.
  • The compositions can be sterilized or contain non-toxic amounts of adjuvants, such as preserving, stabilizing, wetting or emulsifying agents, solution promoters, salts for regulating the osmotic pressure, pH buffering agents, and other substances, including, but not limited to, sodium acetate or triethanolamine oleate. In addition, they can also contain other therapeutically valuable substances.
  • Dosage forms for topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants or patches. The active component is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and any needed preservatives or buffers as may be required. Ophthalmic formulation, ear drops, and eye drops are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. Additionally, the present invention contemplates the use of transdermal patches, which have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispensing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or by dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • Compositions can be prepared according to conventional mixing, granulating or coating methods, respectively, and the present pharmaceutical compositions can contain from about 0.1% to about 99%, preferably from about 1% to about 70% of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein by weight or volume.
  • The dosage regimen utilizing the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be selected in accordance with a variety of factors including type, species, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the subject; the severity of the condition to be treated; the route of administration; the renal or hepatic function of the subject; and the particular inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein employed. A person skilled in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the drug useful for treating or preventing a proliferative disorder.
  • Effective dosage amounts of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein, when administered to a subject, range from about 0.05 to about 1000 mg of inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein per day. Compositions for in vivo or in vitro use can contain about 0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 50.0, 100.0, 250.0, 500.0 or 1000.0 mg of the inhibitor described herein. In one embodiment, the compositions are in the form of a tablet that can be scored. Effective plasma levels of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can range from about 0.002 mg to about 50 mg per kg of body weight per day. The amount of an inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein that is effective in the treatment or prevention of cancer can be determined by clinical techniques that are known to those of skill in the art. In addition, in vitro and in vivo assays can optionally be employed to help identify optimal dosage ranges. The precise dose to be employed can also depend on the route of administration, and the seriousness of the proliferative disorder being treated and can be decided according to the judgment of the practitioner and each subject's circumstances in view of, e.g., published clinical studies. Suitable effective dosage amounts, however, can range from about 10 micrograms to about 5 grams about every 4 h, although they are typically about 500 mg or less per every 4 hours. In one embodiment the effective dosage is about 0.01 mg, 0.5 mg, about 1 mg, about 50 mg, about 100 mg, about 200 mg, about 300 mg, about 400 mg, about 500 mg, about 600 mg, about 700 mg, about 800 mg, about 900 mg, about 1 g, about 1.2 g, about 1.4 g, about 1.6 g, about 1.8 g, about 2.0 g, about 2.2 g, about 2.4 g, about 2.6 g, about 2.8 g, about 3.0 g, about 3.2 g, about 3.4 g, about 3.6 g, about 3.8 g, about 4.0 g, about 4.2 g, about 4.4 g, about 4.6 g, about 4.8 g, and about 5.0 g, every 4 hours. Equivalent dosages can be administered over various time periods including, but not limited to, about every 2 hours, about every 6 hours, about every 8 hours, about every 12 hours, about every 24 hours, about every 36 hours, about every 48 hours, about every 72 hours, about every week, about every two weeks, about every three weeks, about every month, and about every two months. The effective dosage amounts described herein refer to total amounts administered; that is, if more than one inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein is administered, the effective dosage amounts correspond to the total amount administered.
  • The dosage regimen utilizing the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be selected in accordance with a variety of factors including type, species, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the subject; the severity of the proliferative disorder to be treated; the route of administration; the renal or hepatic function of the subject; and the particular inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein employed. A person skilled in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the drug required to prevent, counter or arrest the progress of the proliferative disorder.
  • The inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be administered in a single daily dose, or the total daily dosage can be administered in divided doses of two, three or four times daily. Furthermore, the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein can be administered in intranasal form via topical use of suitable intranasal vehicles, or via transdermal routes, using those forms of transdermal skin patches well known to those of ordinary skill in that art. To be administered in the form of a transdermal delivery system, the dosage administration can be continuous rather than intermittent throughout the dosage regimen. Other illustrative topical preparations include creams, ointments, lotions, aerosol sprays and gels, wherein the concentration of the inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent described herein ranges from about 0.1% to about 15%, w/w or w/v.
  • 6. Combination
  • Depending upon the particular condition, or disease, to be treated, additional therapeutic agents, which are normally administered to treat that condition, may be administered in combination with compounds and compositions of this invention. As used herein, additional therapeutic agents that are normally administered to treat a particular disease, or condition, are known as “appropriate for the disease, or condition, being treated”. In a combination of an inhibitor described herein and additional therapeutic agent, the additional therapeutic agent is not a competitive binder for the active binding site within the target protein for the inhibitor used in the combination.
  • In certain embodiments, an inhibitor or pharmaceutically active agent provided herein, or composition thereof, is administered in combination with another pharmaceutically active agent, or a variant thereof. In some embodiments, a provided compound, or composition thereof, is administered in combination with one or more additional pharmaceutically active agent. Such additional pharmaceutically active agents include, but are not limited to, treatments for Alzheimer's Disease such as Aricept® and Excelon®; treatments for HIV such as ritonavir; treatments for Parkinson's Disease such as L-DOPA/carbidopa, entacapone, ropinrole, pramipexole, bromocriptine, pergolide, trihexephendyl, and amantadine; agents for treating Multiple Sclerosis (MS) such as beta interferon (e.g., Avonex® and Rebif®), Copaxone®, and mitoxantrone; treatments for asthma such as albuterol and Singulair®; agents for treating schizophrenia such as zyprexa, risperdal, seroquel, and haloperidol; anti-inflammatory agents such as corticosteroids, TNF blockers, IL-1 RA, azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, and sulfasalazine; immunomodulatory and immunosuppressive agents such as cyclosporin, tacrolimus, rapamycin, mycophenolate mofetil, interferons, corticosteroids, cyclophophamide, azathioprine, and sulfasalazine; neurotrophic factors such as acetylcholinesterase inhibitors, MAO inhibitors, interferons, anti-convulsants, ion channel blockers, riluzole, and anti-Parkinsonian agents; agents for treating cardiovascular disease such as beta-blockers, ACE inhibitors, diuretics, nitrates, calcium channel blockers, and statins; agents for treating liver disease such as corticosteroids, cholestyramine, interferons, and anti-viral agents; agents for treating blood disorders such as corticosteroids, anti-leukemic agents, and growth factors; agents that prolong or improve pharmacokinetics such as cytochrome P450 inhibitors (i.e., inhibitors of metabolic breakdown) and CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketokenozole and ritonavir), and agents for treating immunodeficiency disorders such as gamma globulin.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds of the present invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable composition thereof, are administered in combination with a monoclonal antibody or an siRNA therapeutic.
  • Those additional agents may be administered separately from an inventive compound-containing composition, as part of a multiple dosage regimen. Alternatively, those agents may be part of a single dosage form, mixed together with a compound of this invention in a single composition. If administered as part of a multiple dosage regime, the two active agents may be submitted simultaneously, sequentially or within a period of time from one another normally within five hours from one another.
  • As used herein, the term “combination,” “combined,” and related terms refers to the simultaneous or sequential administration of therapeutic agents in accordance with this invention. For example, a compound of the present invention may be administered with another therapeutic agent simultaneously or sequentially in separate unit dosage forms or together in a single unit dosage form. Accordingly, the present invention provides a single unit dosage form comprising a compound of the invention, an additional therapeutic agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, adjuvant, or vehicle.
  • The amount of both, an inventive compound and additional therapeutic agent (in those compositions which comprise an additional therapeutic agent as described above) that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host treated and the particular mode of administration. Preferably, compositions of this invention should be formulated so that a dosage of between 0.01-100 mg/kg body weight/day of an inventive can be administered.
  • In those compositions which comprise an additional therapeutic agent, that additional therapeutic agent and the compound of this invention may act synergistically. Therefore, the amount of additional therapeutic agent in such compositions will be less than that required in a monotherapy utilizing only that therapeutic agent. In such compositions a dosage of between 0.01-100 mg/kg body weight/day of the additional therapeutic agent can be administered.
  • The amount of additional therapeutic agent present in the compositions of this invention will be no more than the amount that would normally be administered in a composition comprising that therapeutic agent as the only active agent. Preferably the amount of additional therapeutic agent in the presently disclosed compositions will range from about 50% to 100% of the amount normally present in a composition comprising that agent as the only therapeutically active agent.
  • In some embodiments, the compositions comprise an amount of an anticancer inhibitor described herein, e.g., a XIAP inhibitor, and another anticancer agent which together are effective to treat or prevent cancer. In another embodiment, the amount of the anticancer inhibitor described herein and another anticancer agent is at least about 0.01% of the combined combination chemotherapy agents by weight of the composition. When intended for oral administration, this amount can be varied from about 0.1% to about 80% by weight of the composition. Some oral compositions can comprise from about 4% to about 50% of the anticancer inhibitor described herein and another anticancer agent. Other compositions of the present invention are prepared so that a parenteral dosage unit contains from about 0.01% to about 2% by weight of the composition.
  • The present methods for treating or preventing cancer in a subject in need thereof can further comprise administering another prophylactic or therapeutic agent to the subject being administered an anticancer inhibitor described herein. In one embodiment the other prophylactic or therapeutic agent is administered in an effective amount. The other prophylactic or therapeutic agent includes, but is not limited to, an anti-inflammatory agent, an anti-renal failure agent, an anti-diabetic agent, an anti-cardiovascular disease agent, an antiemetic agent, a hematopoietic colony stimulating factor, an anxiolytic agent, and an opioid or non-opioid analgesic agent.
  • In a further embodiment, the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after an antiemetic agent, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours or 72 hours of each other.
  • In another embodiment, the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after a hematopoietic colony stimulating factor, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks or 4 weeks of each other.
  • In still another embodiment, the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after an opioid or non-opioid analgesic agent, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours or 72 hours of each other.
  • In yet another embodiment, the anticancer inhibitor described herein can be administered prior to, concurrently with, or after an anxiolytic agent, or on the same day, or within 1 hour, 2 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours or 72 hours of each other.
  • Effective amounts of the other therapeutic agents are well known to those skilled in the art. However, it is well within the skilled artisan's purview to determine the other therapeutic agent's optimal effective amount range. In one embodiment of the invention, where, another therapeutic agent is administered to a subject, the effective amount of the anticancer inhibitor described herein is less than its effective amount would be where the other therapeutic agent is not administered. In this case, without being bound by theory, it is believed that the anticancer inhibitor described herein and the other therapeutic agent act synergistically to treat or prevent cancer.
  • Antiemetic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, metoclopromide, domperidone, prochlorperazine, promethazine, chlorpromazine, trimethobenzamide, ondansetron, granisetron, hydroxyzine, acetylleucine monoethanolamine, alizapride, azasetron, benzquinamide, bietanautine, bromopride, buclizine, clebopride, cyclizine, dimenhydrinate, diphenidol, dolasetron, meclizine, methallatal, metopimazine, nabilone, oxyperndyl, pipamazine, scopolamine, sulpiride, tetrahydrocannabinol, thiethylperazine, thioproperazine, and tropisetron.
  • Hematopoietic colony stimulating factors useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, filgrastim, sargramostim, molgramostim and epoietin alfa.
  • Opioid analgesic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, morphine, heroin, hydromorphone, hydrocodone, oxymorphone, oxycodone, metopon, apomorphine, normorphine, etorphine, buprenorphine, meperidine, lopermide, anileridine, ethoheptazine, piminidine, betaprodine, diphenoxylate, fentanil, sufentanil, alfentanil, remifentanil, levorphanol, dextromethorphan, phenazocine, pentazocine, cyclazocine, methadone, isomethadone and propoxyphene.
  • Non-opioid analgesic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, aspirin, celecoxib, rofecoxib, diclofinac, diflusinal, etodolac, fenoprofen, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, ketoprofen, indomethacin, ketorolac, meclofenamate, mefanamic acid, nabumetone, naproxen, piroxicam and sulindac.
  • Anxiolytic agents useful in the methods of the present invention include, but are not limited to, buspirone, and benzodiazepines such as diazepam, lorazepam, oxazapam, chlorazepate, clonazepam, chlordiazepoxide and alprazolam.
  • The invention encompasses kits that can simplify the administration of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site to a subject.
  • A typical kit of the invention comprises a unit dosage form of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site. In one embodiment the unit dosage form is a container, which can be sterile, containing an effective amount of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site and a physiologically acceptable carrier or vehicle. The kit can further comprise a label or printed instructions instructing the use of the ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site to treat or prevent cancer. The kit can also further comprise a unit dosage form of another prophylactic or therapeutic agent, for example, a container containing an effective amount of another prophylactic or therapeutic agent or another anticancer agent. In one embodiment the kit comprises a container containing an effective amount of a ligand that covalently binds to a target polypeptide having a lysine residue present in the active site and an effective amount of another prophylactic or therapeutic agent. Examples of other prophylactic or therapeutic agents and other anticancer agents include, but are not limited to, those listed above.
    • C. Probe Compounds
  • A compound of the present invention may be tethered to a detectable moiety. One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that a detectable moiety may be attached to a provided compound via a suitable substituent. As used herein, the term “suitable substituent” refers to a moiety that is capable of covalent attachment to a detectable moiety. Such moieties are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art and include groups containing, e.g., a carboxylate moiety, an amino moiety, a thiol moiety, or a hydroxyl moiety, to name but a few. It will be appreciated that such moieties may be directly attached to a provided compound or via a tethering group, such as a bivalent saturated or unsaturated hydrocarbon chain. In some embodiments, such moieties may be attached via click chemistry. In some embodiments, such moieties may be attached via a 1,3-cycloaddition of an azide with an alkyne, optionally in the presence of a copper catalyst. Methods of using click chemistry are known in the art and include those described by Rostovtsev et al., Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2002, 41, 2596-99 and Sun et al., Bioconjugate Chem., 2006, 17, 52-57.
  • As used herein, the term “detectable moiety” is used interchangeably with the term “label” and “reporter” and relates to any moiety capable of being detected, e.g., primary labels and secondary labels. A presence of a detectable moiety can be measured using methods for quantifying (in absolute, approximate or relative terms) the detectable moiety in a system under study. In some embodiments, such methods are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art and include any methods that quantify a reporter moiety (e.g., a label, a dye, a photocrosslinker, a cytotoxic compound, a drug, an affinity label, a photoaffinity label, a reactive compound, an antibody or antibody fragment, a biomaterial, a nanoparticle, a spin label, a fluorophore, a metal-containing moiety, a radioactive moiety, quantum dot(s), a novel functional group, a group that covalently or noncovalently interacts with other molecules, a photocaged moiety, an actinic radiation excitable moiety, a ligand, a photoisomerizable moiety, biotin, a biotin analog (e.g., biotin sulfoxide), a moiety incorporating a heavy atom, a chemically cleavable group, a photocleavable group, a redox-active agent, an isotopically labeled moiety, a biophysical probe, a phosphorescent group, a chemiluminescent group, an electron dense group, a magnetic group, an intercalating group, a chromophore, an energy transfer agent, a biologically active agent, a detectable label, and any combination of the above).
  • Nonlimiting exemplary probe compounds are as set forth below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00262
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00263
  • Primary labels, such as radioisotopes (e.g., tritium, 32P, 33P, 35S, 14C, 123I, 124I, 125I, or 131I), mass-tags including, but not limited to, stable isotopes (e.g., 13C, 2H, 17O, 18O, 15N, 19F, and 127I), positron emitting isotopes (e.g., 11C, 18F, 13N, 124I, and 15O), and fluorescent labels are signal generating reporter groups which can be detected without further modifications. Detectable moities may be analyzed by methods including, but not limited to fluorescence, positron emission tomography, SPECT medical imaging, chemiluminescence, electron-spin resonance, ultraviolet/visible absorbance spectroscopy, mass spectrometry, nuclear magnetic resonance, magnetic resonance, flow cytometry, autoradiography, scintillation counting, phosphoimaging, and electrochemical methods.
  • The term “secondary label” as used herein refers to moieties such as biotin and various protein antigens that require the presence of a second intermediate for production of a detectable signal. For biotin, the secondary intermediate may include streptavidin-enzyme conjugates. For antigen labels, secondary intermediates may include antibody-enzyme conjugates. Some fluorescent groups act as secondary labels because they transfer energy to another group in the process of nonradiative fluorescent resonance energy transfer (FRET), and the second group produces the detected signal.
  • The terms “fluorescent label”, “fluorescent dye”, and “fluorophore” as used herein refer to moieties that absorb light energy at a defined excitation wavelength and emit light energy at a different wavelength. Examples of fluorescent labels include, but are not limited to: Alexa Fluor dyes (Alexa Fluor 350, Alexa Fluor 488, Alexa Fluor 532, Alexa Fluor 546, Alexa Fluor 568, Alexa Fluor 594, Alexa Fluor 633, Alexa Fluor 660 and Alexa Fluor 680), AMCA, AMCA-S, BODIPY dyes (BODIPY FL, BODIPY R6G, BODIPY TMR, BODIPY TR, BODIPY 493/503, BODIPY 530/550, BODIPY 558/568, BODIPY 564/570, BODIPY 576/589, BODIPY 581/591, BODIPY 630/650, BODIPY 650/665), Carboxyrhodamine 6G, carboxy-X-rhodamine (ROX), Cascade Blue, Cascade Yellow, Coumarin 343, Cyanine dyes (Cy3, Cy5, Cy3.5, Cy5.5), Dansyl, Dapoxyl, Dialkylaminocoumarin, 4′,5′-Dichloro-2′,7′-dimethoxy-fluorescein, DM-NERF, Eosin, Erythrosin, Fluorescein, FAM, Hydroxycoumarin, IRDyes (IRD40, IRD 700, IRD 800), JOE, Lissamine rhodamine B, Marina Blue, Methoxycoumarin, Naphthofluorescein, Oregon Green 488, Oregon Green 500, Oregon Green 514, Pacific Blue, PyMPO, Pyrene, Rhodamine B, Rhodamine 6G, Rhodamine Green, Rhodamine Red, Rhodol Green, 2′,4′,5′,7′-Tetra-bromosulfone-fluorescein, Tetramethyl-rhodamine (TMR), Carboxytetramethylrhodamine (TAMRA), Texas Red, Texas Red-X, 5(6)-Carboxyfluorescein, 2,7-Dichlorofluorescein, N,N-Bis(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)-3, 4:9, 10-perylenebis(dicarboximide, HPTS, Ethyl Eosin, DY-490XL MegaStokes, DY-485XL MegaStokes, Adirondack Green 520, ATTO 465, ATTO 488, ATTO 495, YOYO-1,5-FAM, BCECF, dichlorofluorescein, rhodamine 110, rhodamine 123, YO-PRO-1, SYTOX Green, Sodium Green, SYBR Green I, Alexa Fluor 500, FITC, Fluo-3, Fluo-4, fluoro-emerald, YoYo-1 ssDNA, YoYo-1 dsDNA, YoYo-1, SYTO RNASelect, Diversa Green-FP, Dragon Green, EvaGreen, Surf Green EX, Spectrum Green, NeuroTrace 500525, NBD-X, MitoTracker Green FM, LysoTracker Green DND-26, CBQCA, PA-GFP (post-activation), WEGFP (post-activation), FLASH-CCXXCC, Azami Green monomeric, Azami Green, green fluorescent protein (GFP), EGFP (Campbell Tsien 2003), EGFP (Patterson 2001), Kaede Green, 7-Benzylamino-4-Nitrobenz-2-Oxa-1,3-Diazole, Bex1, Doxorubicin, Lumio Green, and SuperGlo GFP.
  • The term “mass-tag” as used herein refers to any moiety that is capable of being uniquely detected by virtue of its mass using mass spectrometry (MS) detection techniques. Examples of mass-tags include electrophore release tags such as N-[3-[4′-[(p-Methoxytetrafluorobenzyl)oxy]phenyl]-3-methylglyceronyl]isonipecotic Acid, 4′-[2,3,5,6-Tetrafluoro-4-(pentafluorophenoxyl)]methyl acetophenone, and their derivatives. The synthesis and utility of these mass-tags is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,650,750, 4,709,016, 5,360,8191, 5,516,931, 5,602,273, 5,604,104, 5,610,020, and 5,650,270. Other examples of mass-tags include, but are not limited to, nucleotides, dideoxynucleotides, oligonucleotides of varying length and base composition, oligopeptides, oligosaccharides, and other synthetic polymers of varying length and monomer composition. A large variety of organic molecules, both neutral and charged (biomolecules or synthetic compounds) of an appropriate mass range (100-2000 Daltons) may also be used as mass-tags. Stable isotopes (e.g., 13C, 2H, 17O, 18O, and 15N) may also be used as mass-tags.
  • The term “chemiluminescent group,” as used herein, refers to a group which emits light as a result of a chemical reaction without the addition of heat. By way of example, luminol (5-amino-2,3-dihydro-1,4-phthalazinedione) reacts with oxidants like hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) in the presence of a base and a metal catalyst to produce an excited state product (3-aminophthalate, 3-APA).
  • The term “chromophore,” as used herein, refers to a molecule which absorbs light of visible wavelengths, UV wavelengths or IR wavelengths.
  • The term “dye,” as used herein, refers to a soluble, coloring substance which contains a chromophore.
  • The term “electron dense group,” as used herein, refers to a group which scatters electrons when irradiated with an electron beam. Such groups include, but are not limited to, ammonium molybdate, bismuth subnitrate, cadmium iodide, carbohydrazide, ferric chloride hexahydrate, hexamethylene tetramine, indium trichloride anhydrous, lanthanum nitrate, lead acetate trihydrate, lead citrate trihydrate, lead nitrate, periodic acid, phosphomolybdic acid, phosphotungstic acid, potassium ferricyanide, potassium ferrocyanide, ruthenium red, silver nitrate, silver proteinate (Ag Assay: 8.0-8.5%) “Strong”, silver tetraphenylporphin (S-TPPS), sodium chloroaurate, sodium tungstate, thallium nitrate, thiosemicarbazide (TSC), uranyl acetate, uranyl nitrate, and vanadyl sulfate.
  • The term “energy transfer agent,” as used herein, refers to a molecule which either donates or accepts energy from another molecule. By way of example only, fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET) is a dipole-dipole coupling process by which the excited-state energy of a fluorescence donor molecule is non-radiatively transferred to an unexcited acceptor molecule which then fluorescently emits the donated energy at a longer wavelength.
  • The term “moiety incorporating a heavy atom,” as used herein, refers to a group which incorporates an ion of atom which is usually heavier than carbon. In some embodiments, such ions or atoms include, but are not limited to, silicon, tungsten, gold, lead, and uranium.
  • The term “photoaffinity label,” as used herein, refers to a label with a group, which, upon exposure to light, forms a linkage with a molecule for which the label has an affinity.
  • The term “photocaged moiety,” as used herein, refers to a group which, upon illumination at certain wavelengths, covalently or non-covalently binds other ions or molecules.
  • The term “photoisomerizable moiety,” as used herein, refers to a group wherein upon illumination with light changes from one isomeric form to another.
  • The term “radioactive moiety,” as used herein, refers to a group whose nuclei spontaneously give off nuclear radiation, such as alpha, beta, or gamma particles; wherein, alpha particles are helium nuclei, beta particles are electrons, and gamma particles are high energy photons.
  • The term “spin label,” as used herein, refers to molecules which contain an atom or a group of atoms exhibiting an unpaired electron spin (i.e. a stable paramagnetic group) that in some embodiments are detected by electron spin resonance spectroscopy and in other embodiments are attached to another molecule. Such spin-label molecules include, but are not limited to, nitryl radicals and nitroxides, and in some embodiments are single spin-labels or double spin-labels.
  • The term “quantum dots,” as used herein, refers to colloidal semiconductor nanocrystals that in some embodiments are detected in the near-infrared and have extremely high quantum yields (i.e., very bright upon modest illumination).
  • One of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that a detectable moiety may be attached to a provided compound via a suitable substituent. As used herein, the term “suitable substituent” refers to a moiety that is capable of covalent attachment to a detectable moiety. Such moieties are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art and include groups containing, e.g., a carboxylate moiety, an amino moiety, a thiol moiety, or a hydroxyl moiety, to name but a few. It will be appreciated that such moieties may be directly attached to a provided compound or via a tethering moiety, such as a bivalent saturated or unsaturated hydrocarbon chain.
  • In some embodiments, detectable moieties are attached to a provided compound via click chemistry. In some embodiments, such moieties are attached via a 1,3-cycloaddition of an azide with an alkyne, optionally in the presence of a copper catalyst. Methods of using click chemistry are known in the art and include those described by Rostovtsev et al., Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2002, 41, 2596-99 and Sun et al., Bioconjugate Chem., 2006, 17, 52-57. In some embodiments, a click ready inhibitor moiety is provided and reacted with a click ready -Tp-Rp moiety. As used herein, “click ready” refers to a moiety containing an azide or alkyne for use in a click chemistry reaction. In some embodiments, the click ready inhibitor moiety comprises an azide. In certain embodiments, the click ready -Tp-Rp moiety comprises a strained cyclooctyne for use in a copper-free click chemistry reaction (for example, using methods described in Baskin et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 2007, 104, 16793-16797).
  • 9. Exemplification
  • The disclosure is further illustrated by the following examples, which are not to be construed as limiting this disclosure in scope or spirit to the specific procedures herein described. It is to be understood that the examples are provided to illustrate certain embodiments and that no limitation to the scope of the disclosure is intended thereby. It is to be further understood that resort may be had to various other embodiments, modifications, and equivalents thereof which may suggest themselves to those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit of the present disclosure and/or scope of the appended claims.
    • A. Design of an Irreversible Inhibitor of XIAP Example 1
  • (3S,6S,10aR)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-((R)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalen-1-yl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide (Compound A) is a reversible inhibitor of XIAP (Ki 26 nM) (Sun et al., J. Med. Chem. 52, 593-596 (2009). Using the structure-based design algorithm described herein, Compound A was converted from a reversible inhibitor into Compound VII-1, a potent and irreversible inhibitor of XIAP. The process for the conversion of Compound A to Compound VII-1 is described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00264
  • The X-ray crystal structure of XIAP complexed with Compound B, a related compound to Compound A, has been reported (Sun, H., et al., J. Med. Chem. 51, 7169-7180 (2008)) and was obtained from the protein databank (pdbcode 2JK7 at www.resb.org). The X-ray complex of Compound B bound to XIAP was used to
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00265
  • design covalent inhibitors of XIAP using the design algorithm described herein. The three-dimensional structure of Compound B was docked into the XIAP ligand-binding site using the CDOCKER method in Discovery Studio (www.accelrys.com). The ligand-binding site of XIAP was defined using the sphere that has a 7.5 angstroms radius around the reference ligand. The docking results demonstrated that the inhibitor Compound A, bound to XIAP in a similar fashion to that seen in the X-ray complex of Compound B bound to XIAP. After docking Compound B in the ligand-binding site of XIAP, all lysine residues (Lys) of XIAP within 15 angstroms in the XIAP-Compound B complex were identified: Lys281, Lys297, Lys299, Lys311, Lys322, Lys328 and Lys334.
  • Using the modeled coordinates of Compound A, a library of virtual covalent inhibitors was created by building an acrylamide warhead at each of the A1 (ortho-, meta- and para-), A2 and A3 positions shown below in Template X.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00266
  • To sample the flexibility of the warheads and the side chain positions, a molecular dynamics simulation of the warheads and XIAP side chain positions was performed and analyzed to determine if the warhead was within 6 angstroms of any of the Lys residues in the binding site. Additionally, an analysis of possible steric clashes between the warheads and the residues was performed. Standard settings were used in the Standard Dynamics Cascade Simulations protocol of Discovery Studio, along with Merck Molecular Force Field, for the molecular dynamics simulations (www.accelrys.com). The coordinates of the non-warhead positions and the Lys main-chain atoms were held fixed during the molecular dynamics simulation. The modeling demonstrated that the VII-1 (A1=meta-substituted acrylamide) was close to Lys297 and also Lys299 in XIAP. To confirm that VII-1 was able to form a bond with either of these Lys residues, a model of the reaction product between XIAP and Lys297 or Lys299 was built. In both cases, the reaction product could be formed without any significant change in the geometry of the model, thereby supporting bond formation.
  • Subsequently, VII-1 was synthesized and inhibited XIAP at a Ki of 161 nM, (see Table 2 below), while Compound VII-2, an inactive control compound demonstrated a Ki of >10,000 nM. Mass spectrometric analysis of the reaction product of VII-1 incubated with XIAP demonstrates that VII-1 covalently modifies XIAP (see Examples 50 and 51, below).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00267
    • B. XIAP Inhibitors Synthetic Examples Example 1A
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00268
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-acrylamidobenzyl)-6-(S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00269
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00270
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00271
    • (S)-2-benzyl 1-tert-butyl 5-oxopyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate (1a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00272
  • To a stirred solution of L-pyroglutamic acid (75 g, 0.58 mol) and N,N-diisopropyl-ethylamine (87.3 g, 0.676 mol) in dry dichloromethane (1.0 L) at 0° C. was added benzyl bromide (98.84 g, 0.58 mol) dropwise. The reaction mixture was heated under reflux for 5 h, cooled to RT and washed with aqueous NaH2PO4. The aqueous layer was extracted with CH2Cl2; the combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue obtained was then taken in acetonitrile (1.5 L) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (7.09 g, 58.0 mmol) and Boc-anhydride (150.0 g, 0.688 mol) were added and stirred at RT for 3 hrs. The reaction mixture was concentrated; the residue obtained was treated with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate layer was washed with aqueous NaH2PO4 and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give pale yellow viscous oil. It was crystallized with ethyl acetate-petroleum ether to give 1a (150 g, 80.8%) as a pale yellow solid.
    • (2S)-2-benzyl 1-tert-butyl 5-hydroxypyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate (1b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00273
  • To a stirred solution of 1a (100.0 g, 313.1 mmol) in THF (1000 mL) at −78° C. under nitrogen was added Super Hydride® (1M in THF, 469 mL, 469 mmol) slowly and the mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 2 h. Saturated aq. sodium hydrogen carbonate (300 mL) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min. The reaction mixture was concentrated to remove most of THF and the residue was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to get 1b (100 g, 99.3%) as colorless oil. It was taken for the next step without further purification.
    • (2S)-2-benzyl 1-tert-butyl 5-methoxypyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate (1c)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00274
  • To a stirred solution of 1b (100 g, 311.1 mmol) in methanol (1000 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (5.89 g, 30.96 mmol) and stirred at RT for 16 h. Sat. sodium hydrogen carbonate solution (500 mL) was added and then concentrated under reduced pressure to remove most of methanol. The residue was extracted with MTBE and the combined MTBE extract was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to get 1c (88 g, 84.3%) as colorless oil. It was taken for the next step without further purification.
    • (2S)-2-benzyl 1-tert-butyl 5-allylpyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate (1d)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00275
  • To a stirred solution of 1c (25 g, 74.4 mmol) in dichloromethane (250 mL) at −78° C. was added borontrifluoride-diethyletherate (9.2 mL, 74.5 mmol) slowly and the solution was stirred at −78° C. for 1 h. Allytributylstannane (28 mL, 90.3 mmol) was added slowly and the reaction mixture was stirred further at −78° C. for 3 h. De-ionized water (300 mL) was added and the solution was allowed to warm to RT. It was filtered through Celite, layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane. The combined organic extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to get the crude. The crude product obtained was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, ethyl acetate: petroleum ether, 8:92) to get 1d (15 g, 58.3%) as colorless oil.
    • (2S)-benzyl 5-allylpyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (1e)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00276
  • To a stirred solution of 1d (30 g, 86.7 mmol) in dichloromethane (300 mL) at 0° C. was added trifluoroacetic acid (45 mL) slowly and the solution was stirred at RT for 2 h under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue obtained was taken in dichloromethane-water (2:1, 150 mL), stirred vigorously and triethylamine (50 mL, 356.4 mmol) was added. Stirring was continued at RT for 2 h. The phases were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with dichloromethane. The combined organic extracts were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to get 1e (20 g, 93.9%) as a pale yellow oil and was taken for the next step without further purification.
    • (2S)-benzyl 5-allyl-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)pent-4-enoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (1f)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00277
  • To a stirred solution of 1e (11 g, 44.9 mmol) in DMF (110 mL) were added (S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)pent-4-enoic acid (9.65 g, 44.9 mmol), EDC.HCl (12.87 g, 67.35 mmol), HOBt (2.42 g, 17.96 mmol) and DIPEA (11.63 mL, 67.35 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h under nitrogen atmosphere. It was diluted with cold water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to get a residue. The crude product obtained was mixed with the crude obtained from another similar batch and purified by column chromatography (SiO2, 15-20% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to get 1f (25 g, 62.9%) as a pale yellow oil.
    • (3S,6S,10aR,Z)-benzyl 6-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-5-oxo-1,2,3,5,6,7,10,10a-octahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxylate (1g)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00278
  • To a solution of 1f (25 g, 56.49 mmol) in dichloromethane (500 mL) was added bis(tricyclohexylphosphine)benzylideneruthenium(IV) dichloride (Grubbs' catalyst) (9.3 g, 11.29 mmol) and stirred at reflux for 24 h. Cooled to RT, concentrated under reduced pressure, the residue was taken in MTBE and filtered through Celite, filtrate concentrated under reduced pressure to get 1g (50 g) as dark green residue. It was taken for the next step without further purification.
    • (3S,6S,10aR,Z)-benzyl 6-amino-5-oxo-1,2,3,5,6,7,10,10a-octahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxylate (1h)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00279
  • To a stirred solution of 1g (˜50 g, crude) in dichloromethane (500 mL) at 0° C. was added trifluoroacetic acid (50 mL) slowly and the solution was stirred at RT for 2 h under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue obtained was taken up in water. It was washed with MTBE; the aqueous layer was basified with 10% NaOH solution and extracted with ethyl acetate. Combined ethyl acetate extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to get 1h (9 g, 50.7% yield in two steps) as yellow oil which was found to be sufficiently pure.
    • (3S,6S,10aR,Z)-benzyl 6-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino)propanamido)-5-oxo-1,2,3,5,6,7,10,10a-octahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxylate (1i)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00280
  • To a stirred solution of 1h (7.3 g, 23.22 mmol) in dichloromethane (150 mL) were added (R)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino)propanoic acid (4.71 g, 23.22 mmol), EDC.HCl (6.59 g, 34.5 mmol), HOBt (1.55 g, 11.5 mmol) and DIPEA (5.96 mL, 34.5 mmol) and stirred at room temperature for 18 h under nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue obtained was taken up in water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were washed with water and brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to get a residue. It was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, 1-2% methanol in chloroform) to get 1i (10 g, 86.2%) as a pale oil.
    • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxylic acid (1j)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00281
  • To a solution of 1i (2.5 g, 5.01 mmol) in ethanol (100 mL) was added 10% palladium on carbon (1.0 g) and stirred at RT for 6 h using a hydrogen balloon. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to get a residue. It was dissolved in dichloromethane and filtered through Celite to remove any undissolved material and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to get 1j (1.8 g, 87.8%) as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): □=1.21 (d, J=7.16 Hz, 3H), 1.39 (s, 9H), 1.53-1.92 (m, 10H), 1.99-2.10 (m, 1H), 2.18-2.28 (m, 1H), 2.73 (s, 3H), 4.16-4.24 (m, 2H), 4.33-4.75 (m, 2H), 7.76 (d, J=7 Hz, 1H), 12.45 (brs, 1H).
    • tert-butyl (S)-1-(3S,6S,10aS)-3-(3-aminobenzylcarbamoyl)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocin-6-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (1k)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00282
  • A mixture of 1j (488 mg), 3-aminobenzylamine (173 mg), EDC.HCl (272 mg), HOBt (192 mg), N-methylmorpholine (0.39 mL) in acetonitrile (16 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After concentrating under reduced pressure, the residue was directly purified by column chromatography (SiO2, isopropanol: dichloromethane, 7:93) to afford 420 mg of the desired aniline 1k as white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): □=7.08 (m, 2H), 6.59 (m, 3 H), 4.88 (m, 1H), 4.55 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 4.34 (ddd, J=2.8, 6.0, 14.7 Hz, 2H), 4.18 (t, J=10.0 Hz, 1H), 2.79 (s, 2H), 2.5 (m, 1H), 2.1-1.4 (m), 1.48 (s, 9H), 1.32 (d, J=7.3 Hz, 3H); LCMS: m/e 516.3 (M+1).
    • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-acrylamidobenzyl)-6-(S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide (VII-1)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00283
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (60 mg) and triethylamine (80 μl) in dry dichloromethane (2 mL) was added acryloyl chloride (19 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid (VII-1) as TFA salt. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): □=10.1 (s, 1H), 8.70 (m, 2H), 8.47 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (s, 1H), 7.50 (d, J=9.2 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (t, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 6.98 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (dd, J=10.1, 14.6 Hz, 1H), 6.23 (dd, J=2.3, 17.0 Hz, 1H), 5.72 (dd, J=2.3 Hz, 10.1 Hz, 1H), 4.78 (m, 1H), 4.31 (m, 2H), 4.17 (m, 2H), 3.7-1.3 (m), 1.31 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 3H); LCMS: m/e 470.2 (M+1).
    • Example 2
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00284
  • tert-Butyl (S)-1-(3S,6S,10aS)-3-(3-acrylamidobenzylcarbamoyl)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocin-6-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl(methyl)carbamate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (60 mg) and triethylamine (80 μl) in dry dichloromethane (2 mL) was added acryloyl chloride (19 μl) dropwise at 0° C. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid. LCMS: m/e 470.3 (M+1-tBu).
    • Example 3
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00285
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (19.8 mg), (S)-5-oxo-2-tetrahydrofurancarboxylic acid (6 mg), EDC.HCl (12 mg), HOBt (9 mg), N-methylmorpholine (20 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 4
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00286
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((S)-4-oxoazetidine-2-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (24.5 mg), (S)-4-oxo-2-azetidinecarboxylic acid (6.6 mg), EDC.HCl (12 mg), HOBt (9 mg), N-methylmorpholine (20 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 513.3 (M+1).
    • Example 5
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00287
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-(2-isopropoxy-3,4-dioxocyclobut-1-enylamino)benzyl)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (37.7 mg), 3,4-diisopropyl-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione (16 mg), triethylamine (20 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 554.2 (M+1).
    • Example 6
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00288
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(3-oxobutanamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (20 mg), 2,2,4-trimethyl-6-keto-1,3-dioxin (10 μl) in dioxane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at 80° C. The mixture was concentrated and diluted with dichloromethane (1 mL). Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 500.3 (M+1).
    • Example 7
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00289
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(4,4,4-trifluoro-3-oxobutanamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (12 mg), ethyl 4,4,4-trifluoroacetoacetate (100 μl) in toluene (1 mL) was stirred for 2 h at 80° C. The mixture was concentrated and diluted with dichloromethane (1 mL). Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 554.2 (M+1).
    • Example 8
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00290
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-((E)-4-(dimethylamino)but-2-enamido)benzyl)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (12.7 mg) and diisopropylethylamine (100 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added (E)-4-(dimethylamino)but-2-enoyl chloride (20 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 527.3 (M+1).
    • Example 9
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00291
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-methacrylamidobenzyl)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (10 mg) and diisopropylethylamine (50 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added methacryloyl chloride (20 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 484.4 (M+1).
    • Example 10
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00292
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-N-(3-(3-methylbut-2-enamido)benzyl)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (10 mg) and diisopropylethylamine (50 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added 3-methylbut-2-enoyl chloride (20 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 498.3 (M+1).
    • Example 11
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00293
  • VII-16 was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (13.2 mg), acrylic acid-d4 (1.7 μl), EDC.HCl (8 mg), HOBt (6 mg), N-methylmorpholine (13 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 473.2 (M+1).
    • Example 12
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00294
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (8.1 mg), (R)-5-oxo-2-tetrahydrofurancarboxylic acid (2.4 mg), EDC.HCl (5 mg), HOBt (4 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 13
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00295
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(vinylsulfonamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (30 mg) and diisopropylethylamine (50 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added 2-chloro-1-ethanesulfonyl chloride (5 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 30 min at 0° C. to rt, trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 506.2 (M+1).
    • Example 14
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00296
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((4R)-4,7,7-trimethyl-3-oxo-2-oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-1-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (8.0 mg), (1S)-(−)-camphanic acid (6.0 mg), EDC.HCl (8 mg), HOBt (6 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred 2 days at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 596.4 (M+1).
    • Example 15
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00297
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((4S)-4,7,7-trimethyl-3-oxo-2-oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-1-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (8.1 mg), (1R)-(+)-camphanic acid (12 mg), EDC.HCl (16 mg), HOBt (12 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred 3 days at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 596.3 (M+1).
    • Example 16
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00298
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-(1-acetylcyclopropanecarboxamido)benzyl)-6-0S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (14.2 mg), 1-acetylcyclopropanecarboxylic acid (10 mg), HATU (20 mg), diisopropylethylamine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 526.3 (M+1).
    • Example 17
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00299
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((S)-5-oxopyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (8 mg), (S)-2-pyrrolidine-5-carboxylic acid (5 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), diisopropylethylamine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 527.2 (M+1).
    • Example 18
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00300
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((R)-5-oxopyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (8 mg), (R)-2-pyrrlidine-5-carboxylic acid (5 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOB t (7 mg), diisopropylethylamine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 527.2 (M+1).
    • Example 19
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00301
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (8 mg), 2-oxo-3-tetrahydrofurancarboxylic acid (10 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), diisopropylethylamine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 20
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00302
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (8 mg), 2-oxo-4-tetrahydrofurancarboxylic acid (10 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), diisopropylethylamine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 21
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00303
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((R)-4-oxoazetidine-2-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 1k (16 mg), (R)-4-oxo-2-azetidinecarboxylic acid (12 mg), EDC.HCl (20 mg), HOBt (14 mg), disoppropylethylamine (20 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 513.3 (M+1).
    • Example 22
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00304
  • tert-butyl (S)-1-03S,6S,10aS)-3-(3-(2,4-dioxopentan-3-yl)benzylcarbamoyl)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocin-6-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl(methyl)carbamate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • A mixture of 1j (250 mg), 3-iodobenzylamine (97 ul), EDC.HCl (152 mg), HOBt (99 mg), N-methylmorpholine (0.20 mL) in acetonitrile (10 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After concentrating under reduced pressure, the residue was directly purified by column chromatography (SiO2, isopropanol: dichloromethane, 7:93) to afford 300 mg of the desired iodide. LCMS: m/e 527.2 (M+1-tBu).
  • To the prepared iodide (32 mg) in DMSO (1 mL) were added copper iodide (1.0 mg), L-proline (1.2 mg), cesium carbonate (66 mg) and acetyl acetone (10 ul) and stirred at 90° C. for 2 h. The reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a solid. LCMS: m/e 499.2 (M+1-tBu).
    • Example 23
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00305
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-(2,4-dioxopentan-3-yl)benzyl)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To the tert-butyl (S)-1-((3S,6S,10aS)-3-(3-(2,4-dioxopentan-3-yl)benzylcarbamoyl)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocin-6-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl(methyl)carbamate (VII-7) (7 mg) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 499.2 (M+1).
    • Example 24
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00306
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((S)-2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-ylcarbamoyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00307
    • (S)-tert-butyl 3-(2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-ylcarbamoyl)benzylcarbamate (2a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00308
  • A mixture of 3-((tert-butoxycarbonylamino)methyl)benzoic acid (100 mg), (S)-3-aminodihydrofuran-2(3H)-one hydrochloride (55 mg), EDC.HCl (92 mg), HOBt (64 mg), N-methylmorpholine (0.13 mL) in acetonitrile (2 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After concentrating under reduced pressure, the residue was directly purified by column chromatography (SiO2, heptane:ethyl acetate, 10:90) to afford 120 mg of the desired aniline 2a as white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): □=7.7-7.2 (m, 6H), 5.21 (s, 1H), 4.96 (m, 1H), 4.54 (t, J=9.2 Hz, 1H), 4.32 (m, 3H), 2.86 (m, 1H), 2.31 (m, 1H), 1.47 (s, 9H).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00309
    • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((S)-2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-ylcarbamoyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide
  • To a lactone 2a (40 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue 2b in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (12 mg), EDC.HCl (5.6 mg), HOBt (4.3 mg), N-methylmorpholine (9.6 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid VII-13 as TFA salt. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): □=8.95 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1 H), 8.75 (m, 2H), 8.70 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 8.55 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (m, 2H), 7.44 (m, 2H), 4.76 (m, 2H), 4.43-4.15 (m, 5H), 3.80 (q, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 2.5-1.4 (m), 1.31 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H); LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 25
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00310
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(6-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-carboxamido)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-(6-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-carboxamido)benzylcarbamate (20 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (12 mg), EDC.HCl (20 mg), HOBt (14 mg), N-methylmorpholine (20 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 542.3 (M+1).
    • Example 26
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00311
  • 4,4-dimethyl-2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-yl 3-(((3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamido)methyl)benzoate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a 4,4-dimethyl-2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-yl 3-((tert-butoxycarbonylamino)methyl)benzoate (40 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (12 mg), EDC.HCl (5.6 mg), HOBt (4.3 mg), N-methylmorpholine (9.6 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 557.3 (M+1).
    • Example 27
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00312
  • 2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-yl 3-(((3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamido)methyl)benzoate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a 2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-yl 3-((tert-butoxycarbonylamino)methyl)benzoate (40 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (12 mg), EDC.HCl (5.6 mg), HOBt (4.3 mg), N-methylmorpholine (9.6 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 529.3 (M+1).
    • Example 28
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00313
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-yloxy)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To 3-(3-(aminomethyl)phenoxy)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one (10 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (12 mg), EDC.HCl (5.6 mg), HOBt (4.3 mg), N-methylmorpholine (9.6 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 501.3 (M+1).
    • Example 29
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00314
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-N-(3-(acrylamidomethyl)benzyl)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To 1,3-phenylenedimethanamine (0.1 mL) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (12 mg), EDC.HCl (5.6 mg), HOBt (4.3 mg), N-methylmorpholine (9.6 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. At 0° C., acryloyl chloride was added and stirred for 10 min at 0° C. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 484.3 (M+1).
    • Example 30
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00315
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-N-(3-(3-methylbut-2-enoyl)benzyl)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-(3-methylbut-2-enoyl)benzylcarbamate (40 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (28 mg), EDC.HCl (17.3 mg), HOBt (12.2 mg), N-methylmorpholine (25 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 483.3 (M+1).
    • Example 31
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00316
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carbonyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carbonyl)benzylcarbamate (55 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (28 mg), EDC.HCl (17.3 mg), HOBt (12.2 mg), N-methylmorpholine (25 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 540.3 (M+1). VII-20
    • Example 32
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00317
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-ylcarbamoyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a (S)-tert-butyl 3-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-ylcarbamoyl)benzylcarbamate (20 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (20 mg), EDC.HCl (17.3 mg), HOBt (12.2 mg), N-methylmorpholine (50 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 33
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00318
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carbonyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carbonyl)benzylcarbamate (30 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (11.5 mg), EDC.HCl (17 mg), HOBt (12 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 540.3 (M+1).
    • Example 34
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00319
  • (3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((R)-2-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-ylcarbamoyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a (R)-tert-butyl 3-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-3-ylcarbamoyl)benzylcarbamate (37 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (17.3 mg), HOBt (12.2 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 35
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00320
  • 3-(((3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxodecahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamido)methyl)benzyl 3-oxobutanoate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To (3-(aminomethyl)phenyl)methanol (10 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (13.7 mg), EDC.HCl (7 mg), HOBt (5.0 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) and the resulting mixture was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier). To a mixture of the isolated product (5 mg), 2,2,4-trimethyl-6-keto-1,3-dioxin (10 μl) in dimethoxyethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at 80° C. The mixture was concentrated and diluted with dichloromethane (1 mL). Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 515.2 (M+1).
    • Example 36
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00321
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(2-oxomorpholine-4-carbonyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-(2-oxomorpholine-4-carbonyl)benzylcarbamate (20 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 528.3 (M+1).
    • Example 37
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00322
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)methyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a (S)-tert-butyl 3-((5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)methyl)benzylcarbamate (10 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 542.3 (M+1).
    • Example 38
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00323
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(((R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)methyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a (R)-tert-butyl 3-((5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)methyl)benzylcarbamate (10 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 542.3 (M+1).
    • Example 39
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00324
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(((R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methylcarbamoyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a (R)-tert-butyl 3-((5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methylcarbamoyl)benzylcarbamate (20 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (20 mg), HOBt (14 mg), N-methylmorpholine (20 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 542.3 (M+1).
    • Example 40
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00325
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methylcarbamoyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a (S)-tert-butyl 3-((5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-yl)methylcarbamoyl)benzylcarbamate (20 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (20 mg), HOBt (14 mg), N-methylmorpholine (20 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 542.3 (M+1).
    • Example 41
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00326
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane-5-carbonyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane-5-carbonyl)benzylcarbamate (20 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (20 mg), HOBt (14 mg), N-methylmorpholine (20 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 544.3 (M+1).
    • Example 42
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00327
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-((1S)-7-oxo-6-oxa-2-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane-2-carbonyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-((1R,5S)-7-oxo-6-oxa-2-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane-2-carbonyl)benzylcarbamate (18 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (20 mg), HOBt (14 mg), N-methylmorpholine (20 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 554.3 (M+1).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00328
    • Example 43
  • 3S,6S,10aS)-6-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)-5-oxo-N-(3-(7-oxo-6-oxa-2-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane-2-carbonyl)benzyl)decahydropyrrolo[1,2-a]azocine-3-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a tert-butyl 3-((1S,5R)-7-oxo-6-oxa-2-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octane-2-carbonyl)benzylcarbamate (9.0 mg) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the reaction mixture was completely concentrated under reduced pressure. To this residue in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) were added 1j (10 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), N-methylmorpholine (10 μl) and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. Trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 554.3 (M+1).
    • Example 44
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00329
  • (S)-N-(3-acrylamidobenzyl)-1-(S)-3,3-dimethyl-2-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00330
    • (S)-benzyl 1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (3a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00331
  • A mixture of proline benzyl ester (1.0 g), Boc-Tle-OH (1.05 g), HATU (1.73 g), diisopropylethylamine (0.5 mL) in DMF (10 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After concentrating under reduced pressure, the residue was partitioned into EtOAc and saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The residue was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, heptane:ethyl acetate, 60:40) to afford the desired 3a as white solid. LCMS: m/e 319.1 (M+1-tBu).
    • (S)-benzyl 1-((S)-2-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylmethyl)amino)propanamido)-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (3b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00332
  • To 3a (110 mg) in dry dichloromethane (2 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. To the residue in dry dichloromethane (3 mL) was treated with Boc-N-Me-Ala-OH (59 mg), EDC.HCl (61 mg), HOBt (39 mg), diisopropylethylamine (0.10 mL), and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. The reaction mixture was partitioned into EtOAc and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The residue was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, heptane:ethyl acetate, 40:60) to give the desired 3b as colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): □=7.34 (m, 5H), 5.19 (d, J=11.9 Hz, 1H), 5.12 (d, J=11.9 Hz, 1H), 4.7 (m, 1 H), 4.61 (d, J=14.0 Hz, 1H), 4.57 (m, 1H), 3.86 (m, 1H), 3.69 (m, 1H), 2.79 (s, 3H), 2.22 (m, 1H), 1.97 (m, 2H), 1.48 (s, 9H), 1.35 (m, 1H), 0.98 (s, 9H); LCMS: m/e 404.3 (M+1-tBu).
    • tert-butyl (S)-1-(S)-1-(S)-2-(3-aminobenzylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)-methyl)carbamate (3c)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00333
  • Benzyl ester 3b (100 mg) in dry methanol (10 mL) was hydrogenated in the presence of palladium on carbon (10%, wet type) for 2 h. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. To the residue in dry dichloromethane (3 mL) was treated with 3-aminobenzylamine (30 mg), EDC.HCl (61 mg), HOBt (39 mg), diisopropylethylamine (0.10 mL), and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. The reaction mixture was partitioned into EtOAc and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The residue was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, dichloromethane:isopropanol, 90:10) to give the desired 3c as colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): LCMS: m/e 418.2 (M+1-tBu).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00334
    • S)-N-(3-acrylamidobenzyl)-1-((S)-3,3-dimethyl-2-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide
  • To a mixture of the aniline 3c (14 mg) and triethylamine (20 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added acryloyl chloride (10 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid 4 as TFA salt. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): □=10.0 (s, 1H), 8.75 (m, 2H), 8.53 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 8.37 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 7.45 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 6.38 (dd, J=10.1, 16.9 Hz, 1H), 6.19 (dd, J=2.3, 16.9 Hz, 1H), 5.69 (dd, J=2.3 Hz, 10.1 Hz, 1H), 4.46 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 4.29 (m, 1H), 4.19 (m, 1H), 3.87 (m, 1H), 3.65 (m, 2H), 2.04 (m, 1H), 1.93 (m, 1H), 1.78 (m, 2H), 1.25 (d, J=6.9 Hz, 3H), 0.95 (s, 9H); LCMS: m/e 472.2 (M+1).
    • Example 45
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00335
  • tert-butyl (S)-1-((S)-1-((S)-2-(3-acrylamidobenzylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl(methyl)carbamate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 3c (14 mg) and triethylamine (20 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added acryloyl chloride (10 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid 4. LCMS: m/e 472.2 (M+1-tBu).
    • Example 46
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00336
  • (S)-1-((S)-3,3-dimethyl-2-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)butanoyl)-N-(3-((R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)benzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 3c (12 mg), (R)-5-oxo-2-tetrahydrofurancarboxylic acid (6 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), diisopropylethylamine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 530.3 (M+1).
    • Example 47
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00337
  • (S)-1-((S)-3,3-dimethyl-2-0S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)butanoyl)-N-(3-((R)-4-oxoazetidine-2-carboxamido)benzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 3c (12 mg), (R)-4-oxo-2-azetidinecarboxylic acid (6 mg), EDC.HCl (10 mg), HOBt (7 mg), diisopropylethylamine (10 μl) in dichloromethane (1 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 515.3 (M+1).
    • Example 48
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00338
  • (S)-1-((S)-3-acrylamido-2-0S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)propanoyl)-N-(3-acrylamidobenzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00339
    • (S)-benzyl 1-((S)-3-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)propanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (4a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00340
  • A mixture of proline benzyl ester (0.66 g), Boc-Dap(Z)-OH (1.1 g), EDC.HCl (0.58 g), HOBt (370 mg), diisopropylethylamine (1.0 mL), in DCM (10 mL) was stirred overnight at RT. After concentrating under reduced pressure, the residue was partitioned into EtOAc and saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The residue was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, heptane:ethyl acetate, 60:40) to afford the desired 4a as white foam. LCMS: m/e 426.2 (M+1-tBu).
    • (S)-benzyl 1-((S)-3-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-2-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino)propanamido)propanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylate (4b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00341
  • To 4a (1.15 g) in dry dichloromethane (10 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) dropwise at rt. After stirring for 10 min at rt, the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. To the residue in dry dichloromethane (10 mL) was treated with Boc-N-Me-Ala-OH (489 mg), EDC.HCl (505 mg), HOBt (325 mg), diisopropylethylamine (0.60 mL), and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. The reaction mixture was partitioned into EtOAc and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The residue was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, heptane:ethyl acetate, 40:60) to give the desired 4b as white solid. LCMS: m/e 511.2 (M+1-tBu).
    • tert-butyl (S)-1-(S)-3-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)-1-(S)-2-(3-aminobenzylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl(methyl)carbamate (4c)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00342
  • To 4b (540 mg) in water (3 mL) was added 74 mg of lithium hydroxide in 3 mL of methanol at 0° C. After 30 min, the mixture was acidified to pH 3.0 using 1 N-HCl and partitioned into ethyl acetate The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. To the residue in dry dichloromethane (10 mL) was treated with 3-aminobenzylamine (130 mg), EDC.HCl (204 mg), HOBt (131 mg), diisopropylethylamine (0.60 mL), and the resulting mixture was stirred overnight at rt. The reaction mixture was partitioned into EtOAc and washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The residue was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, dichloromethane:isopropanol, 90:10) to give the desired 4c as white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): LCMS: m/e 625.3 (M+1).
    • tert-butyl (S)-1-(S)-3-amino-1-((S)-2-(3-aminobenzylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl(methyl)carbamate (4d)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00343
  • To 4b (30 mg) in dry methanol (5 mL) was hydrogenated in the presence of palladium on carbon (10%, wet type) for 2 h. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to provide 4d. LCMS: m/e 491.3 (M+1).
    • (S)-1-((S)-3-acrylamido-2-((S)-2-(methylamino)propanamido)propanoyl)-N-(3-acrylamidobenzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (VIII-5)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00344
  • To a mixture of the aniline 4d (14 mg) and triethylamine (20 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added acryloyl chloride (10 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., trifluoroacetic acid (0.3 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and stirred 10 min at rt. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid VIII-5 as TFA salt. LCMS: m/e 499.2 (M+1).
    • Example 49
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00345
  • tert-butyl (S)-1-((S)-3-acrylamido-1-((S)-2-(3-acrylamidobenzylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-ylamino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl(methyl)carbamate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • To a mixture of the aniline 4d (14 mg) and triethylamine (20 μl) in dry dichloromethane (1 mL) was added acryloyl chloride (10 μl) dropwise at 0° C. After stirring for 10 min at 0° C., the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified using semi-prep HPLC (TFA modifier) to give a white solid. LCMS: m/e 499.2 (M+1-tBu).
    • C. XIAP Biological Data Example 50 Homogeneous, Fluorescence Polarization, Competition Binding Assay Protocol for Affinity Assessment of Compound Binding to XIAP, cIAP-1 and ML-IAPβ BIR3 Domains
  • 1× stocks of recombinant human XIAP; BIR3 domain (895-XB), recombinant human cIAP-1 (818-IA) or recombinant human ML-IAPβ (818-IA) from R&D Systems and Fluorescence Polarization (FP) assay tracer (Atto-647 tagged IAP inhibitor probe compound) were prepared in assay buffer consisting of 25 mM Tris-HCL, pH 7.5 (Sigma), 10 mM NaCl2 (Sigma), 1 mM DTT (Fluka) and 0.005% TritonX-100 (Pierce). While IAP protein and tracer equilibrated at ambient temp in the dark (30-60 min), 100× stocks of test compound were prepared in 50% DMSO:H2O, serially diluted and spotted (0.5 □L/well) in duplicate wells of a 384-well, flat bottom, polypropylene, black assay plate (Greiner #781209). Amounts used with respect to each protein were as follows: [XIAP]=120 nM, [Assay Tracer]=20 nM (Tracer:Protein Kd=83-61 nM; 0-3 hr); [cIAP-1]=30 nM, [Assay Tracer]=10 nM (Tracer:Protein Kd=37-14 nM; 0-1 hr); and [ML-IAPβ]=100 nM, [Assay Tracer]=15 nM (Tracer:Protein Kd=43-55 nM; 0-3 hr). Competition binding between test compounds and assay tracer was initiated by the addition of 50 □L/well of pre-equilibrated IAP protein and assay tracer. Displacement of the assay tracer was measured in a Synergy plate reader from BioTek (Winooski, Vt.) at λex620/λem680 through a 660 nm half-sized dicroich mirror and S/P polarizing filters every 30 min for 3 hr. (See Huang, X., Journal of Biomolecular Screening 8, 2003). The resulting compound dose response data were fit to a one-site binding Ki model in GraphPad Prism from GraphPad Software (San Diego, Calif.).
  • Table 2 shows the activity of selected compounds of this invention in the Ki (XIAP), Ki (c-IAP-1, 3 h), and Ki (ML-IAP, 2 h) Assays. Compounds having an activity designated as “A” provide an IC50≦10 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “B” provide an IC50>10 nM and ≦100 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “C” provide an IC50>100 nM and ≦1000 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “D” provide an IC50>1000 nM and <10,000 nM; and compounds having an activity designated as “E” provide an IC50≧10,000 nM.
  • TABLE 2
    Inhibition
    Compound Enzyme/Ki Designation
    VII-1 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    ML-IAP C
    VII-2 XIAP E
    c-IAP-1 E
    ML-IAP E
    VII-3 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-4 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-5 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-6 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 B
    VII-7 XIAP E
    c-IAP-1 E
    VII-8 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-9 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-10 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-11 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-12 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 B
    VII-13 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-14 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 D
    VII-15 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-16 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    ML-IAP C
    VII-17 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-18 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-19 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 B
    VII-20 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-21 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    ML-IAP D
    VII-22 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-23 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 A
    ML-IAP B
    VII-24 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-25 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-26 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-27 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-28 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 B
    VII-29 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 D
    ML-IAP B
    VII-30 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 B
    ML-IAP B
    VII-31 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-32 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-33 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 D
    VII-34 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-35 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 A
    VII-36 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    ML-IAP D
    VII-37 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-38 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 D
    VII-39 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-40 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-41 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-42 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-43 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 D
    ML-IAP E
    VII-44 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-45 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 D
    VII-46 XIAP B
    c-IAP-1 C
    VII-47 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 D
    VII-48 XIAP C
    c-IAP-1 C
    • D. Mass Spectrometric Analysis of XIAP Contacted with Compounds of the Invention Example 51
  • Intact XIAP was incubated for 18 hr at a 10-fold excess of VII-1 to protein. 3 ul aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 ul of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 ZipTipping directly onto the MALDI target using Sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). The top panel of FIG. 6 shows mass spectrometric trace of the intact XIAP protein (m/z 13,096 Da). The bottom panel of FIG. 6 shows mass spectrometric trace of XIAP incubated with VII-1 (mw=469.59) for 18 hr (m/z of 13,513), which shows a mass shift of 417 Da, with no m/z of 13,096, which indicates complete modification of XIAP by VII-1 within 18 h.
    • Example 52
  • Intact XIAP was incubated for 18 hr at a 10-fold excess of VII-1 to protein. After incubation, the protein was cleaned using a low volume ZEBA desalting column and then diluted with an equal volume of 0.2M ammonium bicarbonate with 1 mM DTT. The protein was then reduced by heating at 56° C. for 45 min. After incubation, the sample was allowed to cool to room temperature and a 1.9 μg/μL iodoacetamide solution was added and incubated for 30 min at room temperature to alkylate cysteine residues. Sequencing grade trypsin (promega) was added at a 1:20 (protease:protein) ratio and incubated at 37° C. for 16 hours. Peptides are then purified and enriched using C4 packed pipette tips (Millipore) and spotted directly on the MALDI target plate with alpha-cyano-4-hydroxy-cinnamic acid as the matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50).
  • The top panel of FIG. 7 shows the mass spectrometric trace of the mass region for the control XIAP digest, and the bottom panel of FIG. 7 shows the mass spectrometric trace for the digest of XIAP incubated with VII-1. A peptide with a m/z of 1,826 Da is identified in the XIAP+VII-21 digest, but was not observed in the control XIAP digest, which corresponds to the mass of the peptide amino acids 287-299 (AGFYALGEGDKVK (SEQ ID NO.:174)) from XIAP containing a single VII-1 modification. Modification of the peptide occurred at lysine K297 and not at K299, because if the modification had occurred at K299, the trypsin digest would not occur at that site, indicating that VII-1 binds to K297 of XIAP.
    • Example 53
  • Intact XIAP was incubated for 18 hr at a 10-fold excess of VII-21 to protein. 3 ul aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 ul of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 ZipTipping directly onto the MALDI target using Sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). Results: The top panel of FIG. 8 shows the mass spectrometric trace of intact XIAP protein (m/z 12,994 Da). The bottom panel of FIG. 8 shows the mass spectrometric trace of XIAP incubated with VII-21 (mw=572.62) for 18 hr (m/z of 13,516), which shows a mass shift of 522 Da, and no m/z at 12,994 Da, indicating complete modification of XIAP by VII-21 within 18 h.
    • Example 54
  • Intact XIAP was incubated for 18 hr at a 10-fold excess of VII-21 to protein. After incubation the protein was cleaned using a low volume ZEBA desalting column and then diluted with an equal volume of 100 mM TrisHCl, 10 mM CaCl2, with 1 mM DTT pH 7.8. The protein was then reduced by heating at 56° C. for 45 min. After incubation, the sample was then allowed to cool to room temperature and then a 1.9 μg/μL iodoacetamide solution was added and incubated for 30 min at room temperature to alkylate cysteine residues. Finally, chymotrypsin (Roche) was added at a 1:20 (protease:protein) ratio and incubated at room temperature for 16 hours. Peptides were then purified and enriched using C4 packed pipette tips (Millipore) and spotted directly on the MALDI target plate with alpha-cyano-4-hydroxy-cinnamic acid as the matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50).
  • The top panel of FIG. 9 shows the mass spectrometric trace of the mass region of the molecular weight for the control XIAP digest, and the bottom panel of FIG. 9 shows the mass spectrometric trace of the digest of XIAP incubated with VII-21. A peptide with an m/z of 1,750 Da is identified in the XIAP+VII-21 digest that is absent in the control XIAP digest. This peptide corresponds to the mass of the peptide of amino acids 291-301 (ALGEGDKVKCF (SEQ ID NO.:175)) from XIAP containing a single VII-21 modification and the cysteine alkylated iodoacetamide.
    • E. HCV Protease Synthetic Examples Example 55
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00346
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-5-oxo-5-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 1a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00347
  • To a solution of (1R,2S)-1-amino-2-vinylcyclopropane carboxylic acid ethyl ester toluenesulfonic acid (0.33 g, 1.0 mmol) and (2S,4R)-1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-4-(4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carbonyloxy)pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid (0.4 g, 1.0 mmol) in 10 mL of acetonitrile was added HATU (0.44 g, 1.2 mmol) and then DIEA (0.46 mL, 2.5 mmol) under stirring. The mixture was stirred at r.t. for two hours. After the complete consumption of starting materials, the reaction mixture was evaporated. The residue was dissolved in 30 mL ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine twice and dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (hexane:EtOAc=1:1). 0.35 g of the title compound was obtained: MS m/z: 532.0 (ES+).
    • Intermediate 1b
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00348
  • To a solution of the product of step 1a (0.35 g, 0.66 mmol) in 5 mL of THF/MeOH (1:1) was added 1N LiOH aqueous solution (2 mL, 2.0 mmol). After stirring at r.t. for 10 hours, the reaction mixture was neutralized with 1.0 N HCl. The organic solvents were evaporated under vacuum, and the remaining aqueous phase was acidified to pH˜3 using 1.0 N HCl and was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, and was dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate. After removal of solvent, 0.3 g of the title compound was obtained: MS m/z: 526.2 (M+Na+).
    • Intermediate 1c
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00349
  • To a solution of the product of step 1b (0.30 g, 0.6 mmol) in 10 mL of DCM was added CDI (0.16 g, 1.0 mmol) and the resulting solution was stirred at 40° C. for 1 hour. cyclopropylsulfonamide (0.18 g, 1.5 mmol) and DBU (0.16 g, 1.0 mmol) were added to the reaction mixture. The mixture was stirred at 40° C. for additional 10 hours. The solvent was then removed and the residue was diluted with EtOAc and was washed with aqueous NaOAc buffer (pH˜5, 2×10 mL), NaHCO3 solution and brine. After drying over Na2SO4 and removal of solvent, the residue was subjected to chromatography on silica gel using hexane/EtOAc (1:1-1:2). A total of 0.30 g of the title compound was obtained: Rf 0.1 (EtOAc:hexane=1:1), MS m/z: 605.0 (ES−).
    • Intermediate 1d
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00350
  • The product from step 1c (0.25 g, 0.41 mmol) was dissolved in 4 N HCl in dioxane. The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 1 hour. After removal of solvents, a 10-mL portion of DCM was poured in followed by evaporation to dryness. This process of DCM addition followed by evaporation was repeated four times to give a residue solid which was used directly for the next step: MS m/z: 507.0 (M+H+).
    • Intermediate 1e
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00351
  • To a stirring solution of 213 mg (1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (213 mg, 1 mmol) in 1 mL of DCM, was added 2.0 mL of 4 M HCl in dioxane. The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 30 min, and evaporated to dryness, giving desired HCl salt used directly for the following step.
    • Intermediate 1f
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00352
  • To a stirring mixture of 1-benzyl-N-Boc-L-glutamate (170 mg, 0.5 mmol), 0.5 mmol of intermediate 1e, and 250 μl of Hunig's base in 2 mL of DCM, was added 1.5 mL of 0.5 M 2-chloro-1,3-dimethyl-imidazolidinium chlorides solution in DCM. The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 30 min, and concentrate. The residue was subject to routine workup with EtOAc, 1N aqueous HCl, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. After filtration and concentration, the product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with heptane/EtOAc ¼, giving 146 mg of color less oil (67%). LC-MS: 333.2 (ES+, M-Boc)
    • Intermediate 1g
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00353
  • 140 mg of benzyl ester from previous step was subject to hydrogenation with 20 mg of Pd(OH)2 as catalyst in anhydrous MeOH. After 1 hr at rt, LC-MS showed completion of the removal of benzyl group. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite, and concentrated to give desired acid as foamy solid. LC-MS: 243.2 (ES+, M-Boc).
    • Intermediate 1h
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00354
  • Intermediate 1h was synthesized in the same way as for preparing intermediate 1g while using enantiomeric bicyclic lactone as starting material in the step for making intermediate 1e.
    • Intermediate 1i
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00355
  • Intermediate 1i was synthesized in the same way for preparing intermediate 1g using 1-benzyl-N-Boc-aspartate for making intermediate if instead of 1-benzyl-N-boc-L-glutamate.
    • Intermediate 1j
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00356
  • Intermediate 1j was synthesized in the same way for preparing intermediate 1h using 1-benzyl-N-Boc-L-aspartate for making intermediate if instead of 1-benzyl-N-boc-L-glutamate.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00357
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-5-oxo-5-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonyl-carbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-16): To a mixture of 15 mg of intermediate 1d, 8 mg of intermediate 1g, and 20 μl of Hunig's base in 1 mL of DMA, was added 20 mg of HATU. After stirring at rt for 20 min, the resulting mixture was purified by Prep-HPLC, giving XVI-16. LC-MS: 829.2 (ES−).
    • Example 56
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00358
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-5-oxo-5-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentanoyl)-5-(1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-5-oxo-5-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-17): The title compound was prepared in the same manner as for XVI-16, using intermediate 1h for the final step instead of intermediate 1g. LC-MS: 829.2 (ES−).
    • Example 57
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00359
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-4-oxo-4-41S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-4-oxo-4-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonyl carbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-15): The title compound was prepared in the same manner as for XVI-16, using intermediate 11 for the final step instead of intermediate 1g. LC-MS: 815.3 (ES−).
    • Example 58
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00360
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-4-oxo-4-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-4-oxo-4-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonyl carbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-14): The title compound was prepared in the same manner as for XVI-16, using intermediate 1j for the final step instead of intermediate 1g. LC-MS: 815.3 (ES−).
    • Example 59
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00361
  • (5S)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-1-(S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carbonyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-23): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-16 using intermediate 1d to couple with (2S)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 617.2 (ES−).
    • Example 60
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00362
  • (5S)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-1-(R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carbonyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-22): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-16 using intermediate 1d to couple with (2R)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 617.2 (ES−).
    • Example 61
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00363
  • (5S)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-1-(2-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 2a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00364
  • To a solution of intermediate 1d (0.12 g, 0.22 mmol) and N-Boc-glycine (0.054 g, 0.31 mmol) in 4.0 mL of acetonitrile was added HATU (133 mg, 0.35 mmol) and DIEA (0.12 mL, 0.66 mmol) at r.t. under stirring. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h. LC-MS and TLC analysis indicated completion of the coupling reaction. A 20-mL of EtOAc was poured in and the mixture was washed with a buffer (pH˜4, AcONa/AcOH), NaHCO3 and brine, and was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane). A total of 0.10 g of the title compound was obtained: Rf 0.2 (EtOAc); MS m/z: 664.0 (M+H+).
    • Intermediate 2b
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00365
  • The intermediate 2a (0.10 g, 0.15 mmol) was dissolved in 2 mL of 4 N HCl in dixoxane and the reaction was stirred for 1 hour at RT. After removal of solvents, a 3-mL portion of DCM was poured in followed by evaporation to dryness. This process of DCM addition followed by evaporation was repeated three times to give the title compound Intermediate 2b as its HCl salt (0.10 g). MS m/z: 564.0 (M+H+).
    • Example 62
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00366
  • (5S)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-1-(2-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-13): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-23 using intermediate 2b to couple with (2S)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 676.2 (ES+), 674.1 (ES−).
    • Example 63
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00367
  • (5S)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-1-(2-((R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-12): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-13 using intermediate 2b to couple with (2R)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 676.2 (ES+), 674.1 (ES−).
    • Example 64
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00368
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-(S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 3a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00369
  • To a solution of intermediate 1d (0.16 g, 0.28 mmol) and N-Boc-3-(Fmoc)amino-L-alanine (0.15 g, 0.35 mmol) in 5.0 mL of DMF was added HATU (125 mg, 0.33 mmol) and DIEA (130 mg, 1.0 mmol) at r.t. under stirring. TLC analysis indicated completion of the coupling reaction had occurred after one hour. A 20-mL portion of EtOAc was poured in and the mixture was washed with a buffer (pH˜4, AcONa/AcOH), NaHCO3 and brine, and was dried over MgSO4. After removal of solvent, the crude oil product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane). A total of 0.14 g of the title compound was obtained. LC-MS: 915.9 (ES+)
    • Intermediate 3b
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00370
  • A solution of 0.10 g of the product of intermediate 3a in 1 mL of DMF with 12% piperidine was stirred for 1.5 hours at r.t. and then was evaporated to dryness under high vacuum. The residue was trituated with hexane/ether (4:1) to yield 70 mg of the title compound. LC-MS: 693.2 (ES+), 691.2 (ES−).
    • Example 65
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00371
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-(S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-21): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-23 using intermediate 3b to couple with (2S)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 803.2 (ES−).
    • Example 66
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00372
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-(R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-20): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-21 using intermediate 3b to couple with (2R)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 803.2 (ES−).
    • Example 67
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00373
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-((S)-N-methyl-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propanoyl)-5-(1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 4a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00374
  • To a solution of (S)-3-amino-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)propanoic acid (2.04 g, 10 mmol), TEA (4.5 mL, 30 mmol) in 50 mL CH2Cl2 was added nitrobenzenesulfonyl chloride (2.9 g, 13.0 mmol) at RT. The mixture was stirred for 10 hours at RT. The solvent was removed under vacuum followed by the addition of 100 mL EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with 1N HCl (to pH 3), water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered and the solvent was removed to afford the crude Intermediate 4a (4.0 g).
    • Intermediate 4b
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00375
  • The crude Intermediate 4a (2.0 g), K2CO3 (1.5, 4 equiv.) were dissolved in 10 mL DMF. MeI (0.8 mL, 4 eqiv.) was added to the reaction at RT. The resulting mixture was stirred for 20 hours. The DMF was mostly removed under vacuum and 100 mL EtOAc was added and the mixture was washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subject to a short silica gel column (eluents: EtOAc/hexane) to produce 1.62 g of the Intermediate 4b. MS m/z: 439.9 (M+Na+).
    • Intermediate 4c
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00376
  • To a solution of Intermediate 4b (1.6 g, 3.8 mmol) in 10 mL of THF/MeOH (1:1) was added 1 N LiOH aqueous solution (5.8 mL, 5.8 mmol). After stirring at r.t. for 10 hours, the reaction mixture was neutralized with 1.0 N HCl. The organic solvent was evaporated under vacuum, and the remaining aqueous phase was acidified to pH˜3 using 1.0 N HCl and was extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, and was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. After removal of solvent, 1.5 g of Intermediate 4c was obtained. MS m/z: 402.0 (ES−).
    • Intermediate 4d
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00377
  • To a solution of Intermediate 1d (0.12 g, 0.20 mmol) and Intermediate 4c (0.12 g, 0.3 mmol) in 5.0 mL of anhydrous acetonitrile was added HATU (0.11 g, 0.3 mmol) and DIEA (0.14 mL, 0.9 mmol) at r.t. under stirring. TLC analysis and LC-MS indicated completion of the coupling reaction after one hour. A 20-mL portion of EtOAc was poured in and the mixture was washed with a buffer (pH˜4, AcONa/AcOH), NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane). A total of 0.10 g of Intermediate 4d was obtained: Rf 0.1 (EtOAc); MS m/z: 891.8 (M+H+).
    • Intermediate 4e
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00378
  • To a solution of Intermediate 4d (0.10 g, 0.11 mmol) in 3 mL DMF was added phenylthiol (30 mg, 0.26 mmol) and K2CO3 (40 mg, 0.3 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred for 20 hours at RT. 30 mL EtOAc was added and the mixture was washed with water and brine and water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane) to produce 0.1 g of crude Intermediate 4e. MS m/z: 706.9 (M+H+).
    • Example 68
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00379
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-((S)-N-methyl-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-19): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-21 using intermediate 4e instead of intermediate 3b to couple with (2R)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 817.2 (ES−).
    • Example 69
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00380
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-((R)-N-methyl-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propanoyl)-5-(1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-18): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-20 using intermediate 4e instead of intermediate 3b to couple with (2S)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 817.2 (ES−).
    • Example 70
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00381
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-4-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)butanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 5a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00382
  • Intermediate 5a was prepared in the same way as for intermediate 3b using (S)-4-(((9H-fluoren-9-yl)methoxy)carbonylamino)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)butanoic acid instead of N-Boc-3-(Fmoc)amino-L-alanine. LC-MS: 707.2 (ES+)
    • Example 71
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00383
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-4-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)butanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-11): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-19 using intermediate 5a instead of intermediate 4e to couple with (2S)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 817.2 (ES−).
    • Example 72
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00384
  • (5S)-1-((S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-4-((R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)butanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-10): The title compound was synthesized in the same chemistry as preparation for XVI-18 using intermediate 5a instead of intermediate 4e to couple with (2S)-5-oxo-tetrahydro-furan-2-carboxylic acid. LC-MS: 817.2 (ES−).
    • Example 73
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00385
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 6a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00386
  • Intermediate 6a was prepared following the procedure published in WO 2006086381.
    • Intermediate 6b
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00387
  • Intermediate 6b was synthesized in the same way for preparing intermediate 1g using (1S,4S)-tert-butyl 3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octane-5-carboxylate as starting material in preparing intermediate 1e instead of (1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester. LC-MS: 355.1 (ES−).
    • Intermediate 6c
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00388
  • Intermediate 6c was synthesized in the same way for preparing intermediate 1g using (1S,5S)-6-oxa-2-aza-bicyclo[3.2.1]octan-7-one in preparing intermediate 1e instead of (1R,4R)-3-Oxo-2-oxa-5-aza-bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester. LC-MS: 355.1 (ES−).
    • Example 74
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00389
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-9): The title compound was synthesized in the same way as for XVI-17 using intermediate 6a as starting material instead of intermediate 1d. LC-MS: 825.3 (ES+), 823.2 (ES−).
    • Example 75
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00390
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-8): The title compound was synthesized in the same way as for XVI-16 using intermediate 6a as starting material instead of intermediate 1d. LC-MS: 825.3 (ES+), 823.2 (ES−).
    • Example 76
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00391
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,4-dioxo-4-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-7): The title compound was synthesized in the same way as for XVI-15 using intermediate 6a as starting material instead of intermediate 1d. LC-MS: 811.2 (ES+), 809.1 (ES−).
    • Example 77
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00392
  • N1-((2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1S,2R)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)pentan-2-yl)-N-5-(15-oxo-19-((3aS,4S,6aR)-2-oxohexahydro-1H-thieno[3,4-d]imidazol-4-yl)-4,7,10-trioxa-14-azanonadecyl)glutaramide (XVI-27): To a solution of 2 mg of XVI-7 in 100 uL of anhydrous DCM, was added 50 uL of TFA. After stirring at rt for 1 hr, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure, and the residue was dried in vacuum for 2 hr. 0.5 mL of anhydrous acetonitrile was then added, followed by 50 uL of Hunig's base, 5 mg of 5,21-dioxo-25-((3aS,4S,6aR)-2-oxohexahydro-1H-thieno[3,4-d]imidazol-4-yl)-10,13,16-trioxa-6,20-diazapentacosan-1-oic acid and 6 mg of HATU. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 1 hr, then purified by prep-HPLC, giving desired tool compound XVI-27 as white powder after lyophilization. LC-MS: 1267.5 (ES+), 1265.6 (ES−)
    • Example 78
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00393
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,4-dioxo-4-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-6): The title compound was synthesized in the same way as for XVI-14 using intermediate 6a as starting material instead of intermediate 1d. LC-MS: 811.2 (ES+), 809.1 (ES−).
    • Example 79
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00394
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.2]octan-5-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-3): The title compound was synthesized in the same way as for XVI-9 using intermediate 6b as coupling acid of intermediate 1h. LC-MS: 839.3 (ES+), 837.3 (ES).
    • Example 80
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00395
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-((1R,5S)-7-oxo-6-oxa-2-azabicyclo[3.2.1]octan-2-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-2): The title compound was synthesized in the same way as for XVI-3 using intermediate 6c as coupling acid of intermediate 6b. LC-MS: 839.3 (ES+), 837.3 (ES−).
    • Example 81
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00396
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(7-methoxy-2-phenylquinolin-4-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-(2-oxoazetidin-1-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 7a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00397
  • Intermediate 7a was prepared following the published procedure as in WO2006086381.
    • Intermediate 7b
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00398
  • To a stirring solution of azetidin-2-one (36 mg, 0.5 mmol) in 5 mL anhydrous THF was added n-BuLi (1.6 M, 0.31 mL) at −78° C. The solution was stirred for 0.5 h at −78° C. and warmed up to RT. This solution was then transferred into a stirred solution of (S)-5-(benzyloxy)-4-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-5-oxopentanoic acid (0.25 g, 0.75 mmol) and DCC (0.16 g, 0.75 mmol) in 5 mL dichloromethane (pre stirred for 10 minutes). To the mixture was then added DIEA (0.55 mmol) and DMAP (0.2 mmol) and the solution was stirred at RT for 10 hours. The solvent was removed and the crude was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with heptane/EtOAc (1:1) to afford 30 mg of white solid (20%) as intermediate 7b. LC-MS: 291.1 (ES+, M-Boc).
    • Intermediate 7c
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00399
  • Intermediate 7b (30 mg) was hydrogenated in ethyl acetate (H2, Pd/C, 1 h) to give the de-protected carboxylic acid 30 mg (100%). LC-MS: 299.1 (ES−).
    • Example 82
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00400
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(7-methoxy-2-phenylquinolin-4-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-(2-oxoazetidin-1-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-26): The title compound was synthesized using intermediate 7a and intermediate 7c via the chemistry as described for XVI-16. LC-MS: 859.3 (ES+).
    • Example 83
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00401
  • tert-butyl (S)-1-((2S,4R)-2-(1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(6-methoxyisoquinolin-1-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1,5-dioxo-5-(2-oxoazetidin-1-yl)pentan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-1): The title compound was synthesized in a similar way as for XVI-26 using intermediate 6a and intermediate 7c as reactants. LC-MS: 783.3 (ES+).
    • Example 84
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00402
  • (5S)-1-0S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-((2R,3S)-2-methyl-4-oxooxetan-3-ylcarbamoyloxy)propanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 8a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00403
  • Intermediate 8a was prepared through HATU coupling reaction using intermediate 1d with N-Boc-L-serine. LC-MS: 692.2 (ES−).
    • Example 85
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00404
  • (5S)-1-(S)-2-(tert-butoxycarbonylamino)-3-((2R,3S)-2-methyl-4-oxooxetan-3-ylcarbamoyloxy)propanoyl)-5-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)pyrrolidin-3-yl 4-fluoroisoindoline-2-carboxylate (XVI-25): Intermediate 8a was treated with 2 equivalent of phosgene in DCM at 0° C. for 1 hr. The resulting mixture was evaporated under reduced pressure. 1 equivalent (3S,4R)-3-amino-4-methyloxetan-2-one and 2 equiv of Hunig's base in acetonitrile was added in, the resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 1 hr. After concentration, the resulting residue was subject to prep-HPLC purification, giving desired XVI-25. LC-MS: 843.1 (ES+, M+Na)
    • Example 86
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00405
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(7-methoxy-2-phenylquinolin-4-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-oxo-3-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propan-2-ylcarbamate: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Intermediate 9a
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00406
  • Intermediate 9a was prepared in the same way as for intermediate 3b starting from intermediate 7a instead of intermediate 1d. LC-MS: 763.3 (ES+).
    • Example 87
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00407
  • tert-butyl (2S)-1-((2S)-2-((1R,2S)-1-(cyclopropylsulfonylcarbamoyl)-2-vinylcyclopropylcarbamoyl)-4-(7-methoxy-2-phenylquinolin-4-yloxy)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-oxo-3-((S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)propan-2-ylcarbamate (XVI-24): The title compound was made in the same way as for XVI-21 using intermediate 9a instead of intermediate 3b. LC-MS: 875.3. (ES+).
    • HCV-NS3 Biological Data
  • Table 3 shows the activity of selected compounds of this invention in the NS3/4A_App (nM), MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR, MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S—3HR, MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A—3HR Assays. Compounds having an activity designated as “A” provide an IC50≦1 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “B” provide an IC50>1 nM and ≦10 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “C” provide an IC50>10 nM and ≦100 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “D” provide an IC50>100 nM and <1000 nM; and compounds having an activity designated as “E” provide an IC50≧1000 nM.
  • Compounds having an activity designated as “F” provide complete modification; compounds having an activity designated as “G” provide >70% modification; compounds having an activity designated as “H” provide >50% and ≦70% modification; compounds having an activity designated as “I” provide >30% and ≦50% modification; and compounds having an activity designated as “K” provide ≦30% modification.
  • TABLE 3
    Inhibition/
    Compound Modification
    Designation Enzyme/Assay Designation
    XVI-1 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR G
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S_3HR F
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A_3HR K
    XVI-2 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR K
    XVI-3 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR K
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A_3HR K
    XVI-4 NS3/4A_App (nM) D
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR K
    XVI-5 NS3/4A_App (nM) D
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR K
    XVI-6 NS3/4A_App (nM) B
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR H
    XVI-7 NS3/4A_App (nM) B
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR H
    XVI-8 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR G
    XVI-9 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR H
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A_3HR K
    XVI-10 NS3/4A_App (nM) D
    XVI-11 NS3/4A_App (nM) D
    XVI-12 NS3/4A_App (nM) D
    XVI-13 NS3/4A_App (nM) D
    XVI-14 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR H
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S_3HR I
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A_3HR I
    XVI-15 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR H
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S_3HR H
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A_3HR H
    XVI-16 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR H
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S_3HR F
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A_3HR F
    XVI-17 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR G
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S_3HR F
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_K136A_3HR F
    XVI-18 NS3/4A_App (nM) B
    XVI-19 NS3/4A_App (nM) B
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S_3HR K
    XVI-20 NS3/4A_App (nM) B
    XVI-21 NS3/4A_App (nM) B
    XVI-22 NS3/4A_App (nM) E
    XVI-23 NS3/4A_App (nM) D
    XVI-24 NS3/4A_App (nM) B
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR K
    XVI-25 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR K
    XVI-26 NS3/4A_App (nM) A
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_NS3 WT 1b 1HR H
    MS_HCVNS3_INTACT_C139S_3HR F
  • Some of the HCV Protease inhibitors, such as compounds XVI-1, XVI-8, XVI-17, XVI-16, and XVI-26, provide >70% modification of HCV Protease, or mutants thereof. Some of the HCV Protease inhibitors, such as compounds XVI-6, XVI-7, XVI-9, XVI-14, XVI-15, XV-16, and XVI-26 provide >50% up to <70% modification of HCV Protease, or mutants thereof. Some of the HCV Protease inhibitors, such as compound XVI-14 provide >30% and ≦50% modification of HCV Protease, or mutants thereof. Some of the HCV Protease inhibitors, such as compounds XVI-1, XVI-2, XVI-3, XVI-4, XVI-5, XVI-9, XVI-19, XVI-24, and XVI-25 provide ≦30% modification of HCV Protease, or mutants thereof.
    • F. Mass Spectrometric Analysis of HCV Protease Contacted with Compounds of the Invention Example 88
  • Intact HCV (protease) 1bWT was incubated for 1 hr at a 10× fold excess of XVI-26 to protein. 3 ul aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 ul of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 ZipTipping directly onto the MALDI target using Sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). The top panel in FIG. 3 shows the mass spectrometric trace of the intact HCV 1bWT protein (m/z 24,529 Da). The middle panel in FIG. 3 shows the mass spectrometric trace when HCV 1bWT was incubated with XVI-26 (mw=858.9). The centroid mass (m/z=25,340 Da) shows a positive shift of about 811 Da, indicating modification of HCV 1bWT by XVI-26. Due to likely protein misfolding during protein purification, a small portion of the misfolded protein was not modified.
  • In order to determine whether the modification of the protein occurred at lysine, the pH from the above experiment was increased from 7.4 to 10.0. Because the compound lysine adduct would be an amide any increase in pH would have minimal effect on the modified protein. If however, the modification occurred at cysteine the resultant thioester bond would be unstable and the compound would hydrolyze off the protein. The bottom panel of FIG. 3 shows a mass spectrometric trace of HCV 1bWT reaction with XVI-26 for 1 hour at pH 7.4 followed by 2 hours at pH 10, and XVI-26 did not come off of the protein implying the adduct was occurring on a lysine.
  • Intact HCV (protease) 1bWT, C159S, and C159S/K136A were incubated for 1 hr at a 10× fold excess of XVI-26 to protein. 3 μl aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 μl of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 ZipTipping directly onto the MALDI target using Sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). The first panel of FIG. 4 shows the mass spectrometric trace of the intact HCV 1bWT protein (m/z 24,460 Da). The second panel of FIG. 4 shows the mass spectrometric trace when HCV 1bWT was incubated with XVI-26 (mw=858.9), the centroid mass (m/z=25,320 Da) shows a positive shift of about 860 Da, indicating modification of HCV 1bWT by XVI-26. The third panel of FIG. 4 shows the mass spectrometric trace when HCV C159S mutant was incubated with XVI-26 and the centroid mass (m/z=25,237 Da) shows a positive shift of 770 Da, indicating modification of HCV C159S by XVI-26. The fourth panel of FIG. 4 shows the mass spectrometric trace when HCV C159S/K136A double mutant was incubated with XVI-26, the centroid mass (m/z=24,412 Da) is consistent with the mass of unmodified HCV C159S/K136A, indicating no modification of HCV C159S/K136A by XVI-26. This data shows that K136 is the amino acid modified by XVI-26.
  • Intact HCV (protease) WT1b was incubated for 1 hr at a 10× fold excess of XVI-1 (mw=782.87) to protein. 3 μA aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 μA of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 ZipTipping directly onto the MALDI target using Sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). The top panel of FIG. 5 shows the mass spectrometric trace of HCV NS3 protein (m/z 24,550 Da) and the bottom panel of FIG. 5 shows the 1 hr time point (m/z of 24,611 & 25,372), which shows a mass shift of +755 (˜72% conversion) showing that XVI-1 modified HCV NS3 WT1b. Due to some protein misfolding during the purification of the protein, the unfolded portion of the protein can not react with XVI-1.
    • Example 89 Single Chain HCV Protease (wt) Peptide Expression and Purification
  • The single-chain proteolytic domain (NS4A21-32-GSGS-NS33-631) was cloned into pET-14b (Novagen, Madison, Wis.) and transformed into DH10B cells (Invitrogen). The resulting plasmid was transferred into Escherichia coli BL21 (Novagen) for protein expression and purification. Briefly, the cultures were grown at 37° C. in LB medium containing 100 μg/ml of ampicillin until the optical density at 600 nm (OD600) reached 1.0 and were induced by addition of isopropyl-β-D-thiogalactopyranoside (IPTG) to 1 mM. After an additional incubation at 18° C. for 20 h, bacteria were harvested by centrifugation at 6,000×g for 10 minutes and resuspended in a lysis buffer containing 50 mM Na3PO4, pH 8.0, 300 mM NaCl, 5 mM 2-mercaptoethanol, 10% glycerol, 0.5% Igepal CA630, and a protease inhibitor cocktail consisting of 1 mM phenylmethylsulfonyl fluoride, 0.5 μg/ml leupeptin, pepstatin A, and 2 mM benzamidine. Cells were lysed by freezing and thawing, followed by sonication. Cell debris was removed by centrifugation at 12,000×g for 30 min. The supernatant was further clarified by passing through a 0.45-μm filter (Corning) and then loaded onto a HiTrap chelating column charged with NiSO4 (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech). The bound protein was eluted with an imidazole solution in a 100-to-500 mM linear gradient. Selected fractions were run through Ni2+column chromatography and were analyzed on a 10% sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS)-polyacrylamide gel. The purified protein was resolved by electrophoresis in a 12% SDS-PAGE gel and then transferred onto a nitrocellulose membrane. The protein was analyzed by Western blot analysis using monoclonal antibodies against NS3. Proteins were visualized by using a chemiluminescence kit (Roche) with horseradish peroxidase-conjugated goat anti-mouse antibodies (Pierce) as secondary antibodies. The protein was aliquoted and stored at −80° C.
    • Example 90 Cloning and Expression of HCV Protease A156S, A156T, D168A, D168V Drug-Resistance Mutants and C159S Variant
  • The mutant DNA fragments of NS4A/NS3 were generated by PCR and cloned into pET expression vector. After transformation into BL21 competent cells, the expression was induced with IPTG for 2 hours. The His-tagged fusion proteins were purified using affinity column followed by size exclusion chromatography.
    • Example 91 Plasmids Used for Lys Washout and Covalent Probe
  • FIG. 10 depicts lysine covalent probe compound XVI-27 modifying NS3/4A C159S. The pCI-Neo-FLAG-NS3/4a-WT plasmid was constructed by amplifying the NS3 and 4a sequence from the pFK-1389-luc-ubi-neo-NS3-3′ET vector using Accuprime Pfx (Invitrogen) according to manufacturer's instructions and with primers that added an NheI site and FLAG epitope tag to the 5′ end and an XbaI site to the 3′ end.
  • (SEQ ID NO.: 176)
    (FTAATAAGCTAGCACCATGGACTACAAAGATGATGACGATAAAGGAG
    CGCCTATTACGGCCTACTCCCAACAG,
    (SEQ ID NO.: 177))
    R-TTATTATCTAGACTAGCACTCTTCCATCTCATCGAACTCCCGGTAA
    AG.
  • The resulting PCR product was then digested with NheI and XbaI and ligated into the same sites of the pCI-Neo vector (Invitrogen). The WT construct was then used as a template for site-directed mutagenesis using the Quickchange II Site-Directed Mutagenesis kit (Qiagen) and primers containing the K136R or C159S mutations (below).
  • NS3-C159S-F
    (SEQ ID NO.: 178)
    ATCTTTCGGGCTGCCGTGAGCACCCGAGGGGTTGCGAAG
    NS3-C159S-R
    (SEQ ID NO.: 179)
    CTTCGCAACCCCTCGGGTGCTCACGGCAGCCCGAAAGAT
    NS3-K136R-F
    (SEQ ID NO.: 180)
    GTCTCCTACTTGAGGGGCTCTTCGGGCGGT
    NS3-K136R-R
    (SEQ ID NO.: 181)
    ACCGCCCGAAGAGCCCCTCAAGTAGGAGAC
    • Example 92 Demonstration of Prolonged Duration of Action (Washout)
  • FIG. 11 depicts the prolonged duration of action with XVI-26. Parental Huh-7 cells were plated at a density of 1.75×106 cells per 100 mm dish in media with 10% FBS. The following day, cells were transfected in OptiMEM using 28 ug of plasmid and 112 ul of Lipfectamine 2000 (Invitrogen), according to manufacturer's instructions. After 4 hours incubation with the transfection complex, the media was changed to Replicon Assay Medium (RPMI supplemented with 5% FBS, 1× non-essential amino acids and pen/strep). The next morning, the cells were trypsinized, counted and replated in Replicon Media at a density of 20,000 cells/well of a 12 well plate (4 wells per genotype). Cells were allowed to adhere to the plate, then the media was removed and replaced with 1 ml media containing XVI-26, (3 wells per compound) and 0.02% DMSO and returned to the incubator overnight. Sixteen hours later 1 treated well from each genotype (0 hr sample) and 1 untreated well were washed with PBS, then lysed and scraped into 30 ul of Cell Extraction Buffer (Biosource, Camarillo, Calif.) plus Complete Protease Inhibitor (Roche, Indianapolis, Ind.). The remaining wells were rinsed 2× with PBS then fed with Replicon Media and returned to the incubator. Cells were washed once every hour by removing the old media and replacing it with fresh media and were lysed and collected at 1 and 6 hours following the first collection. Lysates were resolved using standard immunoblotting methods and NS3 self-cleavage activity was assessed and quantified relative to untreated samples.
    • Example 93 Demonstration of Lysine Modification Using Covalent Probe
  • As illustrated in FIG. 11, 200 μg of total cell lysate was used for either NS3/4A WT, C159S or K136R respectively. Lysates were treated with 1 μM of biotinylated covalent probe, XVI-27, for 1 h and immunopercipitated with anti-NS3 antibody (mouse). Immunoblots were probed with streptavidin and anti-NS3 antibody (goat). Successful modification by the covalent probe was assessed and quantified relative to WT NS3.
    • Example 94
  • Assay buffer: 2% CHAPS, 50 mM Tris pH 7.5, 50% glycerol, 2 uM M−2235 (Bachem) substrate. In a 50 ul reaction, add 49 ul assay buffer, 1 ul (1 U) HCV serine protease (Bioenza). Incubate 20 minutes at room temperature. The plate was read at either 350/460 nm (excitation/emission) on a fluorescent micro-plate reader or monitored at one-minute intervals to achieve the kinetic curve.
  • The enzyme tolerated 1% DMSO and 2% methanol. In the experiments of testing compounds, the compounds in pure DMSO were diluted 10 times with 20% methanol (10% DMSO and 20% methanol). This compound solution was added to the reaction (not exceeding 10% of the final reaction volume). The final concentration of the organic solvents was: 1% DMSO and 2% methanol.
    • Example 95 HCV Protease FRET Assay for WT and Mutated NS3/4A 1b Enzymes (IC50 — APP)
  • The following protocol was used to generate “apparent” IC50 (IC50 — APP) values as depicted in Table 6, below. Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed that IC50 — APP, contrasted with IC50 values, may provide a more useful indication of time-dependent inhibition, and are thus more representative of binding affinity. The protocol is a modified FRET-based assay (v—03) developed to evaluate compound potency, rank-order and resistance profiles against wild type and C159S, A156S, A156T, D168A, D168V, R155K mutants of the HCV NS3/4A 1b protease enzyme as follows: 10× stocks of NS3/4A protease enzyme from Bioenza (Mountain View, Calif.) and 1.13×5-FAM/QXL™520 FRET peptide substrate from Anaspec (San Jose, Calif.) were prepared in 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.5, 5 mM DTT, 2% CHAPS and 20% glycerol. 5 μL of each enzyme were added to Corning (#3575) 384-well, black, microtiter plates (Corning, N.Y.) after spotting a 0.5 μL volume of 50% DMSO and serially diluted compounds prepared in 50% DMSO. Protease reactions were immediately started after enzyme addition with the addition of 45 μL of the FRET substrate and monitored for 60-90 minutes at λex485/λem520 in a Synergy plate reader from BioTek (Winooski, Vt.). At the conclusion of each assay, progress curves from each well were examined for linear reaction kinetics and fit statistics (R2, 95% confidence intervals, absolute sum of squares). Initial velocity (0 minutes to 15+minutes) from each reaction was determined from the slope of a plot of relative fluorescence units vs time (minutes) and then plotted against inhibitor concentration as a percent of the no inhibitor and no enzyme controls to estimate apparent IC50 from log[Inhibitor] vs Response. (Variable Slope model in GraphPad Prism from GraphPad Software (San Diego, Calif.).)
    • G. PI3 Kinase Inhibitors (LYS) Synthetic Examples Example 96
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00408
  • 1-(4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)prop-2-en-1-one: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00409
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00410
    • Step 1a: 4-(2-chlorothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)morpholine (Intermediate 1a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00411
  • To a solution of 2,4-dichlorothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidine (2.0 g, 9.7 mmol) in 30 mL MeOH was added 1.9 mL morpholine. After stirring at room temperature for one hour, the reaction mixture was filtered; the solid was washed with water and methanol to provide 2.0 g of the title compound. MS m/z: 256.0, 258.1 (M+1). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): □: 7.78 (1H, d, J=5.48 Hz), 7.38 (1H, d, J=5.48 Hz), 4.02 (4H, t, J=4.80 Hz), 3.85 (4H, t, J=4.82 Hz).
    • Step 1b: 2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidine-6-carbaldehyde (Intermediate 1b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00412
  • To a suspension of Intermediate 1a (1.02 g, 4.0 mmol) in 30 mL THF at −78° C. was added LiHMDS (1.0 N, 6.0 mL, 6.0 mmol) slowly. The reaction mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 1 h, DMF (0.5 mL) was added and reaction mixture was allowed to warm up to room temperature over 2 hours. The reaction was quenched with NH4Cl aqueous solution and the THF was removed under vacuum. A 50-mL portion of EtOAc was added in and the mixture was washed with aqueous NaHCO3 and brine. The organic layer was separated and was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane). A total of 0.6 g of the title compound was obtained (60%). MS m/z: 284.2 (ES+, M+1).
    • Step 1c: tert-butyl 4-((2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (Intermediate 1c)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00413
  • Intermediate 1b (0.40 g, 1.5 mmol), tert-butyl piperazine-1-carboxylate and 0.2 mL acetic acid were dissolved in 12 mL dichloroethane. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. NaBH(OAc)3 (0.54 g, 2.5 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture and the resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 10 hours. A 20-mL of NaHCO3 aqueous solution and 10 mL of DCM were added. The organic layer was separated and dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane 3:7). A total of 0.30 g of the title compound was obtained. MS m/z: 454.2 (ES+, M+1).
    • Step 1d: tert-butyl 4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (Intermediate 1d)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00414
  • Intermediate 1c (0.14 g, 0.31 mmol), 4-(trimethylstannyl)-1H-indazole (0.10 g, 0.37 mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (35 mg, 0.03 mmol) were dissolved in 5 mL toluene. The solution was degassed and flushed with N2. The reaction mixture was heated to 135° C. for 40 hours in a sealed vial. The solvent was removed under vacuum and the residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane 5:5). A total of 0.10 g of the title compound was obtained. MS m/z: 536.1 (M+1).
  • Alternatively, Intermediate 1d can be prepared by the following Suzuki coupling procedures: Intermediate 1c (70 mg, 0.15 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-indazole (56 mg, 0.23 mmol), Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (10 mg, 0.015 mmol) and sodium carbonate (60 mg, 0.56 mmoL) were dissolved in toluene/ethanol/water (2.5 mL/1.5 mL/0.7 mL). The solution was degassed and flushed with argon. The reaction mixture was heated to 125° C. for 10 hours in a sealed vial. The reaction was then worked up by adding ethyl acetate 10 mL and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was separated and was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane 1:1 to 4:1) to give the title compound. MS m/z: 536.1 (M+1).
    • Step 1e: 4-(2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-6-(piperazin-1-ylmethyl)thieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)morpholine (Intermediate 1e)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00415
  • Intermediate 1d (100 mg, 0.18 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of 4N HCl in dixoxane and the reaction was stirred for 3 hours at room temperature. After removal of solvents, a 3-mL portion of DCM was poured in followed by evaporation to dryness. This process of DCM addition followed by evaporation was repeated three times to give a white solid and was used directly for the next step. MS m/z: 436.2 (M+H+).
    • Step 1f: 1-(4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)prop-2-en-1-one
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00416
  • To a solution of Intermediate 1e (10 mg, 0.02 mmol) and acrylic acid (2.0 mg, 0.025 mmol) in 1.0 mL of anhydrous acetonitrile was added HATU (9.1 mg, 0.024 mmol) and DIEA (15 mg, 0.1 mmol) at −40° C. while stirring. The reaction mixture was stirred for 10 min at ˜−10° C. A 10-mL portion of EtOAc and 5 mL of NaHCO3 aqueous solution were added. The organic layer was separated and was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane 9:1). A total of 6 mg of the title compound was obtained. MS m/z: 490.2 (M+H+). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): □: 9.01 (1H d, J=0.88 Hz), 8.27 (1H d, J=7.32 Hz), 7.58 (1H d, J=7.0 Hz), 7.51 (1H t, J=6.84 Hz), 7.39 (1H, s), 6.56 (1H dd, J=10.56, 16.96 Hz), 6.32 (1H d, 16.96 Hz), 5.70 (1H d, 10.52 Hz), 4.09 (4H, m), 3.93 (6H, m), 3.79 (2H, s), 3.62 (2H, s), 2.60 (4H, s).
  • In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and coupling with (R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid, the following compound was prepared:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00417
  • In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and coupling with (S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid, the following compound was prepared:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00418
    • Example 97
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00419
  • 1-(4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)butane-1,3-dione: In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the title compound was prepared: MS m/z: 520.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 98
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00420
  • 4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-((2R,3S)-2-methyl-4-oxooxetan-3-yl)piperazine-1-carboxamide. In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the title compound was prepared: MS m/z: 563.3 (M+H+).
    • Example 99
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00421
  • (R)-5-(4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one: In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 548.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 100
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00422
  • (S)-5-(4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one: In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 548.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 101
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00423
  • (R)-methyl 2-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)-5-oxopyrrolidine-1-carboxylate. In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 582.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 102
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00424
  • (S)-methyl 2-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)-5-oxopyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (XXII-29). In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 582.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 103
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00425
  • 3-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)dihydrothiophen-2(3H)-one (XXII-30). In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 541.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 104
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00426
  • 4-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)dihydrothiophen-2(3H)-one (XXII-31). In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 541.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 105
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00427
  • 5-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)dihydrothiophen-2(3H)-one (XXII-32). In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 541.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 106
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00428
  • 5-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)cyclohexane-1,3-dione (XXII-33). In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and suitable carboxylic acids, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 551.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 107
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00429
  • (4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)(1H-imidazol-1-yl)methanone: In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and coupling with CDI at the presence of TEA in dichloromethane, (4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)(1H-imidazol-1-yl)methanone (XXII-16) was prepared: MS m/z: 530.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 108
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00430
  • 4-(2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-6-(4-(vinylsulfonyl)piperazin-1-yl)methyl)thieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)morpholine: In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and coupling with 2-chloroethanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of TEA, 4-(2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-6-((4-(vinylsulfonyl)piperazin-1-yl)methyl)thieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)morpholine (XXII-8) was prepared: MS m/z: 526.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 109
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00431
  • (E)-5-(4-morpholino-6-((4-(prop-1-enylsulfonyl)piperazin-1-yl)methyl)thieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)pyrimidin-2-amine (XXII-25). In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and (E)-prop-1-ene-1-sulfonyl chloride, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 517.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 110
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00432
  • 2-(2-(4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-ylsulfonyl)ethyl)isoindoline-1,3-dione: In similar fashion, using Intermediate 1e and coupling with 2-(1,3-dioxoisoindolin-2-yl)ethanesulfonyl chloride in the presence of TEA, the following compound was prepared: MS m/z: 673.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 111
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00433
  • 3-(4-((2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)-4-isopropoxycyclobut-3-ene-1,2-dione: In similar fashion, treating Intermediate 1e with 3,4-diisopropoxycyclobut-3-ene-1,2-dione in the presence of TEA in acetonitrile, the following compound was prepared: MS m/z: 574.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 112
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00434
  • 3-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)-4-isopropoxycyclobut-3-ene-1,2-dione (XXII-26). In a similar way, the title compound was prepared. MS m/z: 551.2 (M+1).
    • Example 113
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00435
  • 3-(2-(4-((2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)-2-oxoethylamino)-4-isopropoxycyclobut-3-ene-1,2-dione (XXII-27). In a similar way, the title compound was prepared. MS m/z: 608.3 (M+1).
    • Example 114
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00436
  • 1-(4-((4-morpholino-2-phenylthieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)prop-2-en-1-one: In similar fashion as described above, when using phenylboronic acid in step 1d instead of 4-(trimethylstannyl)-1H-indazole under a standard Suzuki coupling condition, the following compounds were prepared: MS m/z: 450.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 115
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00437
  • (1H-imidazol-1-yl)(4-((4-morpholino-2-phenylthieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)piperazin-1-yl)methanone: MS m/z: 490.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 116
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00438
  • N-((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-methylacrylamide: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00439
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00440
    • Step 2a: (2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methanol (Intermediate 2a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00441
  • To a solution of compound 1b (5 g, 17.6 mmol) in MeOH (50 mL) was added NaBH4 (0.98 g, 26.4 mmol) portion wise at 0° C. and stirred for 5 h at RT. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure, residue dissolved in water and extracted with DCM (3×75 mL). The combined organic phases were washed with water, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to afford intermediate 6a (3 g, 60%) as a light yellow solid. TLC: 80% EtOAc/Hexane (Rf: 0.3); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 7.21 (s, 1H), 4.98 (s, 2H), 4.0 (t, J=4.2 Hz, 4H), 3.83 (t, J=4.8 Hz, 4H); Mass: 286 [M++1]
    • Step 2b: (2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl methanesulfonate (Intermediate 2b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00442
  • To a solution of Intermediate 2a (1 g, 3.5 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) was added TEA (1.06 g, 10.5 mmol) over a period of 10 minutes and followed by addition of mesyl chloride (0.48 g, 4.2 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at RT. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), water (25 mL) was added, extracted with DCM (2×50 mL). The combined organic phases were dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude compound was purified by silicagel column chromatography (50% EtOAc/hexane) to afford intermediate 2b (0.8 g, 62%) as a yellow solid. TLC: 80% EtOAc/Hexane (Rf: 0.6); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz) (SAV-A9008-009): δ 7.39 (s, 1H), 5.46 (s, 2H), 4.0 (t, J=4.5 Hz, 4H), 3.84 (t, J=5.0 Hz, 4H), 3.05 (s, 3H); Mass: 364 [M++1]; Mp: 151.4° C.
    • Step 2c: 1-(2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)-N-methylmethanamine (Intermediate 2c)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00443
  • A solution of Intermediate 2b (0.24 g, 0.67 mmol), 2M methylamine in THF (2.0 mL, 4.0 mmol) and DIEA (0.35 mL, 2.0 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was stirred at RT for 2 hours. LC-MS showed the complete conversion to the product. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude was used directly for the next step. MS m/z: 299.1 (M+1).
    • Step 2d: tert-butyl (2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl(methyl)carbamate (Intermediate 2d)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00444
  • The crude Intermediate 2c, Boc2O (0.22 g, 1.0 mmol), and TEA (0.2 mL) were dissolved in 10 mL dichloromethane and the solution was stirred for 10 hours. LC-MS showed the complete conversion to the product. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the crude was used directly for the next step. MS m/z: 399.1 (M+1).
    • Step 2e: tert-butyl (2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl(methyl)carbamate (Intermediate 2e)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00445
  • Intermediate 2d (0.20 g, 0.50 mmol), 3-hydroxyphenylboronic acid (139 mg, 1.0 mmol), Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (50 mg, 0.067 mmol) and sodium carbonate (0.5 g, 4.1 mmoL) were dissolved in toluene/ethanol/water (5 mL/3 mL/1.5 mL). The solution was degassed and flushed with N2. The reaction mixture was heated to 120° C. for 3 hours in a sealed vial. The solvent was removed under vacuum and the residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane 1:1). A total of 190 mg (66%) of the title compound was obtained.
  • MS m/z: 457.1 (M+1).
    • Step 2f: 3-(6-((methylamino)methyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)phenol (Intermediate 2f)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00446
  • Intermediate 2e was treated with 4N HCl following the procedure described in Example 102, step 1e to afford the title compound. MS m/z: 357.1 (M+1).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00447
    • Step 2g: N-((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-methylacrylamide (XXII-5)
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling acrylic acid with Intermediate 2f using HATU following the procedure described in Step 1f. MS m/z: 411.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 117
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00448
  • N-((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-methylethenesulfonamide: In similar fashion, using Intermediate 2f, the following compounds were prepared: MS m/z: 447.1 (M+1).
    • Example 118
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00449
  • 3-(6-((N-methylvinylsulfonamido)methyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)phenyl ethenesulfonate: MS m/z: 537.2 (M+1).
    • Example 119
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00450
  • 3-(((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)(methyl)amino)-4-isopropoxycyclobut-3-ene-1,2-dione: MS m/z: 495.1 (M+1).
    • Example 120
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00451
  • (R)-N-((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-methyl-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide: MS m/z: 469.2 (M+1).
    • Example 121
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00452
  • (S)-N-((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-methyl-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide: MS m/z: 469.2 (M+1).
    • Example 122
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00453
  • (E)-N-((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-methyl-4-oxohept-5-enamide: MS m/z: 481.2 (M+1).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00454
  • N-((2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)methyl)-N-methyl-4-oxo-4-(2-oxoazetidin-1-yl)butanamide (XXII-24). In similar fashion, using Intermediate 2f, the titled compounds was prepared: MS m/z: 510.2 (M+1).
    • Example 123
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00455
  • (R)-5-(4-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)-1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine-1-carbonyl)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00456
    • Step 3a: 4-(2-chloro-6-iodothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)morpholine (Intermediate 3a)
  • To a stirred solution of Intermediate 1a (5 g, 0.019 mol) in THF (100 mL) was added n-BuLi (2.5 g, 0.03 mol) at −78° C. over a period of 30 minutes, stirred for 2 h at −40° C. followed by addition of iodine (9.9 g, 0.03 mol) in THF (5 mL) at −78° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 8 h at RT. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride (100 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (4×200 mL). The organic layer was washed with sodium thiosulphate solution, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was washed with diethyl ether to afford intermediate 3a (7 g, 94%) as off white solid. TLC: 30% Ethyl acetate/hexane (Rf: 0.3); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): δ 7.57 (s, 1H), 3.94-3.91 (m, 4H), 3.85-3.80 (m, 4H); Mass: 382 [M++1], MP: 173.5° C.
    • Step 3b: tert-butyl 4-(2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)-5,6-dihydropyridine-1(2H)-carboxylate (Intermediate 3b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00457
  • To a stirred solution of 4-(2-chloro-6-iodothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-4-yl)morpholine (Intermediate 3a) (0.57 g, 1.5 mmol) in toluene (10 mL), EtOH (6.0 mL), H2O (3.0 mL) was added tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-5,6-dihydropyridine-1(2H)-carboxylate (0.5 g, 1.6 mmol), Na2CO3 (0.7 g) and Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (56 mg, 0.08 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was degassed with argon and stirred at 40° C. for 3 h. LC-MS showed the completion of the conversion: MS m/z: 437.1 (M+1). The reaction mixture was used directly for the next step.
    • Step 3c: tert-butyl 4-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)-5,6-dihydropyridine-1(2H)-carboxylate (Intermediate 3c)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00458
  • To the reaction mixture from step 3b was added 3-hydroxyphenylboronic acid (0.35 g, 2.5 mmol), Na2CO3 (1.0 g) and Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (30 mg, 0.04 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was degassed with argon and stirred at 130° C. for 3 h. The reaction was then worked up by adding ethyl acetate 50 mL and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was separated and was dried over Na2SO4. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subjected to chromatography on silica gel (eluents: EtOAc/hexane 1:1 to 4:1) to give the title compound. MS m/z: 495.1 (M+1).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00459
    • Step 3d: (R)-5-(4-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)-1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine-1-carbonyl)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one
  • The title compound was prepared by following the de-boc and the coupling procedures described in example 1. MS m/z: 507.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 124
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00460
  • In similar fashion, (S)-5-(4-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)-1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine-1-carbonyl)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one, XXII-1, was prepared: MS m/z: 507.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 125
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00461
  • 1-(4-(3-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)prop-2-ynyl)piperazin-1-yl)prop-2-en-1-one: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00462
    • Step 4a: tert-butyl 4-(3-(2-chloro-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)prop-2-ynyl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (Intermediate 4a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00463
  • To a stirred solution of Intermediate 3a (1.0 g, 2.6 mmol), tert-butyl 4-(prop-2-ynyl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (880 mg, 3.8 mmol) in THF (40 mL) were added TEA (16 mL) followed by Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (184 mg, 0.26 mmol) at RT, degassed with argon for 30 minutes and CuI (496 mg, 2.6 mmol) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was again degassed with argon for 30 minutes. The resulting reaction mixture was refluxed for 3 h. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction mixture was diluted with DCM. The organic layer was washed with water and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by silica gel column chromatography (20% EtOAc/Hexane) to afford intermediate 4a (0.60 g). Mass: 478 [M++1].
    • Step 4b: tert-butyl 4-(3-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)prop-2-ynyl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (Intermediate 4b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00464
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling intermediate 4a and 3-hydroxyphenylboronic acid following the procedures described in step 3c of Example 123. MS m/z: 536.2 (M+H+).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00465
    • Step 4c: 1-(4-(3-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)prop-2-ynyl)piperazin-1-yl)prop-2-en-1-one
  • The title compound was prepared by following the procedures described in Example 96, step 1e and 1f. MS m/z: 490.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 126
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00466
  • (R)-5-(4-(3-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)prop-2-ynyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one: In similar fashion, starting from intermediate 4b, using a suitable carboxylic acid, the following compounds are made.
    • Example 127
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00467
  • (S)-5-(4-(3-(2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-6-yl)prop-2-ynyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)dihydrofuran-2(3H)-one: In similar fashion, starting from intermediate 4b, using a suitable carboxylic acid, the following compounds are made.
    • Example 128
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00468
  • 2-(6-(1-acryloyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,6-dimethyl-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Synthesis of Intermediate 5-I
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00469
    • Step 5-I-a: Ethyl 3-amino-3-methylbutanoate hydrochloride salt (5-I-a)
  • To a solution of ethyl 3-methylbut-2-enoate (15 g, 117 mmol) in EtOH (40 mL) was added liquid ammonia (80 mL) at −70° C. and the reaction mixture stirred in a autoclave (200 Psi) at 45° C. for 16 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), excess ammonia was removed by flashing N2, cooled to 0° C. and HCl in dioxane (pH˜2) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at 0° C., the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the obtained solid was washed with diethyl ether to afford 5-I-a-HCl salt (10 g, 58.8%) as white solid; TLC: 10% MeOH/DCM (Rf: 0.1); 1H-NMR (DMSO d6, 200 MHz): δ 8.33 (bs, 1H), 4.09 (q, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 2.70 (s, 2H), 1.33 (s, 6H), 1.20 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 3H); Mass: 146 [M++1].
    • Step 5-I-b: Ethyl 3-(ethyl 2-carbamoylacetyl)-3-methylbutanoate (5-I-b)
  • To a solution of compound 5-I-a (11 g, 68.9 mmol) in DCM (150 mL) was added TEA (38.1 mL, 275 mmol) and ethyl malonoyl chloride (8.8 mL, 68.9 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 3 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched water and extracted with DCM (2×200 mL). The combined organic layer was washed with 1N HCl (100 mL), saturated NaHCO3 (100 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to afford 5-I-b (11 g, 62%) as brown syrup. TLC: 30% EtOAc/Hexane (Rf: 0.3); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 4.28-4.07 (m, 4H), 3.24 (s, 2H), 2.74 (s, 2H), 1.45 (s, 6H), 1.35-1.20 (m, 6H); Mass: 260 [M++1].
    • Steps 5-I-c and 5-I-d: 6,6-Dimethylpiperidine-2,4-dione (5-I-d)
  • To a stirred solution of compound 5-I-b (11 g, 42.6 mmol) in toluene (120 mL) was added NaOEt (4.34 g, 63.9 mmol) in toluene (30 mL) and the reaction mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 4 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched water, and the aqueous layer was extracted with diethyl ether (100 mL). The organic layer was separated; aqueous layer was acidified with 1N HCl and extracted with DCM (2×200 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The obtained crude 5-I-c was dissolved in 1% H2O/ACN (80 mL) and refluxed for 3 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the obtained residue was washed with diethyl ether to afford 5-I-d (3.2 g, 53.3%) as off white solid. TLC: 10% MeOH/DCM (Rf: 0.3); 1H-NMR (CDCl3+DMSO-d6, 200 MHz): δ 7.28 (bs, NH), 3.21 (s, 2H), 2.56 (s, 2H), 1.34 (s, 6H); Mass: 142 [M++1].
    • Step 5-I-e: 2-Amino-6,7-dihydro-6,6-dimethylthiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (5-I-e)
  • To a stirred solution of compound 5-I-d (3.2 g, 22.7 mmol) in THF (100 mL) was added Br2 (1.13 mL, 22.7 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 10 minutes at RT followed by addition of thiourea (1.72 g, 22.7 mmol) and DIPEA (12 mL, 68.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 2 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched water and extracted with EtOAc (2×150 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuo and the crude residue was washed with diethyl ether to afford 5-I-e (2.5 g, 56%) as yellow solid. TLC: 10% MeOH/DCM (Rf: 0.2); 1H-NMR (DMSO d6, 200 MHz): δ 7.63 (bs, 2H), 7.17 (bs, 1H), 2.61 (s, 2H), 1.22 (s, 6H); Mass: 198 [M++1].
    • Intermediate 5-I: 2-bromo-6,7-dihydro-6,6-dimethylthiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one
  • To a solution of compound 5-I-e (2.5 g, 12.7 mmol) in acetonitrile (70 mL) was added CuBr2 (2.26 g, 10.15 mmol) and tert-butyl nitrite (1.3 g, 12.8 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT. After completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched with 1N HCl and extracted with DCM (2×150 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, concentrated in vacuo and the crude residue was washed with diethyl ether to afford 5-I (2 g, 60%) as brown solid; TLC: 10% MeOH/DCM (Rf: 0.5); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): δ 5.48 (bs, NH), 3.02 (s, 2H), 1.4 (s, 6H); Mass: 283 [M++Na].
    • Synthesis of Intermediate 5-II
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00470
    • 4-Bromo-1-(1-ethoxyethyl)-1H-pyrazole (5-II-a)
  • To a solution of 4-bromo-1H-pyrazole (3 g, 20.4 mmol), ethyl vinyl ether (1.76 g, 24.5 mmol) in DCM (30 mL) was added HCl (4M in dioxane, 0.16 mL), and the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h at RT. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was neutralized with saturated NaHCO3 solution and extracted with DCM (3×100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to afford 5-II-a (4.46 g, 89%) as colorless liquid; TLC: 30% EtOAc/Hexane (Rf: 0.7); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 7.60 (s, 1H), 7.46 (s, 1H), 5.46 (q, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.55-3.25 (m, 2H), 1.63 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 3H), 1.15 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); MS: 221 [M++2].
    • 1-(1-ethoxyethyl)-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (5-II)
  • To a solution of compound 5-II-a (600 mg, 2.73 mmol) in dioxane (15 mL) was added KOAc (800 mg, 8.2 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboran (1.39 g, 5.4 mmol) and Pd(dppf)Cl2 (0.06 g, 0.08 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was degassed by purging with argon for 30 minutes and stirred at 50° C. for 16 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched with H2O and extracted with EtOAc (3×100 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude compound was purified by column chromatography (15% EtOAc/Hexane) to afford 5-II (500 mg, 68.5%) as off white solid. TLC: 30% EtOAc/Hexane (Rf: 0.4); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 7.90 (s, 1H), 7.79 (s, 1H), 5.56 (q, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.55-3.25 (m, 2H), 1.63 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 3H), 1.35 (s, 12H), 1.15 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); Mass: 267 [M++1].
    • Synthesis of XXIII-5 2-(6-(1-acryloyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,6-dimethyl-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one
  • The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00471
    • 2-(6-bromo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4-yl)-6,7-dihydro-6,6-dimethylthiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (5-III-1)
  • To a solution of compound 5-I (2.7 g, 10.3 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 mL) were added Cs2CO3 (6.71 g, 20.6 mmol), Xanthophos (476 mg, 0.82 mmol) and Pd(OAc)2 (139 mg, 0.61 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was degassed by purging with argon and 6-bromo-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine (2.31 g, 10.3 mmol) in acetonitrile was added. The reaction mixture was degassed for 45 minutes at RT and at 85° C. for 16 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of celite, washed with 5% MeOH/DCM and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude compound was purified by washing with diethyl ether to afford compound 5-III-1 (3.24 g, 80%) as brown solid. TLC: EtOAc (Rf: 0.4); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 8.24 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.14 (dd, J=2.4, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 6.83 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.29 (bs, NH), 4.38-4.30 (m, 2H), 4.10-4.02 (m, 2H), 2.90 (s, 2H), 1.40 (s, 6H); Mass: 394.5 [M++1]; MP: 154.7° C.
    • 2-(6-(1-(1-ethoxyethyl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,6-dimethyl-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (5-III-2)
  • To a solution of compound 5-III-1 (2.0 g, 5.0 mmol) in THF (70 mL) were added boronate ester 5-II (3.37 g, 12.7 mmol), Na2CO3 (1.6 g, 15.2 mmol), TBAB (653 mg, 20.3 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)4 (470 mg, 0.4 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was degassed by purging with argon for 45 minutes and stirred at 100° C. for 36 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and water was added. The aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (3×100 mL), the combined organic layers was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude compound was purified by column chromatography (3% MeOH/DCM) to afford 5-III-2 (850 mg, 37%) as brown solid. TLC: 5% MeOH/DCM (Rf: 0.4); 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 8.03 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.20 (d, J=2.4, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.95 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 5.55 (q, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 5.26 (bs, 1H), 4.40-4.30 (m, 2H), 4.25-4.15 (m, 2H), 3.55-3.35 (m, 2H), 2.90 (s, 2H), 1.73 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 3H), 1.43 (s, 6H), 1.15 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H); Mass: 476 [M++Na] and 382 [M−71].
    • 2-(6-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,6-dimethyl-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (5-III-3)
  • To a solution of compound 5-III-2 (0.85 g, 1.87 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) was added HCl/dioxane (2 mL) at 0° C. and the reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the volatiles were removed under reduced pressure and the residue was washed with diisopropyl ether followed by 20% EtOAc/hexane to afford 5-III-3 (600 mg, 84%) as off white solid. TLC: 10% MeOH/DCM (Rf: 0.3); 1H-NMR (DMSO d6, 200 MHz): δ 8.28 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (s, 1H), 7.53 (s, 1H), 7.3 (dd, J=2.2, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 4.35-4.25 (m, 2H), 4.14-4.05 (m, 2H), 2.83 (s, 2H), 1.28 (s, 6H). Mass: 382 [M++1].
    • 2-(6-(1-acryloyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,6-dimethyl-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (XXIII-5)
  • To a stirred solution of the above compound 5-III-3 (0.01 g, 0.024 mmol) in DCM (1.0 mL) was added TEA (0.008 g, 0.08 mmol) followed by acryloyl chloride (0.0025 g, 0.029 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was stirred for 0.5 h. The solvent was removed in vacuo. The crude compound was purified by prep. HPLC (25% to 90% CH3CN aqueous containing 0.1% TFA) to give 7.0 mg of the title compound. MS m/z: 436.0 (M+1).
    • Example 129
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00472
    • (1S,4S)-5-(4-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)benzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one
  • The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00473
    • Step 6a: 4-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)benzoic acid
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00474
  • 2-(6-bromo-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,6-dimethyl-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (compound 5-III-1) and 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzoic acid were coupled following the Suzuki coupling procedure described in step 3c to afford the title compound (30 mg). MS m/z: 436.2 (M+1).
    • Step 6b: (1S,4S)-5-(4-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)benzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one (XXIII-8)
  • To a solution of intermediate 6a (22 mg, 0.05 mmol) and (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one HCl salt (10 mg, 0.06 mmol) in 2 mL dichloromethane was added EDCI.HCl (15 mg, 0.08 mmol), HOBT (11 mg, 0.08 mmol) and DIEA (0.05 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at RT for 1 hour. After removal of solvent, the crude product was subject to prep. HPLC (40% to 90% CH3CN aqueous containing 0.1% TFA) to give 15 mg of the title compound. MS m/z: 531.2 (M+1).
    • Example 130
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00475
  • (1R,4R)-5-(4-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)benzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one. In similar fashion, when using (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one HCl salt in step 6b, the following compound was prepared: MS m/z: 531.2 (M+1).
    • Example 131
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00476
  • (R)-N-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide. The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00477
    • Step 7a: 6-nitro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-3(4H)-one (Intermediate 7a)
  • To a stirred solution of 2-amino-4-nitrophenol (3 g, 19.4 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) was added pyridine (1.6 mL, 19.4 mmol) and chloroacetyl chloride (1.53 mL, 19.4 mmol) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at RT followed by addition of 60% NaH (780 mg, 19.4 mmol) and continued stirring for another 2 h at RT. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched with ice cold water (150 mL), precipitated solid was filtered and dried to afford 7a (2 g, 54%) as off white solid. TLC: 60% Ethyl acetate/hexane (Rf: 0.4); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3): δ 8.05 (bs, 1H), 7.93 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (s, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 4.75 (s, 2H).
    • Step 7b: 3,4-dihydro-6-nitro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine (Intermediate 7b)
  • To a stirred solution of 7a (1.7 g, 8.85 mmol) in THF (30 mL) was added BF3 etharate (2.8 mL, 22.13 mmol) at 0° C., the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at RT and followed by addition of NaHB4 (836 mg, 22.13 mmol) at 0° C. under inert atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at RT. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc/H2O and aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2×100 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The obtained solid was purified by ether washing to afford 7b (1 g, 63%) as off white solid. TLC: 50% Ethyl acetate/hexane (Rf: 0.3); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3): δ 7.56 (dd, J=2.5, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (d, J=5.3 Hz, 1H), 6.8 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 4.33 (t, J=4.0 Hz, 2H), 3.48-3.44 (m, 2H); Mass: 178 [M++1].
    • Step 7c: 6,7-Dihydro-2-(2,3-dihydro-6-nitrobenzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4-yl)-6,6-dimethylthiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (Intermediate 7c)
  • To a stirred solution of 5-I (1 g, 3.8 mmol, from Example 128) in acetonitrile (25 mL) was added compound 7b (680 mg, 3.8 mmol), Xanthophos (176 mg, 0.3 mmol), Pd(OAc)2 (52 mg, 0.2 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (2.5 g, 7.6 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was degassed with argon for 45 minutes and stirred for 6 h at 80° C. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the volatiles were removed in vacuo, diluted with water and extracted with DCM (2×100 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was washed with diethyl ether to afford 7c (1 g, 73%) as light brown solid. TLC: Ethyl acetate (Rf: 0.3); 1H NMR (200 MHz, CDCl3): δ 9.32 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (dd, J=2.6, 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.33 (bs, 1H), 4.46 (t, J=4.4 Hz, 2H), 4.07 (t, J=4.6 Hz, 2H), 2.95 (s, 2H) and 1.41 (s, 6H).
    • Step 7d: 2-(6-amino-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4-yl)-6,7-dihydro-6,6-dimethylthiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (Intermediate 7d)
  • To a stirred solution of 7c (1 g, 2.7 mmol) in EtOAc/MeOH (1:1, 40 mL) was added Pd/C (100 mg). The reaction mixture was stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (60 Psi) for 36 h at RT. After the completion of reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of celite and filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was recrystallised from DCM/hexane to afford 7d (520 mg, 57%) as off white solid. TLC: 10% MeOH/DCM (Rf: 0.4); 1H NMR (500 MHz, CDCl3): δ 7.34 (d, J=3.0 Hz, 1H), 6.76 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (dd, J=2.5, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 5.17 (bs, 2H), 4.25 (t, J=4.0 Hz, 2H), 4.11 (t, J=5.5 Hz, 2H), 3.5 (bs, 2H), 2.87 (s, 2H), 1.39 (s, 6H); Mass: 331 [M++1]; MP: 244.8° C.
    • Step 7e: (R)-N-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling intermediate 7d and (R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid using HATU as described in step 1f, example 1. MS m/z: 443.2 (M+H+).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00478
    • Example 132
  • (S)-N-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide. The following compound was prepared by starting with Intermediate 7d and (S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid:MS m/z: 443.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 133
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00479
  • (1S,4S)-5-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carbonyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one. The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00480
    • Step 8a: methyl 4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carboxylate (Intermediate 8a)
  • To a stirred solution of compound 5-I (1 g, 3.8 mmol) in acetonitrile (40 mL) was added methyl 3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carboxylate (0.73 g, 3.8 mmol), Cs2CO3 (2.5 g, 7.6 mmol), Pd(OAc)2 (51 mg, 0.2 mmol) and Xanthophos (176 mg, 0.3 mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was degassed with argon for 45 minutes and stirred for 16 h at 80° C. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of celite and washed with DCM (100 mL) and the filtrate was washed with water (100 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude compound was purified by washings with diethyl ether to afford compound 8a (880 mg, 62%) as brown solid. TLC: EtOAc (Rf: 0.3). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 8.64 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (dd, J=2.0, 8.6 Hz, 1H), 6.99 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.21 (bs, 1H), 4.43-4.38 (m, 2H), 4.20-4.14 (m, 2H), 3.9 (s, 3H), 2.89 (s, 2H), 1.4 (s, 6H). MS: 374 [M++1].
    • Step 8b: 4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carboxylic acid (Intermediate 8b)
  • To a stirred solution of compound 8a (0.87 g, 2.3 mmol) in THF (7 mL) and H2O (4.6 mL) was added LiOH.H2O (195 mg, 4.6 mmol) at 0° C. and the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h at RT. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the aqueous layer was extracted with diethyl ether (2×30 mL) and organic layer was separated. The aqueous layer was acidified with 10% aqueous KHSO4 (pH˜2), stirred for 15 minutes and the obtained solid was filtered and dried to afford intermediate 8b (520 mg, 62%) as an off white solid. TLC: EtOAc (Rf: 0.1). 1H-NMR (DMSO-d6, 500 MHz): δ 12.80 (bs, 1H), 8.76 (s, 1H), 7.63 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (s, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 4.39 (t, J=4.0 Hz, 2H), 4.1 (t, J=5.0 Hz, 2H), 2.82 (s, 2H), 1.28 (s, 6H). MS: 360 [M++1]. IR: 3402, 3193, 2973, 2529, 1892, 1677, 1646, 1525, 1373, 1251, 1104, 751 cm−1. MP: 300.5° C.
    • Step 8c: (1S,4S)-5-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carbonyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one (XXIII-4)
  • The title compound was prepared by coupling intermediate 8b and (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one TFA salt using HATU as described in step 1f, example 1. MS m/z: 455.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 134
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00481
  • (1R,4R)-5-(4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carbonyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one. The following compound was prepared by starting with intermediate 8b and (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one TFA salt: MS m/z: 455.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 135
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00482
  • 6,6-dimethyl-2-(6-(2-oxopyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one. The title compounds are prepared by starting with intermediate 8b and coupling with a suitable amine or amide.
    • Example 136
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00483
  • 6,6-dimethyl-2-(6-(2-oxoazetidine-1-carbonyl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one. The title compounds are prepared by starting with intermediate 8b and coupling with a suitable amine or amide.
    • Example 137
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00484
  • (R)-4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-N-(1-methoxy-2-oxoazetidin-3-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carboxamide. The title compounds are prepared by starting with intermediate 8b and coupling with a suitable amine or amide.
    • Example 138
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00485
  • (S)-4-(6,6-dimethyl-4-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-2-yl)-N-(1-methoxy-2-oxoazetidin-3-yl)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazine-6-carboxamide. The title compounds are prepared by starting with intermediate 8b and coupling with a suitable amine or amide.
    • Example 139
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00486
  • 6,6-dimethyl-2-(6-(4-oxo-4H-chromen-6-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00487
    • Step 9a: 6,6-dimethyl-2-(6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one (9a)
  • To a stirred solution of compound 5-III-1 from example 5 (1.5 g, 3.8 mmol) in dioxane (30 mL) was added KOAc (1.16 g, 4.5 mmol), his (pinacolato) diboran (1.12 g, 11.4 mmol) and Pd(dppf)Cl2 (556 mg, 0.7 mmol) at RT. The reaction mixture was degassed by purging with argon for 30 minutes and stirred at 90° C. for 2 h. After completion of the reaction (monitored by TLC), the reaction was quenched with H2O and extracted with EtOAc (3×100 mL). The combined organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude compound was purified by column chromatography (40% EtOAc/Hexane) to afford compound 9a (900 mg, 53%) as off white solid. TLC: EtOAc (Rf: 0.5). 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 200 MHz): δ 8.16 (s, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 5.19 (bs, NH), 4.40-4.31 (m, 2H), 4.24-4.14 (m, 2H), 2.86 (s, 2H), 1.39 (s, 6H), 1.27 (s, 12H).
  • MS: 442 [M++1]
    • Step 9b: 6,6-dimethyl-2-(6-(4-oxo-4H-chromen-6-yl)-2H-benzo[b][1,4]oxazin-4(3H)-yl)-6,7-dihydrothiazolo[5,4-c]pyridin-4(5H)-one
  • The title compound was prepared by treating compound 9a with 6-bromo-4H-chromen-4-one under the standard Suzuki coupling conditions described in step 3c in example 3. MS m/z: 460.1 (M+H+).
    • Example 140
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00488
  • (S,Z)-2-(2,6-dichlorophenylamino)-5-(4-(4-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)quinolin-6-yl)methylene)thiazol-4(5H)-one: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
    • Step 10a: Methyl 4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)quinoline-6-carboxylate
  • To methyl 4-chloroquinoline-6-carboxylate (synthesized according to WO 2007099326) (1.5 g, 6.8 mmol) in isopropanol (30 mL) was added n-Boc-piperazine (1.3 g, 7.0 mmol), and the solution was heated to 90° C. for three days. The reaction was cooled to ambient temperature, filtered and the solvent removed by rotary evaporation. The product was purified by silica chromatography (DCM/EtOAc) to give the title compound (0.51 g, 1.4 mmol). 1H NMR (d6DMSO) δ ppm: 8.78 (d, J=5.1 Hz, 1H), 8.66 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.14 (dd, J=8.7, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.02 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.64-3.58 (m, 4H), 3.20-3.14 (m, 4H), 1.43 (s, 9H); m/z 372 (M+1).
    • Step 10b: Tert-butyl 4-(6-(hydroxymethyl)quinolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate
  • To methyl 4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)quinoline-6-carboxylate (0.51 g, 1.4 mmol) in THF (10 mL) cooled to 0° C. was added lithium aluminum hydride (0.10 g, 2.7 mmol) and the reaction stirred for 30 min. The reaction was quenched by addition of excess water and the product extracted with EtOAc (3×30 mL). The combined organics were dried (MgSO4), filtered, and the solvent removed by rotary evaporation to give the title compound as a yellow oil (0.45 g, 1.3 mmol). 1H NMR (d6DMSO) δ ppm: 8.64 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (d, J=0.9 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.62 (dd, J=8.3, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 5.38 (dd, J=6.0, 5.5 Hz, 1H), 4.67 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 3.63-3.57 (m, 4H), 3.14-3.08 (m, 4H), 1.43 (s, 9H). m/z 344 (M+1).
    • Step 10c: Tert-butyl 4-(6-formylquinolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate
  • To tert-butyl 4-(6-(hydroxymethyl)quinolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (0.45 g, 1.3 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) was added Dess-Martin periodinane (0.62 g, 1.5 mmol). The solution was stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The solution was filtered and the volatiles removed by rotary evaporation. The product was purified by silica chromatography (DCM/EtOAc) to provide the title compound as a yellow foam (0.31 g, 0.91 mmol). 1H NMR (d6DMSO) δ ppm: 10.20 (s, 1H), 8.80 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 8.62 (dd, J=1.4, 0.9 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (s, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 3.67-3.62 (m, 4H), 3.24-3.21 (m, 4H), 1.44 (s, 9H). m/z 342 (M+1).
    • Step 10d: (Z)-tert-butyl 4-(6-((2-(2,6-dichlorophenylamino)-4-oxothiazol-5(4H)-ylidene)methyl)quinolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate
  • Tert-butyl 4-(6-formylquinolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (0.17 g, 0.50 mmol), 2-(2,6-dichlorophenylamino)thiazol-4(5H)-one (see WO 2006132739) (0.13 g, 0.50 mmol), and piperidine (0.040 g, 0.50 mmol) were combined in a microwave vial and ethanol (2 mL) added. The solution was heated at 150° C. for 30 min in the microwave. The volatiles were removed on a rotary evaporator and the residue purified by silica chromatography (EtOAc/MeOH).
    • Step 10e: (S,Z)-2-(2,6-dichlorophenylamino)-5-(4-(4-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)quinolin-6-yl)methylene)thiazol-4(5H)-one
  • The purified material from above was dissolved in MeOH and treated with 4 N HCl in dioxane. After stirring for 1 h, the volatiles were removed by rotary evaporation. The residue was taken up in EtOAc and washed with saturated NaHCO3 solution. The solution was dried (MgSO4), filtered and the solvent removed by rotary evaporation. The residue was coupled with (S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid with HATU following the procedure described in step 1f in Example 96. MS m/z: 597.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 141
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00489
  • (R,Z)-2-(2,6-dichlorophenylamino)-5-((4-(4-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)quinolin-6-yl)methylene)thiazol-4(5H)-one. In similar fashion, the following compound was prepared when using (R)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid in step 10e: MS m/z: 597.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 142
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00490
  • (S,Z)-5-((4-(4-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)quinolin-6-yl)methylene)thiazolidine-2,4-dione. In similar fashion, when using thiazolidine-2,4-dione to couple with tert-butyl 4-(6-formylquinolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate in step 10d, followed by step 10e, the title compound can be prepared.
    • Example 143
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00491
  • (R,Z)-5-((4-(4-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)quinolin-6-yl)methylene)thiazolidine-2,4-dione. In similar fashion, when using thiazolidine-2,4-dione to couple with tert-butyl 4-(6-formylquinolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate in step 10d, followed by step 10e, but using acrylic acid instead, the title compound can be prepared.
    • Example 144
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00492
    • (Z)-5-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)quinolin-6-yl)methylene)thiazolidine-2,4-dione Example 145
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00493
  • N-(3-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)phenyl)acrylamide. The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00494
    • Step 11a: tert-butyl 3-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)phenylcarbamate (Intermediate 11a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00495
  • Intermediate 11a was prepared by coupling Intermediate 1a and tert-butyl 3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenylcarbamate following the standard Suzuki coupling conditions described in step 3c, Example 3. MS m/z: 413.3 (M+1).
    • Step 11b: N-(3-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)phenyl)acrylamide
  • The title compound was prepared by following the procedures described in Example 96, step 1e and 1f. MS m/z: 367.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 146
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00496
  • (1S,4S)-5-(3-hydroxy-5-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)benzyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one: The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00497
    • Step 12a: 3-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)-5-propoxybenzaldehyde (Intermediate 12a)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00498
  • Intermediate 12a was prepared by coupling Intermediate 1a and 3-formyl-5-propoxyphenylboronic acid following the standard Suzuki coupling conditions described in step 3c, Example 3. MS m/z: 384.1 (M+1).
    • Step 12b: 3-hydroxy-5-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)benzaldehyde (Intermediate 12b)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00499
  • The title compound was prepared by treating intermediate 12a with 2 equivalents BBr3 in dichloromethane at −78° C. to RT for 1 hour. MS m/z: 342.1 (M+H+).
    • Step 12c: (1S,4S)-5-(3-hydroxy-5-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)benzyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one
  • The title compound was prepared by treating intermediate 12b with (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one TFA salt (2 equivalents), NaBH3CN (4 equivalent) in acetonitrile/acetic acid (3:1). MS m/z: 439.2 (M+H+).
    • Example 147
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00500
  • (1R,4R)-5-(3-hydroxy-5-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)benzyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one. In similar fashion, when using (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one TFA salt, the following compound can be prepared:
    • Example 148
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00501
  • (1S,4S)-5-(3-hydroxy-5-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)benzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one. The title compound can be prepared from compound 12b by a two-step sequence: 1) oxidation to the carboxylic acid by a suitable oxidant, 2) coupling of the resulting acid with an appropriate amine.
    • Example 149
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00502
  • (1R,4R)-5-(3-hydroxy-5-(4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidin-2-yl)benzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one. The title compound can be prepared from compound 12b by a two-step sequence: 1) oxidation to the carboxylic acid by a suitable oxidant, 2) coupling of the resulting acid with an appropriate amine.
    • Example 150
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00503
  • 2-(1H-indazol-4-yl)-N-(1-methoxy-2-oxoazetidin-3-yl)-4-morpholinothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidine-6-carboxamide. Using the intermediates described in the above examples and the chemistry outlined in the procedures, the title compound can be prepared accordingly.
    • Example 151
  • 2,4-difluoro-N-(2-methoxy-5-(4-(4-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carbonyl)phenyl)quinolin-6-yl)pyridin-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide (XXV-13). The title compound was prepared through the following intermediate as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00504
  • 4-(6-(5-(2,4-difluorophenylsulfonamido)-6-methoxypyridin-3-yl)quinolin-4-yl)benzoic acid: The title acid was prepared by following the similar chemistry as published in patents WO2008144463 and WO20081444464.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00505
  • 2,4-difluoro-N-(2-methoxy-5-(4-(4-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carbonyl)phenyl)quinolin-6-yl)pyridin-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide (XXV-13). The title compound was prepared through standard HATU coupling of the benzoic acid above and (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one.
  • 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): δ 8.99 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 1H), 8.27 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.98-7.88 (m, 5H), 7.78-7.75 (m, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 1H), 7.29-7.25 (m, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 2H), 5.26 (bs, 1H), 4.95-4.91 (m, 1H), 3.96-3.93 (m, 4H), 2.36 (d, J=10 Hz, 1H), 2.17 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 2.05-2.03 (m, 1H).
  • MS: m/z=643.1 [M+H]
    • Example 152
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00506
  • 2,4-difluoro-N-(2-methoxy-5-(4-(4-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carbonyl)phenyl)quinolin-6-yl)pyridin-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide (XXV-15): The title compound was prepared in the same way as for XXV-13 using enantiomeric amine in the final coupling step.
  • 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): δ 8.99 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 1H), 8.27 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 7.98-7.88 (m, 5H), 7.78-7.75 (m, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 1H), 7.29-7.25 (m, 1H), 6.91 (d, J=5.5 Hz, 2H), 5.26 (bs, 1H), 4.95-4.91 (m, 1H), 3.96-3.93 (m, 4H), 2.36 (d, J=10 Hz, 1H), 2.17 (d, J=10.5 Hz, 1H), 2.05-2.03 (m, 1H).
  • MS: m/z 643.1 [M+H].
    • Example 153
  • N-(4-(6-(5-(2,4-difluorophenylsulfonamido)-6-methoxypyridin-3-yl)quinolin-4-yl)phenyl)acrylamide (XXV-14). The title compound was prepared through the following intermediate as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00507
  • N-(5-(4-(4-aminophenyl)quinolin-6-yl)-2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)-2,4-difluorobenzene-sulfonamide: The title acid was prepared by following the similar chemistry as published in patents WO2008144463 and WO20081444464.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00508
  • N-(4-(6-(5-(2,4-difluorophenylsulfonamido)-6-methoxypyridin-3-yl)quinolin-4-yl)phenyl)acrylamide. The title compound was prepared through the standard HATU coupling of the aniline above and acrylic acid.
  • 1H-NMR (CDCl3+CD3OD, 500 MHz): δ 8.88 (d, J=5.0 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (d, J=9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 7.97 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 7.91-7.88 (m, 3H), 7.78-7.73 (m, 1H), 7.54 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.42 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H), 6.95-6.84 (m, 2H), 6.48-6.40 (m, 2H), 5.79 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 3.93 (s, 3H).
  • LCMS: 595 [M+Na], 573 [M+H]
    • Example 154
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00509
  • (1R,4R)-5-(3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxybenzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one (XXXVII-5): The title compound was prepared according to the steps and intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00510
    • Step 8b: Ethyl 3-(5-chloro-2-(chloromethyl)-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxybenzoate
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00511
  • To a mixture of 2-chloro-6-(2-chloroacetamido)benzoic acid (5.7 g, 22.97 mmol), ethyl 3-amino-4-methoxybenzoate (4.0 g, 20.67 mmol) in THF (24 mL) at 0° C., was added PCl3 (4.7 mL, 34.45 mmol). The reaction mixture was then refluxed at 65° C. for 1-2 h. After completion of reaction, reaction mixture was poured into water and extracted with EtOAc. Organic layer was washed with dilute HCl (2×25 mL) and saturated NaHCO3 (2×25 mL), brine solution and dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. After filtration and concentration, the crude product was purified by column chromatography using 17% EtOAc in Hexane, giving compound 8b as a white solid (5.4 g, 65% yield).
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 1.280 (t, 3H), 3.831 (s, 3H), 4.254 (m, 4H), 7.359-8.145 (m, 6H).
  • Mass: 407.0 (M+1)
    • Step 8c: ethyl 3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxybenzoate
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00512
  • To a solution of 6-mercaptopurine (0.459 g, 2.70 mmol) in DMF (10 mL), was added anhydrous K2CO3 (0.397 g. 2.94 mmol). After stirring for 15-20 min, compound 8b (1.0 g, 2.45 mmol) was added and the reaction was continued under for 1-1.5 hr. The reaction mixture was then poured in water (150 mL), and the precipitated was filtered out, giving white solid (1.1 g, 86% yield).
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 1.233 (t, 3H), 3.801 (s, 3H), 4.182 (m, 2H), 4.227 (q, 2H), 7.143-8.392 (m, 8H).
  • Mass: 523.0 (M++1).
    • Step 8d: 3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxybenzoic acid
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00513
  • Compound 8c (1.4 g, 2.67 mmol) and NaOH (0.214 g, 5.35 mmol) was stirred in a mixed solvent of in ethanol (5 mL) and water (15 mL). Reaction was monitored by TLC/mass periodically, and stopped at ˜50% conversion. Reaction mixture was worked up by removing ethanol-water then, water (15 mL) was added and then HCl was added at 0-5° C. up to acidic pH. The white solid was filtered out, giving 560 mg of desired acid (41% yield).
  • Mass: 495.0 (M+1).
    • Step 8e: (1R,4R)-5-(3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxybenzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00514
  • To a mixture of Compound 8d (0.4 g, 0.81 mmol), (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one (0.179 g, 1.21 mmol), DIPEA (0.628 g, 4.86 mmol) in 5 mL of acetonitrile was HATU (0.456 g, 1.21 mmol). After 10 min, the reaction mixture was concentrated, and purified by prep-HPLC.
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 2.143 (t, 2H), 2.287 (t, 2H), 3.769 (s, 3H), 4.482 (dd, 2H), 5.303 (s, 1H), 7.137-8.480 (m, 8H), 13.508 (s, 1H).
  • Mass: 590.1 (M+1).
    • Example 155
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00515
  • (1S,4S)-5-(3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxybenzoyl)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one (XXXVII-1). The title compound was made in the same way as for using enantiomeric amine in the final step.
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 2.143 (t, 2H), 2.287 (t, 2H), 3.769 (s, 3H), 4.482 (dd, 2H), 5.303 (s, 1H), 7.137-8.480 (m, 8H), 13.508 (s, 1H).
  • Mass: 590.1 (M+1).
    • Example 156
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00516
  • (S)-N-(3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxyphenyl)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide (XXXVII-3). The title compound was made through the intermediates as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00517
  • 5-chloro-2-(chloromethyl)-3-(2-methoxy-5-nitrophenyl)quinazolin-4(3H)-one: The title intermediate was made in a similar way as describe in step 8b using 2-methoxy-5-nitroaniline as aniline counterpart.
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 3.336 (s, 3H), 4.366 (dd, 2H), 7.460-8.575 (m, 6H).
  • Mass: 380 (M+).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00518
  • 2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-3-(2-methoxy-5-nitrophenyl)quinazolin-4(3H)-one: The title intermediate was made in the same way as describe in step 8c. Mass: 496 (M+1), 498 (M+2).
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00519
  • 2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-3-(5-amino-2-methoxyphenyl)-5-chloroquinazolin-4(3H)-one: The nitro group was reduced by Fe powder in the presence of catalytic amount of HCl, giving the desired aniline as brownish solid.
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 3.596 (s, 3H), 4.420 (dd, 2H), 4.892 (s, 2H), 6.624-8.552 (m, 8H).
  • Mass: 466 (M+1).
    • Example 157
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00520
  • (S)-N-(3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxyphenyl)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide (XXXVII-3). The title compound was made through standard HATU coupling of the aniline above with (R)-5-oxo-2-tetrahydrofuran carboxylic acid.
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 2.309 (m, 2H), 2.474 (m, 2H), 3.582 (s, 3H), 4.430 (dd, 2H), 4.976 (t, 1H), 7.059-8.425 (m, 8H), 10.100 (s, 1H).
  • Mass: 578.1 (M+1).
    • Example 158
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00521
  • (R)-N-(3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxyphenyl)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamide (XXXVII-2). The title compound was made in the same way as for XXXVII-3 using (S)-5-Oxo-2-tetrahydrofuran carboxylic acid in the final step.
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 2.309 (m, 2H), 2.474 (m, 2H), 3.582 (s, 3H), 4.430 (dd, 2H), 4.976 (t, 1H), 7.059-8.425 (m, 8H), 10.100 (s, 1H).
  • Mass: 578.1 (M+1).
    • Example 159
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00522
  • (1S,4S)-N-(3-(2-((9H-purin-6-ylthio)methyl)-5-chloro-4-oxoquinazolin-3(4H)-yl)-4-methoxyphenyl)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-5-carboxamide (XXXVII-4). The title compound was made using the aniline as for XXXVII-3, triphosgene, (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one in the presence of triethylamine.
  • 1H NMR: (DMSO, 400 MHz): δ 2.044 (t, 2H), 2.219 (t, 2H), 3.678 (s, 3H), 4.492 (dd, 2H), 4.784 (s, 1H), 4.875 (s, 1H), 7.003-8.746 (m, 8H).
  • Mass: 605.1 (M+1).
    • Example 160
  • N-(7-methoxy-8-(4-oxo-4-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butoxy)-2,3-dihydroimidazo[1,2-c]quinazolin-5-yl)nicotinamide (XXVII-13). The title compound was prepared through the following intermediate as described below.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00523
  • 4-(7-methoxy-5-(nicotinamido)-2,3-dihydroimidazo[1,2-c]quinazolin-8-yloxy)butanoic acid. The title acid was prepared by following the similar chemistry as published in patents WO2009091550.
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00524
  • N-(7-methoxy-8-(4-oxo-4-((1R,4R)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butoxy)-2,3-dihydroimidazo[1,2-c]quinazolin-5-yl)nicotinamide (XXVII-13). The title compound was prepared by standard HATU coupling of the carboxylic acid above and (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one.
  • 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): δ 12.82 (bs, 1H), 9.47 (s, 1H), 8.70 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.35-7.31 (m, 1H), 6.81 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 5.11-5.15 (m, 1H), 4.20-4.17 (m, 5H), 4.04 (s, 3H), 3.70-3.50 (m, 4H), 2.65-2.60 (m, 2H), 2.50-2.45 (m, 2H), 2.22-2.20 (m, 2H).
  • MS: m/z 519.1 (M++1)
    • Example 161
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00525
  • N-(7-methoxy-8-(4-oxo-4-((1S,4S)-3-oxo-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-5-yl)butoxy)-2,3-dihydroimidazo[1,2-c] quinazolin-5-yl)nicotinamide (XXVII-14). The title compound was prepared in the same way as for XXVII-13 using (1R,4R)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one in the final coupling step.
  • 1H-NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): δ 12.82 (bs, 1H), 9.47 (s, 1H), 8.70 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.35-7.31 (m, 1H), 6.81 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 5.11-5.15 (m, 1H), 4.20-4.17 (m, 5H), 4.04 (s, 3H), 3.70-3.50 (m, 4H), 2.65-2.60 (m, 2H), 2.50-2.45 (m, 2H), 2.22-2.20 (m, 2H).
  • MS: m/z 519.1 (M+H)
    • E. PI3K Biological Data
  • Compounds of the present invention are assayed as inhibitors of PI3 kinases using the following general protocol.
    • Example 162 HTRF Assay Protocol for Potency Assessment Against the Active Form of p110α/p85α
  • The protocol below describes an end-point, competition-binding HTRF assay used to measure inherent potency of test compounds against active p110α/p85α p110β/p85α, p120γ enzymes. The mechanics of the assay platform are best described by the vendor (Millipore, Billerica, Mass.) on their website at the following URL: http://www.millipore.com/coa/tech1/74jt4z.
  • Briefly, Stop solution (Stop A, #33-007 and Stop B, #33-009; 3:1 ratio) and Detection Mix (DMC, #33-015 with DMA, #33-011 and DMB, #33-013; 18:1:1 ratio) were prepared as recommended by the manufacturer ˜2 hrs prior to use. Additionally, 1× reaction buffer (4× buffer stock #33-003), a 1.4× stock of enzyme from BPS Bioscience (San Diego, Calif.) or Millipore (Billerica, Mass.) with di-C8-PIP2 lipid substrate (#33-005), and a 4×ATP solution (#A7699) Sigma/Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.) were prepared in 1× reaction buffer. 15 μL of enzyme and lipid substrate mix were pre-incubated in a Corning (#3573) 384-well, black, non-treated microtiter plate (Corning, N.Y.) for 30 min at 25° C. with a 0.5 μL volume of 50% DMSO and serially diluted compounds prepared in 50%-75% DMSO. Lipid kinase reactions were started with the addition of 5 μL of ATP solution, mixed for 15 sec on a rotary plate shaker and incubated for 15-30 minutes at 25° C. Next, reactions were stopped with a 5 μL addition of Stop solution followed by a 5 μL volume of Detection Mix. Stopped reactions were equilibrated for 1 and 18 hrs at room temperature and then read in a Synergy4 plate reader from BioTek (Winooski, Vt.) at λex330-80/λem620-35 and λem665-7.5. At the conclusion of each assay, the HTRF ratio from fluorescence emission values for each well was calculated and % Inhibition determined from averaged controls wells. % Inhibition values for each compound are then plotted against inhibitor concentration to estimate IC50 from log[Inhibitor] vs Response, Variable Slope model in GraphPad Prism from GraphPad Software (San Diego, Calif.).
  • Reagents used in optimized protocol:
      • [p110α/p85α]=500-750 pM, [ATP]=50 μM, [di-C8-PIP2]=10 μM
      • (40620; BPS Bioscience or 14-602; Millipore)
  • Reference Inhibitor IC50s:
      • LY294002=1.3 μM (published IC50's=0.7-3 μM)
  • Wortmannin=2.9 nM (published IC50's=1-5 nM)
  • Reagents used in optimized protocol:
      • [p110β/p85α]=750 pM−1.25 nM, [ATP]=50 μM, [di-C8-PIP2]=10 μM
      • (14-603; Millipore)
  • Reference Inhibitor IC50s:
      • PIK75=249 nM (published IC50's=343 nM)
  • AZ-REF=21 nM
  • Reagents used in optimized protocol:
      • [p120γ]=1-4 nM, [ATP]=50 μM, [di-C8-PIP2]=10 μM
      • (40625; BPS Bioscience)
  • Reference Inhibitor IC50s:
      • PIK75=55 nM
      • AZ-REF=14 nM
  • [ATP] and [PIP2] were kept static at or below KMapp for each.
  • Table 4 shows the activity of selected compounds of this invention in the PI3Ka-HTRF-IC50 nM, PI3KBg-HTRF-IC50 nM, and HCT116-WB Assays. Compounds having an activity designated as “A” provide an IC50≦10 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “B” provide an IC50>10 nM and ≦100 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “C” provide an IC50>100 nM and ≦1000 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “D” provide an IC50>1000 nM and <10,000 nM; and compounds having an activity designated as “E” provide an IC50≦10,000 nM.
  • TABLE 4
    Compound Inhibition
    Designation Enzyme/Assay Designation
    XXII-1 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-2 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    HCT116-WB C
    XXIV-1 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    XXIV-2 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXIII-1 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXIII-2 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-3 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    HCT116-WB C
    XXIII-3 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXIII-4 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXIII-5 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-4 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-5 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    XXIII-6 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-6 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    HCT116-WB B
    XXII-7 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    HCT116-WB B
    XXIII-7 PI3Kα D
    PI3Kγ D
    XXII-8 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-9 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-10 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    HCT116-WB C
    XXII-11 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    HCT116-WB B
    XXIII-8 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    HCT116-WB D
    XXII-12 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-13 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-14 PI3Kα B
    XXII-15 PI3Kα B
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-16 PI3Kα B
    XXII-17 PI3Kα B
    XXII-18 PI3Kα D
    XXII-19 PI3Kα D
    XXII-20 PI3Kα C
    PI3Kγ D
    XXII-21 PI3Kα D
    PI3Kγ D
    XXII-22 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-23 PI3Kβ D
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-24 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ
    XXII-25 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ B
    XXII-26 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-27 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-28 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-29 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-30 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ B
    XXII-31 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-32 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXII-33 PI3Kβ C
    PI3Kγ C
    XXXVII-1 PI3Kβ C
    XXXVII-2 PI3Kβ C
    XXXVII-3 PI3Kβ C
    XXXVII-4 PI3Kβ C
    XXV-13 PI3Kβ A
    XXV-14 PI3Kβ A
    XXV-15 PI3Kβ A
    XXVII-13 PI3Kβ C
    XXVII-14 PI3Kβ C
    • I. Mass Spectrometric Analysis of PI3K Contacted with Compounds of the Invention Example 163
  • Intact PI3Kβ was incubated for 3 hr at a 10× fold access of compound to protein. 5 μL aliquots of the samples were diluted with 15 μL of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 ZipTipping directly onto the MALDI target using Sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). Spots were then analyzed via MALDI-MS. XXII-10 modified PI3Kβ 100% by 3 h. XXII-8, XXII-6, XXIII-4, and XXIII-3 each provided between about 35% to about 55% modification.
    • Example 164
  • Intact PI3Kγwas incubated for 1 hr at a 10-fold excess of compound XXII-33 to protein at 37° C. 5 μL aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 μL of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 Ziptipping directly onto the MALDI target plate using sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). The top panel of FIG. 22 shows the mass spectral trace of the intact PI3Kγ protein (m/z=131,963 Da). The bottom panel of FIG. 22 shows the mass spectral trace when PI3Kγwas incubated with compound XXII-33 (mw=550.64). The centroid mass (m/z=132,455 Da) shows a mass shift of 492 Da (90%), indicating complete modification of PI3Kγ by compound XXII-33.
    • J. PDPK-1 Inhibitors Synthetic Examples Example 165 Synthetic Scheme for Intermediate A
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00526
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00527
    • Step-1: Compound 1
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00528
  • To a stirred solution of propane-1,3-diamine (10 g, 134.9 mmol) in chloroform (250 ml) at 0° C. was added boc-anhydride (6.2 ml, 26.9 mmol) in chloroform (250 ml) dropwise and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. (5 parallel reactions were carried out). Then the reaction mixtures were mixed together, concentrated to ˜50% of its total volume and filtered. The filtrate was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulphate and concentrated. The residue was taken in petroleum ether and the undissolved portion was removed by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated to obtain compound 1 (19 g, 80.8%) as colorless liquid.
    • Step-2: Compound 2
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00529
  • To a stirred solution of 1 (19 g, 109 mmol) in acetonitrile (120 mL) at 0° C. was added triethylamine (23 ml, 165 mmol) followed by 5-bromo-2,4-dichloropyrimidine (35 g, 153.5 mmol). Stirring continued at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated completely and the residue obtained was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water and brine solution, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude was then purified using column chromatography (SiO2, petroleum ether:ethyl acetate, 9:1) to obtain compound 2 as pale brown solid (26.5 g, 66.5%).
    • Step-3: Compound 3
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00530
  • A cooled solution of HCl in dioxane (4M, 150 mL) was added to compound 2 (30 g, 82 mmol) and then stirred at room temperature for 5 h. The solid obtained was collected by filtration, washed with petroleum ether and dried (25 g, quantitative).
    • Step-4: Compound 4
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00531
  • To a stirred solution of 3-ethoxy-2,2-dimethyl-3-oxopropanoic acid (10 g, 62.4 mmol) in dichloromethane (100 ml) at 0° C. was added oxalyl chloride (6.4 g, 75.6 mmol) followed by two drops DMF. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and then concentrated under vacuum to obtain brown oil. This was then added dropwise into a solution of 3 (15.5 g, 51.3 mmol) and DIPEA (36 ml, 206.7 mmol) in acetonitrile (100 ml) at 0° C. and stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixture was completely concentrated under vacuum to obtain a residue. One more similar batch of reaction was carried out in parallel and both the residues were taken together in ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate layer was washed with 1.5 N HCl, 10% NaHCO3 solution and brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude was purified using column chromatography (SiO2, 15-20% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to yield compound 4 as white solid (25 g, 59.7%).
    • Step-5: Compound 5
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00532
  • To a stirred solution of 4 (10 g, 24.5 mmol) in ethanol (200 mL) were added 3-nitroaniline (4.4 g, 31.85 mmol) and conc. HCl (0.2 ml). The reaction mixture then stirred at 60° C. in a sealed tube for 16 h during which time pale yellow solid separated out. The solid obtained (compound 5) was collected by filtration, washed with petroleum ether and dried (11.7 g, 93.6%).
    • Step-6: Compound 6
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00533
  • To a stirred solution of 5 (11.7 g, 23 mmol) in ethyl acetate (120 mL) was added stannous chloride (26 g, 115 mmol) in portions. Then the reaction mixture was refluxed for 3 h. It was cooled to r.t., diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with sodium bicarbonate solution. Filtered to remove the insolubles; the filtrate was washed with brine, dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and concentrated to obtain compound 6 as pale brown viscous oil (9.98 g, 90.6%).
    • Step-7: Intermediate A
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00534
  • To a solution of 6 (9.98 g, 20.8 mmol) in dry methanol (50 mL) at 0° C. was added saturated methanolic ammonia (50 mL) in a sealed tube. Then the reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 4 days. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the crude product obtained was purified by column chromatography (SiO2, 4% methanol in chloroform) to obtain Intermediate A as white solid (6.2 g, 66%). MS m/z: 450.1, 452.0 (M+H+).
    • Preparation of Intermediate B
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00535
  • Intermediate B was prepared similarly following the synthetic procedures described for Intermediate A, except using 4-nitroaniline in step 5. MS m/z: 450.1, 452.0 (M+H+).
  • In similar fashion, Intermediate C and Intermediate D were prepared:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00536
    • Example 166
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00537
  • To a solution of intermediate A (0.5 g, 1.11 mmol), (S)-5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid (0.29 g, 2.23 mmol) and DIPEA (0.3 ml, 1.72 mmol) in dichloromethane (2.5 ml) at 0° C. was added T3P (2-Propanephosphonic acid anhydride, 50% solution in ethyl acetate, 1.8 ml, 2.83 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. The reaction mixture was directly adsorbed on basic alumina and subjected to column chromatography (eluted with dichloromethane). The residue obtained after evaporating the column fractions was treated with sodium bicarbonate solution and extracted with dichloromethane. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulphate and concentrated to obtain pale yellow solid. The product was further washed with diethyl ether and dried under vacuum to obtain the title compound as pale yellow solid (0.13 g, 20.8%).
  • 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): δ=1.28 (s, 6H), 1.65 (m, 2H), 2.22 (m, 1H), 2.54 (m, 3H), 3.11 (m, 2H), 3.41 (m, 2H), 5.06 (m, 1H), 7.08-7.21 (m, 5H), 7.45 (m, 1H), 7.64 (t, J=6 Hz, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H), 8.03 (s, 1H), 9.34 (s, 1H), 10.18 (s, 1H); LCMS: m/e: 562.0, 564.0 (M+1).
    • Example 167
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00538
    • Step-1: tert-butyl 2-(3-(4-(3-(3-amino-2,2-dimethyl-3-oxopropanamido)propylamino)-5-bromopyrimidin-2-ylamino)phenylamino)-2-oxoethylcarbamate
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00539
  • Intermediate A (102 mg, 0.23 mmoL), Boc-glycine (44 mg, 0.25 mmoL) was dissolved in DMF (1 mL). Hydroxybenzotriazole (38 mg, 0.25 mmoL) was added followed by N-ethyl-N1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride salt (48 mg, 0.25 mmoL) and N-methyl morpholine (75 uL, 0.68 mmoL). Stir at room temperature for 1 h, partition with saturated Sodium bicarbonate solution (2 mL) and ethyl acetate (5 mL). The layers were separated and the organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate; filtration and the solvent was removed via rotary evaporation gave a yellow oil 164 mg. LC/MS: RT=2.27 min, m/e 607.0/609.2 (M+1).
    • Step-2: N1-(3-(2-(3-(2-aminoacetamido)phenylamino)-5-bromopyrimidin-4-ylamino)propyl)-2,2-dimethylmalonamide (HCl salt)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00540
  • To a solution of tert-butyl 2-(3-(4-(3-(3-amino-2,2-dimethyl-3-oxopropanamido)propylamino)-5-bromopyrimidin-2-ylamino)phenylamino)-2-oxoethylcarbamate (164 mg, 0.27 mmol) in DCM (5 mL) was added HCl (4N in dioxane 1 mL). Stir overnight at rt; remove solvent via rotary evaporation to give a white solid 170 mg. LC/MS: RT=2.13 min, m/e: 507.1/509.1 (M+1).
    • Step-3: XI-26
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00541
  • N1-(3-(2-(3-(2-aminoacetamido)phenylamino)-5-bromopyrimidin-4-ylamino)propyl)-2,2-dimethylmalonamide (HCl salt from step 2) (31 mg, 0.06 mmol) was charged in DMF (500 uL). To this was added 5-oxotetrahydrothiophene-3-carboxylic acid (8 mg, 0.06 mmoL), DIPEA (40 uL, 0.23 mmoL), and HATU (22 mg, 0.06 mmoL) and stirred for 30 min at room temperature. The mixture was purified directly using prep HPLC to give a white solid 9 mg as the TFA salt LC/MS: RT=2.02 m/e 635.1/637.0 (M+1).
    • Example 168
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00542
  • To a solution of intermediate D (125 mg, 0.25 mmol), HATU (0.50 mmol) and DIPEA (excess) in DMF was added (1S,4S)-2-oxa-5-azabicyclo[2.2.1]heptan-3-one (TFA salt, 0.50 mmol) at room temperature for 16 h. After work-up, the crude product was obtained as a gummy material (125 mg, LCMS purity ˜58%). The title compound was obtained after purification over preparative HPLC (20 mg). LCMS: m/e: 599.6, 601.6 (M−1).
  • In similar fashion, the compounds in the following table were made according to the procedures described above and from an appropriate intermediate A, B, C, or D.
  • TABLE 5
    Compound From
    Structures MS (M + 1) Intermediate
    XI-21 578.1/580.0 A
    XI-22 635.1/637.0 A
    XI-23 578.1/580.0 A
    XI-24 635.1/637.0 A
    XI-25 626.1/628.0 A
    XI-26 635.1/637.0 A
    XI-27 578.1/580.0 A
    XI-28 617.1/619.0 A
    XI-29 588.2/590.1 A
    XI-30 602.1/604.0 A
    XI-31 561.0/563.1 A
    XI-32 691.0/693.2 A
    XI-33 660.2/662.1 A
    XI-34 649.0/651.0 A
    XI-35 624.1/626.1 B
    XI-36 623.6/625.6 (M − 1) A
    XI-37 — A
    XI-38 619.2/621.2 A
    XI-39 504.1/506.1 B
    XI-40 602.1/604.1 D
    XI-41 599.6/601.6 (M − 1) D
    XI-42 562.1/564.1 B
    XI-43 562.1/564.1 B
    XI-44 602.1/604.1 C
    XI-45 602.1/604.1 C
    XI-46 532.0/534.0 A
    XI-47 648.1/650.0 A
    XI-48 645.0/647.0 A
    XI-49 645.0/647.0 A
    XI-50 562.0/564.0 A
    XI-51 547.0/549.0 A
    XI-52 562.0, 564.0 A
    XI-53 504.2/506.2 A
    XI-55 603.2/605.2 A
    XI-56 1202.4/1204.3 A
    XI-57 716.1/718.0 A
    XI-58 627.2/629.1 A
    XI-59 590.0/592.2 A
    • Example 169
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00543
    • Example 170 Synthetic Scheme for Intermediate E
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00544
    • Step-1: Preparation of Ethyl 4-tert-butoxy-3-oxobutanoate (E-1)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00545
  • To a suspension of NaH (39 g, 1.61 mmol) in DMF (200 mL) was added Ethyl 4-chloro-3-oxobutanoate (50 g, 0.303 mmol) slowly drop wise at 0° C., followed by t-BuOH (58 mL, 0.607 mmol) and stirred for 14 h at ambient temperature. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was acidified up to pH=4 to 5 and diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water and brine solution, dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated. The crude compound was purified by column chromatography [silica gel (60-120 mesh), 7% ethyl acetate in hexane] to afford compound E-1 as a yellow oily liquid (27 g, 45.7%). TLC System: 5% Ethyl acetate in hexane, (Rf): 0.4. 1H NMR (CDCl3): □=1.20 (s, 9H), 1.29 (t, 3H), 3.55 (s, 2H), 4.01 (s, 2H), 4.20 (q, 2H).
    • Step-2: Preparation of Ethyl 2-acetyl-4-tert-butoxy-3-oxobutanoate (E-2)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00546
  • To a solution of Ethyl 4-tert-butoxy-3-oxobutanoate (75 g, 0.37 mmol) in DCM (300 mL) was added pyridine (292 mL, 4.455 mmol) followed by acetyl chloride (30 mL, 0.44 mmol) and MgCl2 (17.5 g, 0.185 mmol) at 0° C. and stirred for 16 h at room temperature. The reaction mixture was poured into ethyl acetate, washed with water, dilute HCl and brine solution to afford compound E-2 (40 g, 44%) as a pale yellow liquid. (Rf):0.5, TLC System: 10% Ethyl acetate in hexane.
    • Step-3: Preparation of Ethyl 3-(tert-butoxymethyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (E-3)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00547
  • To a solution of Ethyl-2-acetyl-4-tert-butoxy-3-oxobutanoate (26 g, 0.106 mmol) in glacial acetic acid (100 mL) was added hydrazine hydrate (6.1 g, 0.12 mmol) drop wise at 5-10° C. and stirred for 30 min. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was neutralized with saturated NaHCO3, extracted with ethyl acetate and washed with NaHCO3, brine solution, dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated. The crude compound was purified by column chromatography (Silica gel (60-120), 27% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford compound E-3 (8 g, 32%) as a pale yellow solid. (Rf): 0.2, TLC System: 10% Ethyl acetate in hexane. 1H NMR (CDCl3): □=1.28 (s, 9H), 1.35 (t, 3H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 4.30 (q, 2H), 4.78 (s, 2H), 7.60 (br, 1H).
    • Step-4: Preparation of 3-(Tert-butoxymethyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (E-4)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00548
  • To a solution of Ethyl 3-(tert-butoxymethyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (19 g, 0.07 mmol) in ethanol (130 mL) was added 10% NaOH (31 g, 0.79 mmol) solution and reflux for 16 h at 82° C. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was acidified, adjusted to pH<1 and filtered the solid to afford compound E-4 (14 g, 87%) as a colorless solid. (Rf): 0.5, TLC System: 10% Methanol in chloroform. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6): □=1.20 (s, 9H), 2.31 (s, 3H), 4.54 (s, 2H), 12.6 (br, 2H).
    • Step-5: Preparation of Benzyl 3-(hydroxymethyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (E-5)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00549
  • To a 3-(Tert-butoxymethyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (5 g, 0.0235 mmol) in methanol (30 mL) was added Cs2CO3 (7.66 g, 0.23 mmol) and stirred for 1 h at ambient temperature, then methanol was removed completely and to this DMF (25 mL) was added followed by benzyl bromide (4.03 g, 0.023 mmol) under N2 atmosphere and stirred for 4 h at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, 1N HCl, NaHCO3 and brine solution, dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude compound was purified by column chromatography (silica gel (60-120), 3% Methanol in chloroform). The obtained crude compound was treated with TFA at ambient temperature for 24 h. Then the reaction mixture was concentrated and triturated with pentane to afford compound E-5 (1.8 g, 37%) as a colorless solid. (Rf): 0.6, TLC System: 10% Methanol in chloroform.
    • Step-6: Preparation of Benzyl 3-formyl-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (E-6)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00550
  • To a stirred solution of Benzyl 3-(hydroxymethyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (8.5 g, 0.034 mmol) in Dimethoxy ethane (200 mL) was added MnO2(29.7 g) and heated to 80° C. for 2 h. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was filtered through celite bed and concentrated. The obtained crude compound was triturated with pentane to afford compound E-6 (7 g, 83%) as a gray solid. (Rf): 0.6, TLC System: 40% ethyl acetate in hexane.
    • Step-7: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(4-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazole-5-carboxylate (E-7)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00551
  • To a stirred solution of Ethyl 3,4-diaminobenzoate (3.8 g, 0.022 mmol) In Acetonitrile (100 mL) was added NaHSO4 (3.61 g, 0.43 mmol) and heated to reflux, then Benzyl 3-formyl-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylate (7 g, 0.0286 mmol) was added slowly and maintained the same temperature for 3 h. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was concentrated and diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated. The obtained crude compound was triturated with diethyl ether to afford compound E-7 (5.5 g, 43.5%) as a white solid. (Rf): 0.7, TLC System: 10% Ethyl acetate in hexane. LCMS: m/e: 405.0 (M+1).
    • Step-8: Preparation of 3-(5-(Ethoxycarbonyl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazol-2-yl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (E-8)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00552
  • To a solution of Ethyl 2-(4-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazole-5-carboxylate (5.5 g, 13.6 mmol) in THF:MeOH (1:1, 100 mL) was added 10% Pd/C (1 g) and stirred for 16 h at 100 psi pressure of hydrogen at rt. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was filtered through celite bed and concentrated. The obtained crude compound was purified by triturating with diethyl ether to afford compound E-8 (3 g, 71%) as a brownish solid. (Rf): 0.1, TLC System: 10% Methanol in chloroform. LCMS: m/e: 315.0 (M+1).
    • Step-9: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(4-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidin-4-ylcarbamoyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazole-5-carboxylate (E-9)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00553
  • To a solution of 3-(5-(Ethoxycarbonyl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazol-2-yl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylicacid (500 mg, 0.00159 mol) in DMF (2 mL) was added tert-butyl 4-aminopiperidine-1-carboxylate (637 mg, 0.00318 mol) followed by EDC.HCl (606 mg, 0.00318 mol), HOBT (434 mg, 0.00138 mol), DIPEA (404 g, 0.00318 mol) and stirred for 2 h at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was poured into water and stirred for 1 hour, the solid precipitated was filtered off and dried over Na2SO4. The obtained crude compound was purified by column chromatography(silica gel(60-120 mesh), 3% methanol in chloroform) to afford compound E-9 (600 mg, 76%) as white solid. (Rf): 0.4, TLC System: 10% Methanol in chloroform. LCMS: m/e: 497.1 (M+1).
    • Step-10: Preparation of 2-(4-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidin-4-ylcarbamoyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazole-5-carboxylic acid (E-10)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00554
  • To a solution of Ethyl 2-(4-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidin-4-ylcarbamoyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazole-5-carboxylate (600 mg, 1.909 mmol) in THF (15 mL) was added NaOH (484 mg, 12.9 mmol) and heated reflux for 16 h. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was concentrated and diluted with water and acidified with dil HCl to pH=4-5, the solid precipitated was filtered off and dried under vacuum to afford compound E-10 (480 mg, 42.5%) as a white solid. (Rf): 0.2, TLC System: 10% Methanol in chloroform with NH3. LCMS: m/e: 469.1 (M+1).
    • Step-11: Preparation of Tert-butyl 4-(5-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1H-benzo[d]imidazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxamido)piperidine-1-carboxylate (E)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00555
  • To a solution of 2-(4-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidin-4-ylcarbamoyl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazol-3-yl)-1H-benzo[d]imidazole-5-carboxylic acid (450 mg, 0.9615 mol) in toluene (8 mL) was added DPPA (0.318 g, 1.44 mmol) followed by DIPEA (183 mg, 1.44 mmol) and stirred for 2 h at ambient temperature, then benzyl alcohol was added and heated to reflux for 16 h. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was concentrated. The obtained crude compound was purified by column chromatography (silica gel (60-120 mesh), 3% methanol in chloroform with NH3) to afford the cbz-protected compound E (270 mg, 49%) as an off white solid. (Rf): 0.4, TLC System: 10% Methanol in chloroform with NH3. LCMS: m/e: 574.1 (M+1).
  • The above compound was added to a mixture of THF:MeOH (1:1, 20 mL) followed by 10% Pd/C (27 mg) and stirred for 16 h at 100PSI pressure of hydrogen. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was filtered through celite bed and concentrated. The obtained crude compound was triturated with diethyl ether to afford compound E (130 mg, 63%) as a black solid. (Rf): 0.1, TLC System: 10% Methanol in chloroform with NH3. LCMS: m/e: 440.1 (M+1).
    • Example 171
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00556
    • Step-12: Preparation of (S)-tert-butyl 2-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetate (E-12)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00557
  • To a solution of (S)-5-Oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxylic acid (300 mg, 00230 mol) in DMF (4 ml) was added HATU (2.622 g, 0.0069 mol), DIPEA (584 mg, 0.0046 mol), followed by Glycine tert butyl ester (578 mg, 0.0034 mol) and stirred for 20 min at ambient temperature. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was poured into water, extracted with ethyl acetate, dried and concentrated to afford compound E-12 (120 mg, 21%) as a pale yellow liquid. (Rf): 0.8, System: 10% acetone in chloroform. LCMS: m/e: 242.1 (M−1).
    • Step-13: Preparation of (S)-2-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetic acid (E-13)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00558
  • To a solution of (S)-Tert-butyl 2-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetate (120 mg, 0.493 mmol) was treated with TFA (7 eq) in DCM (5 ml) for 3 h at ambient temperature. After completion of the reaction, DCM was evaporated along with excess of TFA. The obtained crude compound was purified by triturating with diethyl ether to afford compound E-13 (107 mg, 90%) as a pale yellow liquid. (Rf): 0.1, TLC System: 10% acetone in chloroform. LCMS: m/e: 186.1 (M−1).
    • Step-14: Preparation of (S)-5-methyl-3-(5-(2-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetamido)-1H-benzo[d]imidazol-2-yl)-N-(piperidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxamide (XXXVI-1)
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00559
  • To a solution of (S)-2-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetic acid (30 mg, 0.16 mmol) in DMF (2 ml) was added tert-butyl 4-(3-(5-amino-1H-benzo[d]imidazol-2-yl)-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxamido)piperidine-1-carboxylate (70 mg, 0.11 mmol) followed by EDC.HCl (44 mg, 0.23 mmol), HOBt (31 mg, 0.23 mmol) and DIPEA (30 mg, 0.23 mmol), then stirred for 3 h at ambient temperature. After completion of the reaction, reaction mixture was poured into water; solid precipitated was filtered off and dried under vacuum. The crude compound was purified by preparative HPLC to afford the Boc-title compound as a solid. The solid was treated with trifluoro acetic acid in DCM at RT for 2 h to remove the Boc group. The reaction solution was concentrated and the residue was triturated with diethyl ether to afford the title compound as a solid (40 mg, HPLC purity: 93%). LCMS: m/e: 509.0 (M+1).
    • Example 172
  • In similar fashion, starting from intermediate E, the following compound was prepared:
  • Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00560
  • (R)-5-methyl-3-(5-(2-(5-oxotetrahydrofuran-2-carboxamido)acetamido)-1H-benzo[d]imidazol-2-yl)-N-(piperidin-4-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxamide: 5.0 mg, HPLC purity: 95%. LCMS: m/e: 509.1 (M+1).
    • C. PDPK-1 Biological Data Example 173
  • Briefly, a 10× stock of PDPK1 enzyme from Invitrogen (P3001) or BPS (40080) or SignalChem (P14-10H), 1.13×ATP (AS001A) and ST28-Sox peptide substrate (KNZ1281C) were prepared in 1× kinase reaction buffer consisting of 20 mM Tris, pH 7.5, 5 mM MgCl2, 1 mM EGTA, 5 mM β-glycerophosphate, 5% glycerol (10× stock, KB002A) and 0.2 mM DTT (DS001A). 5 μL of enzyme were pre-incubated in a Corning (#3574) 384-well, white, non-binding surface microtiter plate (Corning, N.Y.) for 30 min at 25° C. with a 0.5 μL volume of 50% DMSO and serially diluted compounds prepared in 50% DMSO. Kinase reactions were started with the addition of 45 λL of the ST28-Sox peptide substrate and monitored every 71 seconds for 30-60 minutes at λex360/λem485 in a Synergy4 plate reader from BioTek (Winooski, Vt.). At the conclusion of each assay, progress curves from each well were examined for linear reaction kinetics and fit statistics (R2, 95% confidence interval, absolute sum of squares). Post-lag velocity (+10 minutes to 20+minutes) from each reaction was estimated from the slope of a plot of relative fluorescence units vs time (minutes) and normalized to the no enzyme and no inhibitor control groups for % Inhibition. The resulting inhibition values were then plotted against inhibitor concentration to estimate IC50 from log[Inhibitor] vs Response, Variable Slope model in GraphPad Prism from GraphPad Software (San Diego, Calif.).
  • [Reagent] used in provisional protocol(s): Invitrogen—[PDPK1]=5-10 nM, [ATP]=5 μM and [ST28-Sox]=5 μM or 10 μM (ATP KMapp=4-6 μM); BPS—[PDPK1]=10-15 nM, [ATP]=5 μM and [ST28-Sox]=10 μM (ATP KMapp=3-5 μM); SignalChem—[PDPK1]=5-10 nM, [ATP]=5 μM and [ST28-Sox]=5 μM or 10 μM (ATP KMapp ND)
  • Table 6 shows the activity of selected compounds in the PDK1-OMNIA Assays. Compounds having an activity designated as “A” provide an IC50≦10 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “B” provide an IC50>10 nM and ≦100 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “C” provide an IC50>100 nM and ≦1000 nM; compounds having an activity designated as “D” provide an IC50>1000 nM and ≦10,000 nM; and compounds having an activity designated as “E” provide an IC50≦10,000 nM.
  • TABLE 6
    Compound Inhibition
    Designation Enzyme/Assay Designation
    XI-21 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-22 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-23 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-24 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XXXVI-1 PDK1-OMNIA
    XXXVI-2 PDK1-OMNIA
    XI-25 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-26 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-27 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-28 PDK1-OMNIA
    XI-29 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-30 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-31 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-32 PDK1-OMNIA C
    XI-33 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-56 PDK1-OMNIA C
    XI Non covalent PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-34 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-35 PDK1-OMNIA
    XI-36 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-37 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-38 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-39 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-40 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-41 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-42 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-43 PDK1-OMNIA C
    XI-44 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-45 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-46 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-47 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-48 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-49 PDK1-OMNIA A
    XI-50 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-51 PDK1-OMNIA
    XI-52 PDK1-OMNIA B
    XI-53 PDK1-OMNIA
    XI-55 PDK1-OMNIA A
    • K. Mass Spectrometric Analysis of PDPK-1 Contacted with Compounds of the Invention Example 174
  • Intact PDPK1 was incubated for 3 hr at a 10-fold excess of compound XI-27 to protein. 3 μL aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 μL of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 Ziptipping directly onto the MALDI target plate using sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). The top panel of FIG. 12 shows mass spectrometric trace of the intact PDPK-1 protein (m/z 59,255 Da). The bottom panel of FIG. 12 shows mass spectrometric trace of PDPK-1 incubated with XI-27 (mw=578.5) for 3 hr (m/z of 59,823), which shows a mass shift of 568 Da, with no m/z of 59255 Da, which indicates complete modification of PDPK1 by XI-27 within 3 h.
  • Compound XI-27 modifies the peptide 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) on PDPK1, as confirmed by peptide MS analysis after trypsin digestion in solution. Intact PDPK1 (Millipore, 14-452) was incubated for 3 hr at a 10-fold excess of compound D to protein. Following the reaction, approximately 5 μgs of protein was subjected to a standard trypsin solution digestion by reducing the protein with DTT, alkylating thiols with iodoacetamide, adding trypsin (1:20, protease: protein), and incubation at 37° C. for 1.5 hr. After digestion, the peptides were purified using C18 ziptips, spotted on the MALDI target plate with alpha cyano 4-hydroxycinnamic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:acetonitrile 50:50), and analyzed in reflectron mode. The top panel of FIG. 13 shows the trypsin digest profile for the control PDPK1 digest. Panel B shows the trypsin digest profile for PDPK1 treated with compound XI-27 prior to digestion. The arrows in FIG. 13 are pointing to a peak at 1,741 Da that corresponds to the mass of 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) (1,106Da), compound XI-27 (mw 578.50), and an iodoacetamide (+57) that alkylates the compound at the thiol. The peptide was selected for MSMS analysis to confirm the exact amino acid being modified.
  • Compound XI-27 modifies K169 on PDPK1, as confirmed by MSMS analysis. The peptide of interest, 1,741 Da, was selected for MSMS analysis from the compound XI-27 treated PDPK1 trypsin digest. FIG. 14 shows the MSMS spectrum of the peptide 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) modified by compound XI-27. The alignment of b and y ions confirms that K169 is the amino acid modified by compound XI-27.
    • Example 175
  • Intact PDPK1 was incubated for 3 hr at a 10-fold excess of compound XI-21 to protein. 3 μL aliquots of the samples were diluted with 10 μL of 0.1% TFA prior to micro C4 Ziptipping directly onto the MALDI target plate using sinapinic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:Acetonitrile 50:50). The top panel of FIG. 15 shows the mass spec trace of the intact PDPK1 protein (m/z 59,275 Da). The bottom panel FIG. 15 shows the mass spec trace when PDPK1 was incubated with compound XI-21 (mw=578.50). The centroid mass (m/z=60,284 Da) shows a mass shift of 1,009 Da (175%), indicating complete multiple modification of PDPK1 by compound XI-21.
  • Compound XI-21 modifies three peptides, 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1), 173KIGSFDETC(IAA)TR183 (SEQ ID NO.:182), 84FGKILGEGSFSTVVLAR100 (SEQ ID NO.:3) on PDPK1, as confirmed by peptide MS analysis after trypsin digestion in solution. Intact PDPK1 (Millipore, 14-452) was incubated for 3 hr at a 10-fold excess of compound XI-21 to protein. Following the reaction, approximately 5 μgs of protein was subjected to a standard trypsin solution digestion by reducing the protein with DTT, alkylating thiols with iodoacetamide, adding trypsin (1:20, protease: protein), and incubation at 37° C. for 1.5 hr. After digestion, the peptides were purified using C18 ziptips, spotted on the MALDI target plate with alpha cyano 4-hydroxycinnamic acid as the desorption matrix (10 mg/mL in 0.1% TFA:acetonitrile 50:50), and analyzed in reflectron mode. The top panel of FIG. 16 shows the trypsin digest profile for the control PDPK1 digest. The bottom panel of FIG. 16 shows the trypsin digest profile for PDPK1 treated with compound XI-21 prior to digestion. The arrows in the top panel of FIG. 16 are pointing to a peak at 1,740 Da that corresponds to the mass of
  • 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) (1,106Da) and compound XI-21 (mw 578.50), a peak at 1,950 Da that corresponds to the mass of 173KIGSFDETC(IAA)TR183 (SEQ ID NO.:182) (1,313Da) and compound XI-21 with 2 iodoacetamides, and a peak at 2,417 Da corresponding to the mass of 84FGKILGEGSFSTVVLAR100 (SEQ ID NO.:3) (1,780 Da) with compound XI-21 and iodacetamide. All three peptides were selected for MSMS analysis to confirm the exact amino acid being modified.
  • Compound XI-21 modifies K169 on PDPK1, as confirmed by MSMS analysis. The peptide of interest, 1,740 Da, was selected for MSMS analysis from the compound XI-21 treated PDPK1 trypsin digest. FIG. 17 shows the MSMS spectrum of the peptide 164NGELLKYIR172 (SEQ ID NO.:1) modified by compound XI-21. The alignment of b and y ions confirms that K169 is the amino acid modified by compound XI-21.
  • Compound XI-21 modifies K173 on PDPK1, as confirmed by MSMS analysis. The peptide of interest, 1,950 Da, was selected for MSMS analysis from the compound B treated PDPK1 trypsin digest. FIG. 18 shows the MSMS spectrum of the peptide 173KIGSFDETCTR183 (SEQ ID NO.:2) modified by compound XI-21. The alignment of b and y ions confirms that K173 is the amino acid modified by compound XI-21.
  • Compound XI-21 modifies K86 on PDPK1, as confirmed by MSMS analysis. The peptide of interest, 2,417 Da, was selected for MSMS analysis from the compound B treated PDPK1 trypsin digest. FIG. 19 shows the MSMS spectrum of the peptide 84FGKILGEGSFSTVVLAR100 (SEQ ID NO.:3) modified by compound XI-21. The alignment of b and y ions confirms that K86 is the amino acid modified by compound XI-21.
  • Other examples of PDPK1 inhibitors disclosed herein demonstrate covalent modification of PDPK1 similar to the mass shift and digestion results described above. For example, Table 7 lists non-limiting examples of compounds that modify PDPK1 whole protein, the number of modifications per protein and the lysines modified within the protein. Compounds XI-27, XI-26, XI-22, and XI-21 each have a thiolactone warhead, yet demonstrate different modification profiles on the protein. Also, the lysine modified in PDPK-1 by XI-27, XI-26, XI-22, and XI-21 are not the same for each compound. Without wishing to be bound to any particular theory, the position of the warhead, as presented by the scaffold and tether to the lysines in the binding site, effects different results on the modification of the different lysines in the binding site of PDPK-1.
  • TABLE 7
    Number of
    Modifications
    on Whole Lys Lys Lys
    Compound Structure Protein 86 169 173
    XI-49
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00561
         		1 X
    XI-53
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00562
         		1 X X
    XI-39
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00563
         		1 X X
    XI-27
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00564
         		1 X
    XI-26
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00565
         		1 X X
    XI-22
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00566
         		2 X X X
    XI-21
    Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00567
         		2 X X X
    • EQUIVALENTS
  • Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain, using no more than routine experimentation, numerous equivalents to the specific embodiments described specifically herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed in the scope of the following claims.

Claims (66)

1. A method for designing a ligand that covalently binds a target protein, the method comprising:
A) providing a structural model of a reversible ligand docked within, or in proximity to, a ligand-binding site in a target protein;
B) identifying a lysine residue of the target protein in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site that is less than about 15 Å from the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site;
C) producing at least a structural model of at least one ligand-warhead compound docked within, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site wherein the ligand-warhead compound comprises the reversible ligand in step B) or a portion thereof, a warhead comprising a reactive chemical moiety, and optionally a Tether; and
D) identifying a ligand-warhead compound whose structural model allows the lysine residue in step B) to readily assume a conformation that brings the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue within bond-forming proximity of the warhead electrophile.
2. The method of claim 1, further comprising:
E) forming, for the ligand-warhead compound identified in step D), a ligand-protein covalent adduct by forming a covalent bond between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue identified in step B) and the warhead electrophile in ligand-warhead compound identified in step D) while substantially maintaining the non-covalent interactions between the pharmacophore of the ligand and the ligand-binding site.
3. The method of claim 2, further comprising:
F) evaluating the conformation of the resulting ligand-protein covalent adduct formed in step E) by analyzing the global energy of the resulting conformation, or by analyzing the energy of the conformation of the Tether.
4. The method of claim 3, wherein steps A)-F) are iterated with changes to the Tether and the global energy of the resulting conformation is less than the previous iteration.
5. The method of claim 2, further comprising:
F) determining whether the ligand-binding site is occluded when the covalent bond is formed between the side chain primary amine group of the lysine residue in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site and the warhead electrophile.
6. The method of claim 2, wherein the covalent bond formed in step E) is formed using a computational method in which the warhead and the side chain of the lysine residue are flexible and the remainder of the structures of the ligand-warhead compound and the ligand-binding site are fixed.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein in step B) each of the lysine residues in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site of the target protein, which is less than about 15 Å from the reversible ligand when the reversible ligand is docked in, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site, is identified.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein step C) comprises providing a plurality of models of the ligand-warhead compound, wherein the warhead is bonded to a different substitutable position of the ligand or a portion of the ligand in each model of the ligand-warhead compound, optionally with the Tether in between the warhead and the substitutable position.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein the target protein is an identified member of an identified protein family and the lysine residue is not conserved across the identified members of the protein family.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein the target protein is an identified member of an identified protein family and the lysine residue is conserved among more than one identified member of the identified protein family.
11. The method of claim 10, wherein the lysine residue is conserved across the identified members of the protein family.
12. The method of claim 1, wherein the target protein has catalytic activity.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein the protein family is selected from the group consisting of BCL-2, Calpains, Caspases, Cathepsins, HCV, HDAC, HSP70, HSP90, IAP, Kinase, MDM2, MMP, NHR, PI3K, Phosphatase, PARP, and HIV Protease.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the target protein is selected from the group consisting of XIAP, cIAP1 and cIAP2, PI3Kβ/γ, PDPK1, and HCV-NS3.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the ligand-binding site is a ligand-binding site for a substrate or cofactor.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein the lysine residue is not a catalytic residue.
17. The method of claim 1, wherein the ligand-warhead compound has a structure of Formula I:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00568
wherein
Scaffold is
a) a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a ligand capable of binding to, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site; or
b) a portion of a pharmacophore of a ligand resulting from truncation of the pharmacophore, such that the Scaffold is capable of binding to, or in proximity to, the ligand-binding site;
Warhead is an organic moiety optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from O, N, and S; the organic moiety having a molecular weight of about 14 daltons to about 200 daltons; Warhead being capable of reaction with a side chain primary amine group of a lysine residue; and Warhead being attached to Scaffold through Tether; and
Tether is null, a bond, or a bivalent C1-C15 saturated, unsaturated, straight, branched, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl; bridged bicyclic, heterocycle, heteroaryl, or aryl moiety; wherein optionally one or more methylene units of the hydrocarbon chain are independently replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —C(═S)—, or C(═NR1)—; optionally one or more hydrogens are independently replaced by heteroatoms; and optionally one or more methine groups of the C1-C15 alkyl, when present, are independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00569
x is 0, 1, or 2;
y is 1, 2, or 3; and
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
with the proviso that the compound of Formula I is not wortmannin:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00570
or known analogues of wortmannin that covalently modify lysine through substantially the same mechanism as wortmannin:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00571
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00572
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00573
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00574
or any mechanism-based irreversible inhibitors.
18. The method of claim 17, wherein the ligand-warhead compound has a structure of Formula I′:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00575
19. The method of claim 18, wherein Warhead is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00576
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00577
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00578
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00579
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00580
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
20. The method of claim 19, wherein as least one of R2 and R3 of the compounds of Formulas I-b and I-c is hydrogen.
21. The method of claim 19, wherein the compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-e, I-j, I-k, or I-l is a compound of Formula II-a, II-b, II-c, II-d, II-e, II-f, II-g, II-h, II-i, II-j, II-k, II-l, II-m, II-n, II-o, II-p, II-q, II-r, II-s, II-t, II-u, II-v, II-w, II-x, II-y, II-z, II-aa, II-bb, II-cc, II-dd, II-ee, II-ff, II-gg, II-hh, II-jj, II-kk, II-ll, II-mm, II-nn, II-oo, or II-pp;
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00581
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00582
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00583
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00584
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00585
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00586
wherein
each m is independently an integer from 0-4;
each m5 is independently an integer from 0-3;
each m4 is independently an integer from 0-5;
each n2 is independently an integer from 0-2;
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14, and R15 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; Rz is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, CF3, or nitro; wherein
one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00587
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, R14, and R15 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
22. The method of claim 19, wherein the compound of Formula I-d, or I-h is a compound of Formula III-a, III-b, III-h, or III-i;
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00588
wherein
n3 is an integer from 0-2;
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
each B1, B2, B4, and B5 is independently CR7 or N and each B3 is NR7, O, or S;
each Rz1, Rz2, Rz3, Rz4, and Rz5 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, CF3, or nitro;
one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00589
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
23. The method of claim 19, wherein the compound of Formula I-h is a compound of Formula IV-a, IV-b, IV-c, IV-d, IV-e, IV-f, IV-g, IV-h, or IV-i:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00590
wherein any of the substitutable hydrogens on the nitrogen heterocycle of the compound can be substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, amido, acyl, acyloxy, oxoacyl, halogen.
24. The method of claim 19, wherein the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula V-a, V-b, V-c, V-d, V-e, V-f, V-g, V-h, V-i, or V-j;
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00591
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00592
wherein
m1 and m2 are each independently an integer from 0 to 2;
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00593
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, R10, and R11 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group.
25. The method of claim 19, wherein the compounds of Formulae I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t are selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00594
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00595
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00596
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00597
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00598
wherein any substitutable hydrogen may be substituted with the substituents as those defined by R2-R8 in formulas I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t.
26. The method of claim 19, wherein the radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-d, I-k, or I-m is a radical of Formula VI-a, VI-b, VI-c, VI-d, VI-e, VI-f, VI-g, VI-h, VI-i, VI-j, VI-k, VI-l, VI-m, VI-n, VI-o, VI-p, or VI-q:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00599
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00600
wherein Rzz is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, cyclopropyl, —CH2OCH3, and —CH2CH2OCH3.
27. The method of claim 19, wherein Scaffold is selected from the group consisting of Formulas VII, VIII, IX-a, IX-b, XI, XII, XVI, XVII, XVIII, XIX, XX, XXI, XXII, XXIII, XXXIV, XXV, XXVI, XXVII, XXVIII, XXIX, XXXVI, and XXXVII.
28. The method of claim 18, wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of one or more hydrogens of a compound of Formula VII:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00601
wherein
V and W are each independently —(CR14R15)qX3(CR16R17)r—;
q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
X3 is —CR18R19—, or —NR20—; and
Rx, Ry, R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, and R20 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —C(═S)—, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl groups; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00602
and R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the compound of Formula VII is a compound of Formula VII-a:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00603
wherein
V and W are each independently —(CR14R15)qX3(CR16R17)r—;
q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
X3 is —CR18R19—, or —NR20—;
p is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, and R20 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, —C(═S)—, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl groups; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00604
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and;
R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00605
 and
optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
30. The method of claim 19, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula VII-b:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00606
wherein
V and W are each independently —(CR14R15)qX3(CR16R17)r—;
q and r are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
X3 is —CR18R19—, or —NR20—;
p is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
R12, R13, R14, R15, R16, R17, R18, R19, and R20 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, —C(═S)—, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl groups; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00607
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and;
R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00608
 and
optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;
T is Tether; and
Rwh is Warhead.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein the compound of Formula VII-b is a compound of Formula VII-h;
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00609
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the compound of Formula VII-h is a compound of Formula VII-j, VII-k, VII-l, VII-m, VII-n, or VII-o:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00610
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00611
33. The method of claim 31, wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00612
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00613
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00614
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00615
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00616
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00617
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00618
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00619
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00620
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00621
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00622
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00623
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00624
34. The method of claim 19, wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula VIII:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00625
wherein
X4 is —CR33— or —N—;
s and p are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
R12, R13, R21, R22, R24, R25, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, and R33 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00626
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring.
35. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula VIII-a or VIII-b:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00627
wherein
X4 is —CR33— or —N—;
s and p are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;
R12, R13, R21, R22, R24, R25, R26, R27, R28, and R33 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
R23 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, or nitro; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00628
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; and
optionally R21 and R23 taken together can form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring; and
Warhead is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00629
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00630
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00631
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00632
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
36. The method of claim 35, wherein the compound of Formula VIII-a or VIII-b is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00633
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00634
37. The method of claim 19, wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula IX-a or IX-b,
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00635
wherein
X5 is —O—, —CR42R43— or —NR42—;
R12, R13, R27, R28, R29, R30, R31, R32, R33, R34, R35, R36, R37, R38, R39, R40, R41, R42, and R43 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00636
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
D, E, F, G, and H are each independently optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; wherein F and G are fused together to form a bicyclic optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl.
38. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula IX-c or IX-d:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00637
wherein
R12, R13, R31, are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00638
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
F, G, and H are each independently optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; wherein F and G are fused together to form a bicyclic optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl;
T is Tether;
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00639
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00640
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00641
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00642
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00643
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
39. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XI:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00644
wherein
p is an integer from 0 to 4, u is an integer from 1 to 4;
B6 and B7 are each independently CR7 or N;
R69 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro, or —NH(CO)NR78R79;
R70 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, halogen, amino, nitro;
R7, R71, R72, R73, R74, R75, R76, R77, R78, and R79 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00645
optionally R78, and R79 taken together form a 4- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring;
T is Tether; and
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00646
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00647
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00648
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00649
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00650
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
40. The method of claim 39, wherein the compound of Formula XI is a compound of Formula XI-a, XI-b, or XI-c:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00651
41. The method of claim 40, wherein the compound of Formula XI-a, XI-b or XI-c is a compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00652
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00653
42. The method of claim 41, wherein the compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-k, XI-l, XI-m, XI-n, XI-o, XI-p, or XI-q;
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00654
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00655
wherein
R88, and R89 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00656
and
n5 is an integer from 0 to 3.
43. The method of claim 42, wherein the compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-r, XI-s, XI-t, XI-u, XI-v, XI-w, or XI-x;
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00657
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00658
44. The method of claim 41, wherein the compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-y, XI-z, XI-aa, or XI-bb;
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00659
45. The method of claim 41, wherein the compound of Formula XI-d, XI-e, XI-f, XI-g, XI-h, XI-i, or XI-j is a compound of Formula XI-cc, XI-dd, XI-ee, or XI-ff:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00660
46. The method of claim 39, wherein the compound of Formula XI is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00661
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00662
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00663
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00664
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00665
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00666
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00667
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00668
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00669
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00670
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00671
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00672
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00673
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00674
47. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XII:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00675
wherein
R1 and R2 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00676
T is Tether;
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00677
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00678
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00679
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00680
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00681
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
48. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXXVI:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00682
wherein
Rv is H, optionally substituted C1-C3 branched or straight chain alkyl, or optionally substituted C1-C3 branched or straight chain acyl;
T is Tether; and
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00683
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00684
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00685
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00686
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00687
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
49. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00688
50. The method of claim 19, wherein Scaffold is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula XVI-a, XVI-b, or XVI-c:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00689
wherein
R90, R91, R92, R93, R94, R95, R96, R97, R98, R99, R100, R102, R104, R105, R106, R107, R108, R109, R110, R111, R112, R113, and R114 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—;
R103 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, or C2-C8 alkenyl;
one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00690
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
each R101 and R101 is independently hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C8 alkenyl, halogen, amino, nitro, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; and
n6 and n7 are each independently integer from 0 to 4; and
n8 is an integer from 0 to 2.
51. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XVI-d, XVI-e, or XVI-f:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00691
wherein
R90 and R114 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl;
R103 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, or C2-C8 alkenyl;
R101 is hydrogen, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C8 alkenyl, halogen, amino, nitro, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; and
n6 is an integer from 0 to 4;
n8 is an integer from 0 to 2;
wherein one or more methylene groups of C1-C6 alkyl can be optionally replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; and
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00692
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00693
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00694
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00695
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00696
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond; and
T is Tether.
52. The method of claim 51, wherein the compound of Formula XVI-d, XVI-e, or XVI-f is a compound of Formula XVI-g, XVI-h, or XVI-i:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00697
53. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula XVI-d, XVI-e, or XVI-f is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00698
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00699
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00700
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00701
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00702
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00703
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00704
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00705
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00706
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00707
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00708
54. The method of claim 18 wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXII-a, Formula XXII-b, or Formula XXII-c:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00709
wherein
n, m, p, and q for Formula XXII-a and Formula XXII-b are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3; provided that n and q are not 0 at the same time, and m and q are not 0 at the same time;
T is tether;
Rwh is Warhead and is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00710
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00711
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00712
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00713
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00714
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond;
A2 is an optionally substituted ring selected from a 4-8 membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5-10 membered saturated or partially unsaturated bridged bicyclic heterocyclic ring having at least one nitrogen, at least one oxygen, and optionally 1-2 additional heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
B′ is an optionally substituted group selected from phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or -T-Rwh; and
C2 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
55. The method of claim 54, wherein the compound of Formula XXII-a, XXII-b, XXII-c is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00715
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00716
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00717
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00718
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00719
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00720
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00721
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00722
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00723
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00724
56. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXIII:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00725
wherein:
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00726
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00727
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00728
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00729
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00730
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond;
R201 is hydrogen or C1-6 alkyl;
R202 is hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, or (C1-6 alkylene)-R203; or
R201 and R202 are taken together with the intervening carbon to form an optionally substituted ring selected from a 3- to 7-membered carbocyclic ring or a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
R203 is a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; and
Ring A6 is absent or an optionally substituted group selected from a 4- to 7-membered heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
57. The method of claim 56, where the compound of Formula XXIII is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00731
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00732
58. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXIV-a or Formula XXIV-b:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00733
wherein
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00734
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00735
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00736
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00737
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00738
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond;
R204 is an hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, —(CH2)m-(3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring), —(CH2)m-(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring), —(CH2)m-(4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH2)m-(7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), —(CH2)m-phenyl, —(CH2)m-(8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring), —(CH2)m-(5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur), or —(CH2)m-(8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur);
each R205 and R206 is independently —R″, halogen, —NO2, —CN, —OR″, —SR″, —N(R″)2, —C(O)R″, —CO2R″, —C(O)C(O)R″, —C(O)CH2C(O)R″, —S(O)R″, —S(O)2R″, —C(O)N(R″)2, —SO2N(R″)2, —OC(O)R″, —N(R″)C(O)R″, —N(R″)N(R″)2, —N(R″)C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C═NOR″, —N(R″)C(O)N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2R″, or —OC(O)N(R″)2;
each R″ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
two R″ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
m is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive;
each n for Formula XXIV-a or Formula XXIV-b is independently 0, 1, or 2; and
Ring A5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
59. The method of claim 58, wherein the compound of Formula XXIV-a or Formula XXIV-b is selected from the group consisting of
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00739
60. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXV:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00740
wherein
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00741
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00742
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00743
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00744
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond;
each R205 and R206 is independently —R″, halogen, —NO2, —CN, —OR″, —SR″, —N(R″)2, —C(O)R″, —CO2R″, —C(O)C(O)R″, —C(O)CH2C(O)R″, —S(O)R″, —S(O)2R″, —C(O)N(R″)2, —SO2N(R″)2, —OC(O)R″, —N(R″)C(O)R″, —N(R″)N(R″)2, —N(R″)C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C(═NR″)N(R″)2, —C═NOR″, —N(R″)C(O)N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2N(R″)2, —N(R″)SO2R″, or —OC(O)N(R″)2;
each R″ is independently hydrogen or an optionally substituted group selected from C1-6 aliphatic, a 3- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated carbocyclic ring, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic carbocyclic ring, a 4- to 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated heterocyclic ring having 1-2 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, a 7- to 10-membered saturated or partially unsaturated bicyclic heterocyclic ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, phenyl, an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic aryl ring, a 5- to 6-membered heteroaryl ring having 1-3 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur, or an 8- to 10-membered bicyclic heteroaryl ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur; or
optionally, two R″ groups on the same nitrogen are taken together with the nitrogen to which they are attached to form an optionally substituted 5-8 membered saturated, partially unsaturated, or aromatic ring having 1-4 heteroatoms independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur;
m is an integer from 0 to 6, inclusive;
each n for Formula XXV is independently 0, 1, or 2; and
Ring A5 is an optionally substituted 6-membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring having 1-2 nitrogens.
61. The method of claim 60, wherein the compound of Formula XXV is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00745
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00746
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00747
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00748
62. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXVII:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00749
wherein:
T is Tether;
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00750
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00751
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00752
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00753
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond.
63. The method of claim 62, wherein the compound of Formula XXVII is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00754
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00755
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00756
64. The method of claim 18, wherein the compound of Formula I′ is a compound of Formula XXXVII:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00757
wherein
T is Tether;
Rwh is Warhead which is a radical resulting from the removal of a hydrogen of a compound of Formula I-a, I-b, I-c, I-d, I-e, I-f, I-g, I-h, I-j, I-k, I-l, I-m, I-n, I-o, I-p, I-q, I-r, I-s, and I-t:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00758
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00759
wherein
each X1 and X8 is independently —O—, —S—, or —NR6—;
each X2 is independently —R6, —OR6, or —NR6R7;
each X9 is independently
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00760
each R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 is independently hydrogen or C1-C6 alkyl; wherein one or more methylene groups of the C1-C6 alkyl can be replaced by —NR1—, —O—, —C(O)—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, or —C(═S)—; one or more methine groups of the C1-C6 alkyl, when present, can be independently replaced by
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00761
R1 is hydrogen or C1-C8 alkyl;
wherein optionally when proper any two of R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group; and optionally X2 and any one of R2, R3, and R4 when taken together form a 3- to 8-membered carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring or an aryl or heteroaryl group;
A and B are each independently an optionally substituted monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic aryl or heteroaryl; and
n in Warhead is an integer from 2-4; each n1 and n2 is independently an integer from 0-2; n3 is an integer from 1-2; n4 is an integer from 1-3; and each one of n9, n10, n11, and n12 is an integer from 0-1; and n13 is an integer from 0-2, wherein when any one of the foregoing n integers is more than 1, the adjacent carbons represented by the integer can form a single or double bond; and
each n in Formula XXXVII is 0, 1, or 2.
65. The method of claim 64, wherein the compound of Formula XXXVII is selected from the group consisting of:
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00762
Figure US20110269244A1-20111103-C00763
66-184. (canceled)
US12/982,352 2009-12-30 2010-12-30 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein Abandoned US20110269244A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/982,352 US20110269244A1 (en) 2009-12-30 2010-12-30 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein
US15/423,115 US11542492B2 (en) 2009-12-30 2017-02-02 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US33504309P 2009-12-30 2009-12-30
US12/982,352 US20110269244A1 (en) 2009-12-30 2010-12-30 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/423,115 Division US11542492B2 (en) 2009-12-30 2017-02-02 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20110269244A1 true US20110269244A1 (en) 2011-11-03

Family

ID=44226810

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/982,352 Abandoned US20110269244A1 (en) 2009-12-30 2010-12-30 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein
US15/423,115 Active 2032-10-17 US11542492B2 (en) 2009-12-30 2017-02-02 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/423,115 Active 2032-10-17 US11542492B2 (en) 2009-12-30 2017-02-02 Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein

Country Status (13)

Country Link
US (2) US20110269244A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2519664A4 (en)
JP (2) JP2013516422A (en)
KR (1) KR20130067487A (en)
CN (1) CN102812167A (en)
AU (2) AU2010339456A1 (en)
BR (1) BR112012015721A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2785738A1 (en)
MX (1) MX2012007684A (en)
RU (1) RU2012132473A (en)
SG (1) SG181965A1 (en)
TW (1) TW201134825A (en)
WO (1) WO2011082285A1 (en)

Cited By (46)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20100185419A1 (en) * 2008-09-05 2010-07-22 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. Algorithm for designing irreversible inhibitors
US8975409B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2015-03-10 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
WO2015054572A1 (en) * 2013-10-10 2015-04-16 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of kras g12c
US9227978B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-01-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of Kras G12C
US9493510B2 (en) 2013-01-10 2016-11-15 Noliva Therapeutics Llc Peptidomimetic compounds
US9556426B2 (en) 2009-09-16 2017-01-31 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. Protein kinase conjugates and inhibitors
US9676719B2 (en) 2013-03-26 2017-06-13 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
US9745319B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-08-29 Araxes Pharma Llc Irreversible covalent inhibitors of the GTPase K-Ras G12C
US9810690B2 (en) 2015-10-19 2017-11-07 Araxes Pharma Llc Method for screening inhibitors of Ras
US9840516B2 (en) 2013-10-10 2017-12-12 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazolines as inhibitors of KRAS G12C
US9862701B2 (en) 2014-09-25 2018-01-09 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US9988357B2 (en) 2015-12-09 2018-06-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Methods for preparation of quinazoline derivatives
US10011600B2 (en) 2014-09-25 2018-07-03 Araxes Pharma Llc Methods and compositions for inhibition of Ras
US10111874B2 (en) 2014-09-18 2018-10-30 Araxes Pharma Llc Combination therapies for treatment of cancer
US10125134B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2018-11-13 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US10144724B2 (en) 2015-07-22 2018-12-04 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use thereof
US10246424B2 (en) 2015-04-10 2019-04-02 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use thereof
US10280172B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2019-05-07 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10377743B2 (en) 2016-10-07 2019-08-13 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of RAS and methods of use thereof
US10414757B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-09-17 Araxes Pharma Llc 2-substituted quinazoline compounds comprising a substituted heterocyclic group and methods of use thereof
US10428064B2 (en) 2015-04-15 2019-10-01 Araxes Pharma Llc Fused-tricyclic inhibitors of KRAS and methods of use thereof
US10646488B2 (en) 2016-07-13 2020-05-12 Araxes Pharma Llc Conjugates of cereblon binding compounds and G12C mutant KRAS, HRAS or NRAS protein modulating compounds and methods of use thereof
US10647715B2 (en) 2017-11-15 2020-05-12 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US10647703B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-05-12 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10689377B2 (en) 2017-11-15 2020-06-23 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US10689356B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-06-23 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10730867B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-08-04 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10736897B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2020-08-11 Araxes Pharma Llc Compounds and methods of use thereof for treatment of cancer
US10745385B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2020-08-18 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of KRAS
US10822312B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2020-11-03 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use
US10858343B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-12-08 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10875842B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-12-29 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10882847B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2021-01-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10975071B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2021-04-13 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US11059819B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2021-07-13 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Fused hetero-hetero bicyclic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11136308B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2021-10-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline and quinazolinone compounds and methods of use thereof
US11274093B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2022-03-15 Araxes Pharma Llc Fused bicyclic benzoheteroaromatic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11279689B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2022-03-22 Araxes Pharma Llc 1-(3-(6-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)benzofuran-2-yl)azetidin-1 yl)prop-2-en-1-one derivatives and similar compounds as KRAS G12C modulators for treating cancer
US11358959B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2022-06-14 Araxes Pharma Llc Benzothiophene and benzothiazole compounds and methods of use thereof
US11453683B1 (en) 2019-08-29 2022-09-27 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12D inhibitors
US11542492B2 (en) 2009-12-30 2023-01-03 Celgene Car Llc Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein
US11548888B2 (en) 2019-01-10 2023-01-10 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US11639346B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2023-05-02 Araxes Pharma Llc Quinazoline derivatives as modulators of mutant KRAS, HRAS or NRAS
US11702418B2 (en) 2019-12-20 2023-07-18 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. SOS1 inhibitors
US11890285B2 (en) 2019-09-24 2024-02-06 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapies
US11932633B2 (en) 2018-05-07 2024-03-19 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors

Families Citing this family (42)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009049238A1 (en) 2007-10-11 2009-04-16 The Regents Of The University Of California Compositions and methods of inhibiting n-acylethanolamine-hydrolyzing acid amidase
US9273077B2 (en) 2008-05-21 2016-03-01 Ariad Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Phosphorus derivatives as kinase inhibitors
LT2300013T (en) 2008-05-21 2017-12-27 Ariad Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Phosphorous derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2012151561A1 (en) 2011-05-04 2012-11-08 Ariad Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds for inhibiting cell proliferation in egfr-driven cancers
ES2602813T3 (en) * 2011-06-09 2017-02-22 Rhizen Pharmaceuticals S.A. New compounds as modulators of GPR-119
WO2013078430A1 (en) 2011-11-22 2013-05-30 The Regents Of The University Of California Disubstituted beta-lactones as inhibitors of n-acylethanolamine acid amidase (naaa)
JP6469567B2 (en) 2012-05-05 2019-02-13 アリアド・ファーマシューティカルズ・インコーポレイテッド Compound for inhibiting cell proliferation of EGFR-activated cancer
WO2014052647A2 (en) * 2012-09-26 2014-04-03 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Proline-locked stapled peptides and uses thereof
CN103788071A (en) * 2012-11-01 2014-05-14 中国人民解放军第二军医大学 N-(5-(quinolyl-6-yl) pyridyl-3-yl)benzsulfamide derivatives, and preparation method and treatment use thereof
WO2014144547A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Amide derivatives of lactam based n-acylethanolamine acid amidase (naaa) inhibitors
WO2014144836A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Carbamate derivatives of lactam based n-acylethanolamine acid amidase (naaa) inhibitors
US9611283B1 (en) 2013-04-10 2017-04-04 Ariad Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for inhibiting cell proliferation in ALK-driven cancers
UY35675A (en) 2013-07-24 2015-02-27 Novartis Ag SUBSTITUTED DERIVATIVES OF QUINAZOLIN-4-ONA
ES2762581T3 (en) * 2013-12-27 2020-05-25 Api Corp Method for producing 5-hydroxypiperidine-2-carboxylic acid
WO2015109391A1 (en) 2014-01-24 2015-07-30 Children's Hospital Of Eastern Ontario Research Institute Inc. Smc combination therapy for the treatment of cancer
JP6768522B2 (en) * 2014-06-04 2020-10-14 サンフォード−バーンハム メディカル リサーチ インスティテュート Use of apoptotic protein inhibitor (IAP) antagonists in the treatment of HIV
US10590084B2 (en) 2016-03-09 2020-03-17 Blade Therapeutics, Inc. Cyclic keto-amide compounds as calpain modulators and methods of production and use thereof
AU2017292646A1 (en) 2016-07-05 2019-02-07 Blade Therapeutics, Inc. Calpain modulators and therapeutic uses thereof
PE20191153A1 (en) 2016-09-28 2019-09-05 Blade Therapeutics Inc CALPAINE MODULATORS AND THERAPEUTIC USES OF THE SAME
CN107314979A (en) * 2016-10-09 2017-11-03 河南理工大学 A kind of copper ion sensor based on rhodamine 6G, preparation and application
KR20200081417A (en) 2017-11-01 2020-07-07 더 리젠츠 오브 더 유니버시티 오브 캘리포니아 New agents targeting apoptosis inhibitor proteins
WO2019087696A1 (en) * 2017-11-01 2019-05-09 富士フイルム株式会社 Oral pharmaceutical composition
US10696638B2 (en) 2017-12-26 2020-06-30 Industrial Technology Research Institute Compounds for inhibiting AGC kinase and pharmaceutical compositions comprising the same
CN110963991A (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-07 嘉兴学院 PI3K inhibitor and preparation method and application thereof
CN109721522A (en) * 2018-12-29 2019-05-07 常州吉恩药业有限公司 A kind of high-quality N- tertbutyloxycarbonyl-L-Glutimic acid benzyl ester industrialized preparing process
WO2020156285A1 (en) * 2019-01-29 2020-08-06 博瑞生物医药（苏州）股份有限公司 Benzopyridone heterocyclic compound and use thereof
US11547759B2 (en) 2019-01-30 2023-01-10 Montelino Therapeutics, Inc. Bi-functional compounds and methods for targeted ubiquitination of androgen receptor
US11098025B2 (en) 2019-01-30 2021-08-24 Montelino Therapeutics, Inc. Bi-functional compounds and methods for targeted ubiquitination of androgen receptor
FI3966207T3 (en) 2019-05-10 2023-11-30 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals Llc Phenylaminopyrimidine amide autophagy inhibitors and methods of use thereof
EP3966206B1 (en) 2019-05-10 2023-08-09 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, LLC Heteroarylaminopyrimidine amide autophagy inhibitors and methods of use thereof
AU2020285197A1 (en) * 2019-05-24 2021-12-16 Glytech, Inc. Novel artificial protein catalyst
WO2020257180A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Deciphera Pharmaceuticals, Llc Aminopyrimidine amide autophagy inhibitors and methods of use thereof
CN110256322B (en) * 2019-06-27 2023-12-15 济南大学 Key intermediate for synthesizing avibactam and recrystallization process thereof
WO2021055749A1 (en) * 2019-09-19 2021-03-25 Totus Medicines Inc. Therapeutic conjugates
CA3160619A1 (en) 2019-11-08 2021-05-14 Coave Therapeutics Modified adeno-associated virus vectors and delivery thereof into the central nervous system
CN115210238A (en) * 2019-11-28 2022-10-18 拜耳公司 Substituted aminoquinolones as DGK alpha inhibitors for immune activation
EP4132921A4 (en) * 2020-04-09 2024-03-27 Purdue Research Foundation Pi3 kinase inhibitors and uses thereof
CN111665351B (en) * 2020-06-20 2021-12-03 江南大学 Method for quickly and specifically determining RNA content
CA3196597A1 (en) * 2020-11-06 2022-05-12 Gaelle Lefevre Lactam-modified adeno-associated virus vectors
WO2023070114A2 (en) * 2021-10-22 2023-04-27 Terremoto Biosciences, Inc. Reversible lysine covalent modifiers of egfr and uses thereof
CN114105848B (en) * 2021-11-24 2024-01-12 四川同晟生物医药有限公司 Preparation method of cis-D-hydroxyproline derivative
WO2023165581A1 (en) * 2022-03-03 2023-09-07 四川汇宇制药股份有限公司 Pyridine derivative and use thereof

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7792665B2 (en) * 2002-06-08 2010-09-07 Medical Research Council Method for designing a compound based on the three dimensional structure of phosphoinositide dependent protein kinase 1 (PDK1)

Family Cites Families (97)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3710795A (en) 1970-09-29 1973-01-16 Alza Corp Drug-delivery device with stretched, rate-controlling membrane
US4709016A (en) 1982-02-01 1987-11-24 Northeastern University Molecular analytical release tags and their use in chemical analysis
US5516931A (en) 1982-02-01 1996-05-14 Northeastern University Release tag compounds producing ketone signal groups
US5650270A (en) 1982-02-01 1997-07-22 Northeastern University Molecular analytical release tags and their use in chemical analysis
US4650750A (en) 1982-02-01 1987-03-17 Giese Roger W Method of chemical analysis employing molecular release tag compounds
US5262564A (en) 1992-10-30 1993-11-16 Octamer, Inc. Sulfinic acid adducts of organo nitroso compounds useful as retroviral inactivating agents anti-retroviral agents and anti-tumor agents
US5756466A (en) 1994-06-17 1998-05-26 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Inhibitors of interleukin-1β converting enzyme
US6057119A (en) 1994-06-17 2000-05-02 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Incorporated Crystal structure and mutants of interleukin-1β converting enzyme
US5760041A (en) 1996-02-05 1998-06-02 American Cyanamid Company 4-aminoquinazoline EGFR Inhibitors
CN100503580C (en) 1996-04-12 2009-06-24 沃尼尔·朗伯公司 Irreversible inhibitor of tyrosine kinase
CA2261974A1 (en) 1996-07-25 1998-02-05 Biogen, Inc. Molecular model for vla-4 inhibitors
US6686350B1 (en) 1996-07-25 2004-02-03 Biogen, Inc. Cell adhesion inhibitors
AU5896098A (en) 1996-12-06 1998-06-29 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of interleukin-1beta converting enzyme
US6002008A (en) 1997-04-03 1999-12-14 American Cyanamid Company Substituted 3-cyano quinolines
ZA986732B (en) 1997-07-29 1999-02-02 Warner Lambert Co Irreversible inhibitiors of tyrosine kinases
US6251912B1 (en) 1997-08-01 2001-06-26 American Cyanamid Company Substituted quinazoline derivatives
US6162613A (en) 1998-02-18 2000-12-19 Vertex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for designing inhibitors of serine/threonine-kinases and tyrosine kinases
US7383135B1 (en) 1998-05-04 2008-06-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Methods of designing inhibitors for JNK kinases
US6335155B1 (en) 1998-06-26 2002-01-01 Sunesis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for rapidly identifying small organic molecule ligands for binding to biological target molecules
US6919178B2 (en) 2000-11-21 2005-07-19 Sunesis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Extended tethering approach for rapid identification of ligands
IL142828A0 (en) 1998-09-25 2002-03-10 Childrens Medical Center Short peptides which selectively modulate the activity of protein kinases
US6288082B1 (en) 1998-09-29 2001-09-11 American Cyanamid Company Substituted 3-cyanoquinolines
GEP20032997B (en) 1998-11-19 2003-06-25 Warner Lambert Co N-[4-(3-Chloro-4-Fluoro-Phenylamino)-7-(3-Morpholin-4-Yl-Propoxy)-Quinazolin-6-Yl]-crylamide, as an Irreversible Inhibitor of Tyrosine Kinases
CA2375229A1 (en) 1999-06-17 2000-12-28 Source Precision Medicine, Inc. Method and compounds for inhibiting activity of serine elastases
US6420364B1 (en) 1999-09-13 2002-07-16 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compound useful as reversible inhibitors of cysteine proteases
AU2001236720A1 (en) 2000-02-05 2001-08-14 Bemis, Guy Compositions useful as inhibitors of erk
US6384051B1 (en) 2000-03-13 2002-05-07 American Cyanamid Company Method of treating or inhibiting colonic polyps
US7427689B2 (en) 2000-07-28 2008-09-23 Georgetown University ErbB-2 selective small molecule kinase inhibitors
MXPA03005606A (en) 2000-12-21 2003-10-06 Vertex Pharma Pyrazole compounds useful as protein kinase inhibitors.
US7235576B1 (en) 2001-01-12 2007-06-26 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation Omega-carboxyaryl substituted diphenyl ureas as raf kinase inhibitors
IL144583A0 (en) 2001-07-26 2002-05-23 Peptor Ltd Chimeric protein kinase inhibitors
RU2295518C2 (en) 2001-11-21 2007-03-20 Сьюнесис Фармасьютикалс, Инк. Method for finding ligands
EP1472536A4 (en) 2002-01-07 2007-02-14 Sequoia Pharmaceuticals Broad spectrum inhibitors
WO2003081210A2 (en) 2002-03-21 2003-10-02 Sunesis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Identification of kinase inhibitors
MY141867A (en) 2002-06-20 2010-07-16 Vertex Pharma Substituted pyrimidines useful as protein kinase inhibitors
EP1375517A1 (en) * 2002-06-21 2004-01-02 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Structure of a glucocorticoid receptor ligand binding domain comprising an expanded binding pocket and methods employing same
GB0221169D0 (en) * 2002-09-12 2002-10-23 Univ Bath Crystal
CN1717396A (en) 2002-11-28 2006-01-04 舍林股份公司 Chk-, Pdk- and Akt-inhibitory pyrimidines, their production and use as pharmaceutical agents
PE20040945A1 (en) 2003-02-05 2004-12-14 Warner Lambert Co PREPARATION OF SUBSTITUTED QUINAZOLINES
CA2515688A1 (en) 2003-02-11 2004-08-26 Immusol Incorporated Sirna libraries optimized for predetermined protein families
UY28213A1 (en) 2003-02-28 2004-09-30 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corp NEW CYANOPIRIDINE DERIVATIVES USEFUL IN THE TREATMENT OF CANCER AND OTHER DISORDERS.
EP1599466B1 (en) 2003-02-28 2010-11-24 Bayer HealthCare LLC 2-oxo-1,3,5-perhydrotriazapine derivatives useful in the treatment of hyper-proliferative, angiogenesis, and inflammatrory disorders
WO2004078128A2 (en) 2003-02-28 2004-09-16 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corporation Substituted pyridine derivatives useful in the treatment of cancer and other disorders
EP1610808A4 (en) 2003-03-26 2011-04-06 Sudhir Paul Covalent attachment of ligands to nucleophilic proteins guided by non-covalent binding
US8748601B2 (en) 2003-04-11 2014-06-10 The Regents Of The University Of California Selective serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
WO2005000197A2 (en) 2003-04-11 2005-01-06 The Regents Of The University Of California Selective serine/threonine kinase inhibitors
DE602004007382T2 (en) 2003-05-20 2008-04-17 Bayer Pharmaceuticals Corp., West Haven DIARYL UREAS FOR PDGFR MEDIATED DISEASES
CN1832757A (en) 2003-08-01 2006-09-13 惠氏控股公司 Use of a combination of an epidermal growth factor receptor kinase inhibitor and cytotoxic agents for treatment and inhibition of cancer
GB0321710D0 (en) 2003-09-16 2003-10-15 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
EP1670422A4 (en) 2003-09-17 2007-08-01 Sunesis Pharmaceuticals Inc Identification of kinase inhibitors
WO2005043118A2 (en) 2003-10-27 2005-05-12 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Drug discovery method
JP2007522116A (en) * 2004-01-16 2007-08-09 ザ リージェンツ オブ ザ ユニバーシティ オブ ミシガン Conformationally constrained Smac mimetics and uses thereof
KR20060132882A (en) 2004-01-30 2006-12-22 메르크 파텐트 게엠베하 Bisarylurea derivatives
US20080268460A1 (en) 2004-05-20 2008-10-30 Wyeth Assays to Identify Irreversibly Binding Inhibitors of Receptor Tyrosine Kinases
WO2005115145A2 (en) 2004-05-20 2005-12-08 Wyeth Quinone substituted quinazoline and quinoline kinase inhibitors
US7521457B2 (en) 2004-08-20 2009-04-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pyrimidines as PLK inhibitors
CA2581375A1 (en) 2004-09-27 2006-04-06 Kosan Biosciences Incorporated Specific kinase inhibitors
BRPI0515991A (en) 2004-10-13 2008-08-19 Merck Patent Gmbh heterocyclically substituted bisarylurea derivatives as kinase inhibitors
ZA200706804B (en) 2005-02-03 2008-10-29 Gen Hospital Corp Method for treating gefitinib resistant cancer
WO2006113151A2 (en) 2005-04-14 2006-10-26 Wyeth Use of an epidermal growth factor receptor kinase inhibitor (egfr) in gefitinib resistant patients
AR053602A1 (en) 2005-05-03 2007-05-09 Smithkline Beecham Corp COMPOUND OF 2- ARILAMINO -4-OXO-1,3-TIAZOL-5 (4H) - SUBSTITUTED, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES IT, PROCESS TO PREPARE IT AND USE OF THE COMPOUND TO PREPARE A MEDICINAL PRODUCT
GB0509224D0 (en) 2005-05-05 2005-06-15 Chroma Therapeutics Ltd Inhibitors of intracellular enzymatic activity
JP2008542196A (en) 2005-05-05 2008-11-27 クロマ セラピューティクス リミテッド Alpha amino acid ester-drug complex hydrolyzable by carboxylesterase
JP2008545670A (en) 2005-05-27 2008-12-18 バイエル・ヘルスケア・アクチェンゲゼルシャフト Combination therapy involving diarylureas for the treatment of disease
NZ592990A (en) 2005-11-01 2013-01-25 Targegen Inc Bi-aryl meta-pyrimidine inhibitors of kinases
SG166827A1 (en) 2005-11-03 2010-12-29 Vertex Pharma Aminopyrimidines useful as kinase inhibitors
WO2007062459A1 (en) 2005-11-29 2007-06-07 Cytopia Research Pty Ltd Selective kinase inhibitors based on pyridine scaffold
WO2007120339A1 (en) 2005-12-19 2007-10-25 Genentech, Inc. Pyrimidine kinase inhibitors
TW200736232A (en) 2006-01-26 2007-10-01 Astrazeneca Ab Pyrimidine derivatives
EP2007801A4 (en) 2006-04-07 2010-08-04 Modpro Ab Binder for c-reactive protein
CN101054380B (en) 2006-04-13 2011-07-20 沈阳药科大学 Pyrazolopyrimidine derivative used as cell cycle dependency protein kinase inhibitor
US7601852B2 (en) 2006-05-11 2009-10-13 Kosan Biosciences Incorporated Macrocyclic kinase inhibitors
CA2651732C (en) 2006-05-18 2014-10-14 Mannkind Corporation Intracellular kinase inhibitors
ATE531263T1 (en) 2006-09-22 2011-11-15 Pharmacyclics Inc BRUTON TYROSINE KINASE INHIBITORS
CA2673125C (en) 2006-10-19 2015-04-21 Rigel Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for inhibition of the jak pathway
MX2009006081A (en) 2006-12-08 2009-06-17 Irmc Llc Compounds and compositions as protein kinase inhibitors.
AU2007337088A1 (en) 2006-12-19 2008-07-03 Genentech, Inc. Pyrimidine kinase inhibitors
JP5539734B2 (en) 2007-01-31 2014-07-02 ワイエム・バイオサイエンシズ・オーストラリア・ピーティーワイ・リミテッド Thiopyrimidine-based compounds and uses thereof
PE20090717A1 (en) 2007-05-18 2009-07-18 Smithkline Beecham Corp QUINOLINE DERIVATIVES AS PI3 KINASE INHIBITORS
US8242271B2 (en) 2007-06-04 2012-08-14 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
WO2009030890A1 (en) 2007-09-03 2009-03-12 University Court Of The University Of Dundee Pyrimidine compounds for the treatment of cancer, septic shock and/or primary open angle glaucoma
US7989465B2 (en) 2007-10-19 2011-08-02 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. 4,6-disubstituted pyrimidines useful as kinase inhibitors
US7982036B2 (en) 2007-10-19 2011-07-19 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. 4,6-disubstitued pyrimidines useful as kinase inhibitors
KR20150113217A (en) 2007-12-21 2015-10-07 셀진 아빌로믹스 리서치, 인코포레이티드 HCV protease inhibitors and uses thereof
US8293705B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-10-23 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. HCV protease inhibitors and uses thereof
US8309685B2 (en) 2007-12-21 2012-11-13 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. HCV protease inhibitors and uses thereof
CN101951770B (en) 2007-12-21 2014-12-31 阿维拉制药公司 Hcv protease inhibitors and uses thereof
EP2244721A4 (en) 2008-01-14 2017-01-18 Bayer Intellectual Property GmbH Sulfone substituted 2,3-dihydroimidazo ý1,2-c¨quinazoline derivatives useful for treating hyper-proliferative disorders and diseases with angiogenesis
CN102083800A (en) 2008-06-27 2011-06-01 阿维拉制药公司 Heteroaryl compounds and uses thereof
US8338439B2 (en) 2008-06-27 2012-12-25 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. 2,4-disubstituted pyrimidines useful as kinase inhibitors
US8188137B2 (en) 2008-08-15 2012-05-29 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. HCV protease inhibitors and uses thereof
RU2014150660A (en) 2008-09-05 2015-07-20 Селджен Авиломикс Рисерч, Инк. ALGORITHM FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF IRREVERSIBLE ACTING INHIBITORS
US8603737B2 (en) 2008-09-19 2013-12-10 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. Methods for identifying HCV protease inhibitors
US20110230476A1 (en) 2009-09-09 2011-09-22 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. Pi3 kinase inhibitors and uses thereof
US9556426B2 (en) 2009-09-16 2017-01-31 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. Protein kinase conjugates and inhibitors
CN102812167A (en) 2009-12-30 2012-12-05 阿维拉制药公司 Ligand-directed Covalent Modification Of Protein
EP3144298A1 (en) 2010-08-10 2017-03-22 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. Besylate salt of a btk inhibitor

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7792665B2 (en) * 2002-06-08 2010-09-07 Medical Research Council Method for designing a compound based on the three dimensional structure of phosphoinositide dependent protein kinase 1 (PDK1)

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
B. Baker "Factors in Design of Active-Site-Directed Irreversible Inhibitors", J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1964, 53(4), 347-364 *
Feldman et al. J. Biol. Chem., Vol. 280, No. 20, pp. 19867-19874, 2005 *

Cited By (71)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20100185419A1 (en) * 2008-09-05 2010-07-22 Avila Therapeutics, Inc. Algorithm for designing irreversible inhibitors
US9556426B2 (en) 2009-09-16 2017-01-31 Celgene Avilomics Research, Inc. Protein kinase conjugates and inhibitors
US10662195B2 (en) 2009-09-16 2020-05-26 Celgene Car Llc Protein kinase conjugates and inhibitors
US11542492B2 (en) 2009-12-30 2023-01-03 Celgene Car Llc Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein
US8975409B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2015-03-10 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
US10835520B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2020-11-17 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
US10117861B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2018-11-06 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
US9340499B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2016-05-17 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
US9820980B2 (en) 2011-09-29 2017-11-21 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
US9493510B2 (en) 2013-01-10 2016-11-15 Noliva Therapeutics Llc Peptidomimetic compounds
US10011639B2 (en) 2013-01-10 2018-07-03 Noliva Therapeutics Llc Peptidomimetic compounds
US9926267B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-03-27 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of K-Ras G12C
US10273207B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-04-30 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of kras G12C
US9745319B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-08-29 Araxes Pharma Llc Irreversible covalent inhibitors of the GTPase K-Ras G12C
US9227978B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-01-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of Kras G12C
US10919850B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2021-02-16 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of KRas G12C
US9676719B2 (en) 2013-03-26 2017-06-13 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Phenyl derivative
US11878985B2 (en) 2013-10-10 2024-01-23 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazolines as inhibitors of KRAS G12C
WO2015054572A1 (en) * 2013-10-10 2015-04-16 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of kras g12c
US10927125B2 (en) 2013-10-10 2021-02-23 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted cinnolines as inhibitors of KRAS G12C
AU2014331794C1 (en) * 2013-10-10 2019-09-12 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C
EA033689B9 (en) * 2013-10-10 2020-04-29 Араксис Фарма Ллк Inhibitors of kras g12c
AU2014331794B2 (en) * 2013-10-10 2019-04-04 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C
US9840516B2 (en) 2013-10-10 2017-12-12 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazolines as inhibitors of KRAS G12C
EP3636639A1 (en) * 2013-10-10 2020-04-15 Araxes Pharma LLC Inhibitors of kras g12c
EA033689B1 (en) * 2013-10-10 2019-11-18 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of kras g12c
US10370386B2 (en) 2013-10-10 2019-08-06 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinolines as inhibitors of KRAS G12C
US10111874B2 (en) 2014-09-18 2018-10-30 Araxes Pharma Llc Combination therapies for treatment of cancer
US9862701B2 (en) 2014-09-25 2018-01-09 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10011600B2 (en) 2014-09-25 2018-07-03 Araxes Pharma Llc Methods and compositions for inhibition of Ras
US10829458B2 (en) 2015-04-10 2020-11-10 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use thereof
US10246424B2 (en) 2015-04-10 2019-04-02 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use thereof
US10428064B2 (en) 2015-04-15 2019-10-01 Araxes Pharma Llc Fused-tricyclic inhibitors of KRAS and methods of use thereof
US10144724B2 (en) 2015-07-22 2018-12-04 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use thereof
US10351550B2 (en) 2015-07-22 2019-07-16 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use thereof
US10858343B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-12-08 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10875842B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-12-29 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10647703B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-05-12 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10975071B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2021-04-13 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10689356B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-06-23 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10730867B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2020-08-04 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10882847B2 (en) 2015-09-28 2021-01-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US9810690B2 (en) 2015-10-19 2017-11-07 Araxes Pharma Llc Method for screening inhibitors of Ras
US10414757B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2019-09-17 Araxes Pharma Llc 2-substituted quinazoline compounds comprising a substituted heterocyclic group and methods of use thereof
US11021470B2 (en) 2015-11-16 2021-06-01 Araxes Pharma Llc 2-substituted quinazoline compounds comprising a substituted heterocyclic group and methods of use thereof
US9988357B2 (en) 2015-12-09 2018-06-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Methods for preparation of quinazoline derivatives
US10822312B2 (en) 2016-03-30 2020-11-03 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline compounds and methods of use
US11267812B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2022-03-08 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRAS G12C inhibitors
US10125134B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2018-11-13 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US10633381B2 (en) 2016-05-18 2020-04-28 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US10646488B2 (en) 2016-07-13 2020-05-12 Araxes Pharma Llc Conjugates of cereblon binding compounds and G12C mutant KRAS, HRAS or NRAS protein modulating compounds and methods of use thereof
US10280172B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2019-05-07 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10723738B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2020-07-28 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of KRAS G12C mutant proteins
US10377743B2 (en) 2016-10-07 2019-08-13 Araxes Pharma Llc Inhibitors of RAS and methods of use thereof
US11358959B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2022-06-14 Araxes Pharma Llc Benzothiophene and benzothiazole compounds and methods of use thereof
US11279689B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2022-03-22 Araxes Pharma Llc 1-(3-(6-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)benzofuran-2-yl)azetidin-1 yl)prop-2-en-1-one derivatives and similar compounds as KRAS G12C modulators for treating cancer
US11136308B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2021-10-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Substituted quinazoline and quinazolinone compounds and methods of use thereof
US11059819B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2021-07-13 Janssen Biotech, Inc. Fused hetero-hetero bicyclic compounds and methods of use thereof
US11274093B2 (en) 2017-01-26 2022-03-15 Araxes Pharma Llc Fused bicyclic benzoheteroaromatic compounds and methods of use thereof
US10736897B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2020-08-11 Araxes Pharma Llc Compounds and methods of use thereof for treatment of cancer
US11377441B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2022-07-05 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of KRAS
US10745385B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2020-08-18 Araxes Pharma Llc Covalent inhibitors of KRAS
US11639346B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2023-05-02 Araxes Pharma Llc Quinazoline derivatives as modulators of mutant KRAS, HRAS or NRAS
US10647715B2 (en) 2017-11-15 2020-05-12 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US10689377B2 (en) 2017-11-15 2020-06-23 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US11932633B2 (en) 2018-05-07 2024-03-19 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US11548888B2 (en) 2019-01-10 2023-01-10 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12C inhibitors
US11453683B1 (en) 2019-08-29 2022-09-27 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12D inhibitors
US11964989B2 (en) 2019-08-29 2024-04-23 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. KRas G12D inhibitors
US11890285B2 (en) 2019-09-24 2024-02-06 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. Combination therapies
US11702418B2 (en) 2019-12-20 2023-07-18 Mirati Therapeutics, Inc. SOS1 inhibitors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP2519664A4 (en) 2014-03-12
JP2013516422A (en) 2013-05-13
US20170218353A1 (en) 2017-08-03
AU2010339456A1 (en) 2012-07-05
JP2016195596A (en) 2016-11-24
EP2519664A1 (en) 2012-11-07
MX2012007684A (en) 2012-10-05
CN102812167A (en) 2012-12-05
AU2016244281A1 (en) 2016-11-03
TW201134825A (en) 2011-10-16
RU2012132473A (en) 2014-02-10
KR20130067487A (en) 2013-06-25
BR112012015721A2 (en) 2017-09-26
CA2785738A1 (en) 2011-07-07
WO2011082285A1 (en) 2011-07-07
SG181965A1 (en) 2012-08-30
US11542492B2 (en) 2023-01-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11542492B2 (en) Ligand-directed covalent modification of protein
US11351149B2 (en) Nitrile-containing antiviral compounds
US11254681B2 (en) Optionally fused heterocyclyl-substituted derivatives of pyrimidine useful for the treatment of inflammatory, metabolic, oncologic and autoimmune diseases
US7956056B2 (en) Certain 1H-imidazo[4,5-B]pyrazin-2(3H)-ones and 1H-imidazo[4,5-B]pyrazin-2-ols, compositions thereof, and methods for their use
US20210276996A1 (en) Degraders that target proteins via keap1
EP2935244B1 (en) Novel benzimidazole derivatives as kinase inhibitors
CN103168039B (en) Imidazopyridine syk inhibitor
CA2734802E (en) Pyrrolopyrimidine compounds as cdk inhibitors
CN109071552A (en) The degradation and application method that cell cycle protein dependent kinase 4/6 (CDK4/6) passes through the conjugation of CDK4/6 inhibitor and E3 ligase ligand
US20130023514A1 (en) Substituted pyrrolotriazines as protein kinase inhibitors
KR20130008557A (en) Deuterated pyrrolopyrimidine compounds as inhibitors of cdk4/6
US20080242695A1 (en) Certain Chemical Entities, Compositions, and Methods
EP1899346B1 (en) Pyrrolotriazine compounds useful as kinase inhibitors
US20230099018A1 (en) Hepatitis c virus ns3/4a protease inhibitors
Chen et al. Design and synthesis of Imidazo [1, 2-b] pyridazine IRAK4 inhibitors for the treatment of mutant MYD88 L265P diffuse large B-cell lymphoma
US20140303366A1 (en) Certain 1H-Imidazo[4,5-b]pyrazin-2(3H)-ones and 1H-Imidazo[4,5-b]pyrazin-2-ols and Methods for Their Use

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PETTER, RUSSELL C.;JEWELL, CHARLES F.;LEE, KWANGHO;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20100312 TO 20100319;REEL/FRAME:025772/0731

AS Assignment

Owner name: AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:PETTER, RUSSELL C.;JEWELL, CHARLES F.;LEE, KWANGHO;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20110511 TO 20110512;REEL/FRAME:026536/0235

AS Assignment

Owner name: CELGENE AVILOMICS RESEARCH, INC., MASSACHUSETTS

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:AVILA THERAPEUTICS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:029037/0818

Effective date: 20120614

AS Assignment

Owner name: CELGENE CAR LLC, BERMUDA

Free format text: MERGER;ASSIGNOR:CELGENE AVILOMICS RESEARCH, INC.;REEL/FRAME:041264/0001

Effective date: 20161222

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION